WKD 948 021 05 04/04

© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG

Porsche, the Porsche crest, Cayenne, Tiptronic

and Tequipment are registered trademarks and
the distinctive shapes of Porsche automobiles are
trademarks of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Germany
Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how Your car has thousands of parts and components
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition which have been designed and manufactured in
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a by having it serviced regularly. accordance with Porsche's high standards of en-
Porsche Cayenne. A separate Warranty and Customer Informa- gineering quality and safety.
tion Booklet contains detailed information about
Judging by the car you have chosen, you are a mo- Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
the warranties covering your Porsche.
torist of a special breed, and you are probably no interfere with those safety features built into
novice when it comes to automobiles. For U.S. only: the vehicle.
If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe man-
could cause a crash, injury or death, you should
should take time to familiarize yourself with your ner obeying the local laws and in the light of driv-
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Porsche and its performance characteristics. Al- ing conditions faced by you, and in accordance
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
ways drive within your own unique capabilities as with the instructions provided in this Owner's Man-
fying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche
a driver and your level of experience with your ual.
Cars N.A.).
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your
Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize in- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
those laws and driving conditions, or by
jury, always use your safety belts. Never consume an investigation, and if it finds that a safety prob-
ignoring the instructions in this manual.
alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of lem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re-
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
your vehicle. call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
lead to accidents and severe or fatal person-
not become involved in individual problems be-
This Owner's Manual contains a host of useful in- al injuries.
tween you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
formation. Please take the time to read this manu-
al before you drive your new Porsche. Become fa- To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
miliar with the operation of your Porsche car for Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-(800)-424-9393
maximum safety and operating pleasure. The bet- (or366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
ter you know your Porsche, the more pleasure you NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Wash-
will experience driving your new car. ington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other in-
Always keep your Owner's Manual in the car, and formation about motor vehicle safety from the Hot-
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your line.
Porsche.

2
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Important! Note to owners
damage.
For your own protection and longer service life of
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compo- In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
your car, please heed all operating instructions
nents such as spoilers or underside panels To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
and special warnings. These special warnings use
affect the driving behavior and therefore
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
must be replaced immediately. Note aux proprietaires
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
Your car may have all or some of the components warnings contain important messages regarding
described in this manual. your safety and/or the potential for damage to Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
Should you have difficulty understanding any of your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in se- ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
the explanations of features or equipment installed rious mechanical failure or even physical injury. ou du:
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
check with your dealer on other available options create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
or equipment. engineering features built into your car. 5045 Orbitor Drive
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and Building #8, Suite 200
driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the pas- consistently with the law, according to the dri- Mississauga, Ontario
senger's side of the vehicle. ving conditions, and the instructions in this ma- Canada L4W 4Y4
nual. Telephone number for customer assistance:
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the information available at the time Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
of printing. cause accidents and severe or fatal personal
injuries.
It has always been Porsche's policy to continuous-
ly improve its products. Porsche, therefore, re-
serves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improve-
ments in its product without incurring any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.

3
Porsche and the Environment California Proposition 65 Warning Production
Warning! Whether in production or repair, Porsche always
Environmental guidelines relies on environmentally friendly technology.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer- An example of this is the water-based paint used
We develop and produce exclusive vehicles with tain vehicle components contain or emit chemi- in our paint shops.
sophisticated environmental and safety techno- cals known to the State of California to cause can- Water-based paints and new painting methods
logy and a great ability to fascinate. cer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. reduce solvent emissions by 70 per cent.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and The water used in the paint shop is recirculated.
Our environmental policy is based on the certain products of component wear contain or
following principles: Waste water leaves the Porsche factory only after
emit chemicals known to the State of California to being appropriately treated.
– The maximum possible use of environmental cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
and safety technology that is economically tive harm. A waste-management scheme has been intro-
justifiable. duced to reduce the amount of waste while
simultaneously increasing the recycling quota.
– Economical usage of energy and resources.
– Involvement of our business partners and
contractors in our efforts to protect the
environment.
– Open dialogue with all social groups.

4
Environmentally friendly vehicles Recycling – Emission control is built in
for a Porsche, this is virtually an
Modern environmental technology ensures compli- academic question Innovative engine technology combines high
ance with all emission laws applicable worldwide. engine performance and environmental compati-
More than two-thirds of all Porsches ever built are bility.
It has the following advantages: still running.
The engine diagnosis system electronically
– Rapid “operational readiness” of the catalytic monitors the components and systems that affect
But, just in case recycling is ever necessary,
converters ensures low emissions, even in exhaust gases.
we take the following precautionary
short-trip operation.
measures: This continuous monitoring and fault storage
– Reliable operation and good emission control enables swift, reliable diagnosis and fault detec-
– Utilisation-friendly design.
over a long useful life. tion.
– Identification of materials.
f Please observe the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” Faults are indicated to the driver by the “Emission
on Page 258. – Use of recyclable materials. control” warning light and display.
– Reusable components designed for simple f Please observe the chapter “EMISSION CONT-
removal. ROL” on Page 79.

5
Setting and operating vehicle Portable Fuel Containers Engine Exhaust
components when driving
Danger! Danger!
Warning!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
There is a danger of accident if you set or empty, may leak, causing an explosion, or Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi- result in fire in case of an accident. nents which you can smell. They also contain
gation system, telephone or other equipment carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
when driving. and odorless gas.
ers in your vehicle.
This could distract you from the traffic and Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. ness and even death if inhaled.
f Operate the components while driving only if f Never start or let the engine run in an en-
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
longed periods with the engine on and the car
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
not moving.

6
Vehicles with SportDesign package
Caution!
Risk of damage. On vehicles with Sport-
Design package, front, rear, and side
member trim are painted and located lower
on the vehicle. Off-road driving can seriously
damage these trim parts.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged.
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle.
f Avoid driving through water.
f Do not use side member trim as a running
board.

7
Fuel Quality
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate
properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engine's “Electronic Oktane™ knock control“ will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.

Fuels containing alcohol and ether

Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels during certain portions of the year.
Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain alcohols (such as methanol or ethanol) or ether (such as MTBE).
Under normal conditions, the amount of these compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche, provided the octane requirements for your vehicle are met.
We recommend, however, to change to a different fuel or station if any of the following problems occur with your vehicle:
– Deterioration of driveability and performance.
– Substantially reduced fuel economy.
– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially at high altitude or at high temperature.
– Engine malfunction or stalling.

Fuels containing MMT

Some North American fuels contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
If such fuels are used, your emission control system performance may be negatively affected.
The check engine warning lights on your instrument panel may turn on.
If this occurs, Porsche recommends you stop using fuels containing MMT.

8
 Controls, Safety, Instruments 11 - 200
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 201 - 240
Maintenance, Car Care 241 - 274
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 275 - 352
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 353 - 367
Index 368 - 377

9
10
 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Keys ............................................................ 17 Clock ...........................................................77 Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................172
Central Locking System ................................ 21 Voltmeter .....................................................78 Porsche Communication
Porsche Entry & Drive ................................... 24 Emission Control...........................................79 Management (PCM) .....................................174
Doors .......................................................... 26 Multi-Purpose Display ....................................80 Storage......................................................176
Alarm System, Ultrasound Passenger Compart- Warning Lights and Warning Messages .........108 Cupholder ..................................................180
ment Monitoring System, Inclination Sensor .... 27 Light Switch ...............................................116 Rear Lid .....................................................182
Power Windows ............................................ 29 Instrument Illumination.................................118 Rear Window ..............................................184
Front seats................................................... 32 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment .........118 Engine Compartment Lid .............................184
Front seat with memory................................. 33 Turn signal/High Beam/ Loadspace .................................................186
Easy Entry Function ...................................... 35 Headlight Flasher Stalk ................................119 Luggage Compartment Cover ......................187
Headrests .................................................... 36 Emergency flasher ......................................120 Luggage Safety Net ....................................189
Rear Seats ................................................... 37 Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ....................121 Ski Bag ......................................................191
Heated Seats – Front and Rear ...................... 40 Cruise Control ............................................124 Roof Transport System................................193
Safety Belts.................................................. 42 Vents .........................................................127 Trailer Coupling ..........................................194
Child Restraint Anchorages............................ 46 Fresh-air intake ...........................................127 Loading Information ....................................195
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 47 Heated Rear Window ...................................128
Airbag Systems ............................................ 49 Manual Air Conditioning ...............................129
Steering Wheel ............................................. 52 Automatically Controlled
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ...................... 54 Two-Zone Air Conditioning ...........................132
Interior Mirror ............................................... 56 Automatically Controlled
Door Mirrors................................................. 56 Four-Zone Air Conditioning ...........................136
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Mirror .......................... 58 Parking Heater............................................142
Ignition Lock/Steering Lock ........................... 59 Sun Visors..................................................147
Starting and Stopping the Engine ................... 61 Sun Blinds, Rear Side Windows ....................148
Parking Brake............................................... 64 Interior Lighting ..........................................149
Brakes ......................................................... 65 Door-Surrounding Lighting ...........................151
Instrument Panel USA Models ........................ 70 Coming Home Function (Off Delay) ...............151
Instrument Panel Canada Models.................... 72 Sliding/Lifting Roof .....................................152
Oil Temperature Gauge ................................. 74 Parking Aids ...............................................162
Cooling System ............................................ 75 Garage Door Opener ...................................167
Fuel ............................................................. 76 Ashtray ......................................................170
Odometer .................................................... 76 Cigarette Lighter.........................................171

Controls, Safety, Instruments 11

Dear Porsche Owner Before driving off... f If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/child seat restraint system to ensure
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your that restraints are properly adjusted.
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid Check the following items first
f Check all exterior and interior lights for opera-
quality control and demanding inspections. These
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any tion and that the lenses are clean.
engineering and safety features will be enhanced
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
by you... f Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly. necessary, have them adjusted.
Check tires for damage and tire wear.
the safe driver... f Check under the vehicle for leaks.
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened
– who knows his car and all controls, f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
and not loose or missing.
– who maintains the vehicle properly, f Check engine oil level, add if necessary. Make Emergency equipment
– who uses driving skills wisely and always it a habit to have engine oil checked with every
drives within her/his own capabilities and the fuel filling. It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
level of familiarity with the vehicle. f Check all fluid levels such as windshield wash- in your vehicle.
er and brake fluid levels. Some of the items you should have are: window
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
scraper, snow brush, container or bag of sand or
perform most of the checks listed on the following f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-aid kit,
pages. If in doubt, have these checks performed cranks the engine properly. etc.
by your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly.
f Check and if necessary replace worn or
cracked wiper blades.
f See that all windows are clear and unobstruct-
ed.
f Check air intake slots and area between en-
gine compartment lid and windshield are free
of snow and ice, so the heater and the wind-
shield wipers work properly.

12 Controls, Safety, Instruments

In the driver's seat... On the road... f When parked, always put the handbrake on
and put the gearshift lever in neutral or the se-
f Check operation of the horn. f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol lector lever in position P.
or drugs. On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
curb.
controls.To reduce the possibility of injury from f Always have your safety belt fastened.
the airbag deployment, you should always sit f When emergency repairs become necessary,
f Always drive defensively.
back as far from the steering wheel as is prac- move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
Expect the unexpected.
tical, while still maintaining full vehicle control. emergency flasher and use other warning de-
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. vices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ex-
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
f Buckle your safety belts. haust system may come in contact with dry
conditions warrant it.
grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable ma-
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in terial.
f Check all warning and indicator lights with igni- front of you, depending on traffic, road and
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
tion on and engine not running. weather conditions.
with every fuel filling.
f Start engine and check all warning displays for f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
warning symbols. weather.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
duced speeds, particularly on roads with
f Lock doors from inside, especially with chil- standing water, as the handling characteristics
dren in the car to prevent inadvertent opening of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro-
of doors from inside or outside. Drive with planing of the tires.
doors locked.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the ve-
hicle with engine idling.
Please observe the chapter “ENGINE EX-
HAUST” on Page 6.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 13

Break in hints for the first f Do not participate in motor racing events, Engine oil consumption
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers) 2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers). During the break-in period oil consumption may be
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining opti- higher than normal.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering or
mum performance from your new Porsche. other controls during the break-in period which will As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac- gradually disappear. the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
turing methods, it cannot be completely avoided the engine is operated, the climate and road con-
that the moving parts have to wear in with each Break in brake pads ditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxi-
other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in the first dation of the lubricant.
2,000 miles (3,000 km). New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in“, f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the fuel filling, add if necessary.
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
Therefore: f Please observe the chapter “ENGINE DATA” on
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
Page 356.
f Preferably take longer trips. pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance brake discs are replaced.
driving whenever possible.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops. New tires
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of New tires do not have maximum traction. They
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute). tend to be slippery.
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
Neutral or in gear. speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles (100
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when to 200 km). Longer braking distances must be
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in anticipated.
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.

14 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 1 Filler flap release
2 Rear lid release
3 Power windows
4 Inner door handle
5 Door mirror adjustment
6 Engine compartment lid release
7 Parking brake
8 Diagnostic socket
9 Parking brake release
10 Ignition lock/steering lock
11 Steering wheel adjustment
12 Seat adjustment
13 Instrument lighting knob
14 Light switch
15 Turn signal/high, low beam/headlight flasher
stalk
16 Operating lever for cruise control
17 Rocker switches for Tiptronic
18 Horn
19 Emergency flasher switch
20 Glove compartment

Controls, Safety, Instruments 15

Never invite car theft! Warning! To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as fol-
Risk of a serious accident.
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock in- lows when leaving your vehicle:
The steering column will lock when you re-
vites car theft.
move the key while you are driving or as the f Close windows.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are stan- car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
f Close sliding/lifting roof or Panorama Roof
dard equipment in your Porsche. The gong alarm steer the car.
System.
will sound if you open the driver's door while the
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
key is still in the ignition lock. It is your reminder to f Remove ignition key (switch ignition off in vehi-
while you are driving.
pull the key out of the ignition lock and to lock the cles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
doors.
f Engage steering lock.
Warning! f Lock storage tray between the front seats and
glove compartment.
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in serious personal injury and f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, radio
property damage. control module, telephone, house keys) from
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the the car.
key in the ignition lock, especially if children f Lock doors.
and/or pets are left unattended in the vehi-
cle. They can operate power windows and f Lock the glove compartment.
other controls. If the engine is left running, f Close oddment trays.
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
f Cover luggage compartment with the luggage
f Always remove the ignition key. compartment cover.
f Always set the parking brake. f Close rear lid and rear window.
f Lock the doors with the key or with the remote
control.

16 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 f Inform your insurance company of any loss or
theft of car keys or if extra or replacement
keys have been made.
f Remove the ignition key, even if leaving the ve-
hicle only briefly.

Folding out the key bit

f Press release button B.
The key bit folds out.

Folding in the key bit

f Press release button B and fold in the key bit.

Replacement keys
Car keys can only be ordered through an autho-
rized Porsche dealer. Sometimes, this may take a
A - Car key long time. Panic button
B - Release button for key bit
You should therefore always keep a spare key on
your person. Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), In dangerous situations or when one's own safety
Keys but under no circumstances in or on the vehicle. is threatened, it is possible to draw attention to
the situation by triggering an alarm.
Two car keys with integrated remote control are The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
supplied with your Porsche. The car keys are de- to the vehicle control module by your authorized To trigger an alarm
signed as folding keys. Porsche dealer. All keys belonging to the vehicle
must also be reported again. f Press button.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle. The horn sounds and the emergency flashers
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with Note flash.
them except under exceptional circumstances. Third parties can continue to operate the mechan- To stop the alarm
ical locks using the lost key.
f Press button again.
The horn becomes silent and the emergency
flashers go out.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 17

Emergency operation – pulling out the 2. Using a pointed object, e.g. a ball-point pen,
ignition key press into opening A beside the ignition lock
and keep it pressed.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
3. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise.
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency op-
eration is performed. 4. Remove ignition key.
1. Remove the cover (arrow) using the screwdriv-
er from the tool kit.

18 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Immobilizer
There is a transponder (an electronic component),
containing a stored code, in each key.
Before the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the en-
gine started only using an authorized ignition key.

Switching off the immobilizer

f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.

Switching on the immobilizer

f Withdraw the ignition key.

Emergency operation – locking the doors 3. Using the key bit, press red slide control B in
the direction indicated by the arrow.
If the central locking system fails, the doors can
4. Fit cover A again.
only be locked if the emergency operation is
performed. 5. Repeat procedure on the passenger‘s and the
rear doors.
1. Open the passenger‘s door.
6. Close all doors.
2. Remove cover A.
7. Lock the driver's door with the key at the door
lock.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 19

 Unlocking rear lid, rear window and spare Opening the rear window
wheel bracket
f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
f Briefly press button 2. The rear window pops open.
Emergency flasher flashes once.
The rear lid, rear window and spare wheel
bracket can be opened with the appropriate
unlocking button.
The rear window and spare wheel bracket are
always unlocked if the rear lid is unlocked.
f Please observe the chapter “REAR LID” on
Page 182.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL”
on Page 307.
If the rear window is not opened, both the rear lid
and rear window will lock automatically after
30 seconds.
Unlocking vehicle doors
Note on operation
f Briefly press button 1 on the remote control.
You can select the various options for unlocking
the doors, rear lid and rear window on the multi-
Locking vehicle doors
purpose display in the instrument panel.
f Briefly press button 1 on the remote control. f Please observe the chapter “COMFORT” on
Page 103.

20 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Central Locking System The vehicle doors can be centrally unlocked or Automatic relocking
locked with the remote control.
If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the vehicle
USA: KR5KESSY All doors are locked or unlocked if central locking
doors is opened within approximately
button A is activated in the relevant armrest.
30 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
Canada: CAN 267 104 139 not completely closed. Note on operation

If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door If the passenger compartment monitoring system
This device complies with: lock, only the driver’s door is opened. In order to and the inclination sensor have been deactivated
Part 15 of the FCC Rules prevent the alarm system from being triggered, (theft protection is limited), the doors can be
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. you must switch the ignition on within 15 seconds opened after automatic relocking by pulling the in-
of opening the door. ner door handle twice.
Operation of this device is subject to the following
two conditions: Switching off the alarm system if it is trig- When locked again, the passenger compartment
gered monitoring system and inclination sensor are acti-
– It may not cause harmful interference, and vated once more.
f Unlock vehicle doors or
– it must accept any interference received in- f Please observe the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM,
cluding interference that may cause undesired f Switch ignition on. ULTRASOUND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
operation. MONITORING SYSTEM, INCLINATION SEN-
SOR” on Page 27.
Note
f Please observe the chapter “ALARM” on
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
Page 103.
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user's authority Indication by the emergency flashers
to operate the equipment.
If the vehicle doors are unlocked or locked, a re-
f Please observe the chapter “POWER WIN- sponse is provided by the emergency flashers:
DOWS” on Page 29.
– Unlocking – single flash
f Please observe the chapter “SLIDING/LIFTING
– Locking – double flash
ROOF” on Page 152.
f Please observe the chapter “SIGNAL” on
Page 105.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 21

Locking conditions Central locking button
f Lock vehicle once. Central locking buttons A in the armrests let you
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. lock and unlock the vehicle electrically.
The alarm system, passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor are Locking
switched on.
f Press the button A symbol.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle: All vehicle doors will be locked.
f Quickly lock vehicle twice. The doors can be opened by pulling the inner
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. door handle twice.
The passenger compartment monitoring
Unlocking
system and inclination sensor are switched off.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
f Press the button A symbol.
the inside.
If activated on the rear doors, only the relevant
Unlocking the door with the inner door door will be unlocked.
handle
Note on operation Safety button
f Pull inner door handle once.
If the vehicle was locked with the key or by remote
Door lock is unlocked. The power windows, the central locking buttons
control, it cannot be unlocked with the central
f Pull inner door handle again. locking button. on the rear doors and the rear control panel for
Door can be opened. the air conditioning can be disabled using the safe-
ty button B in the armrest of the driver’s door.
Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that
the alarm system will be triggered if the door is Switching off
opened.
f Press safety button B.
The symbol in the safety button lights up.

Switching on
f Press safety button B again.
The symbol in the safety button goes out.

22 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Emergency operation Automatic door locking
f Lock the vehicle with the key at the door lock. Warning!
If there is a defect in the central locking system, In an emergency situation where you need to
operating the lock barrel in the driver's door will exit the car through an automatically locked
lock all functioning elements of the central locking door, remember the following procedure to
system. open the door.
f The fault should be remedied immediately at f Unlock the doors by pressing the central lock-
an authorized Porsche dealer. ing button or

Note on operation f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
The alarm system, passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor are You can select various options for automatically
switched on. locking the doors on the multi-purpose display in
In order to prevent the alarm system from being the instrument panel.
triggered, you must switch the ignition on within f Please observe the chapter “DOOR OPENING”
15 seconds of opening the door. on Page 104.
Switching off the alarm system if it is Option 1 (AUTO-LOCK)
triggered
Doors lock automatically when a speed of approx.
f Unlock vehicle doors or 3 mph (6 km/h) is exceeded.
f Switch ignition on.
Option 2
The doors do not lock automatically.

Note on operation
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button and opened by pulling
on the inside door handle twice.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 23

Porsche Entry & Drive Locking rear lid, rear window and spare
wheel bracket
Porsche Entry & Drive facilitates keyless unlock-
ing and locking of vehicle doors, rear lid and rear f Close rear lid, rear window and spare wheel
window. To use this facility, you need to have only bracket.
the car key with remote control with you. If the car key with remote control is out of
range, rear lid, rear window and spare wheel
f Do not expose the car key to a high level of
bracket are locked.
electromagnetic radiation, as this could ad-
versely affect Porsche Entry & Drive.
Locking vehicle doors
Caution!
f Press button A in the door handle.
Risk of being locked out of vehicles with The vehicle doors are locked.
Porsche Entry & Drive. If the car key with remote control is out of
range, the vehicle doors are locked.
f If the vehicle is locked and access is gained
through the rear lid or rear window, do not f Please observe the chapter “LOCKING CONDI-
leave the key in the vehicle. TIONS” on Page 22.
The vehicle is automatically locked within ap-
Unlocking vehicle doors f Please observe the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM,
prox. 30 seconds after the rear lid or rear win-
ULTRASOUND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
dow is closed. f Grip door handle fully. MONITORING SYSTEM, INCLINATION SEN-
The vehicle can then be unlocked only with the The vehicle doors will be unlocked. SOR” on Page 27.
second key.
f Please observe the chapter “SIGNAL” on
Unlocking rear lid, rear window and spare Page 105.
wheel bracket
f If you are at the rear section of the vehicle with
the car key, the rear lid, rear window and spare
wheel bracket are unlocked and can be
opened.

24 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Immobilizer
Switching off the immobilizer
f Switch ignition on.

Switching on the immobilizer

f Switch ignition off and move control unit to the
left for 2 seconds.
f Please observe the chapter “LOCKING THE
STEERING COLUMN” on Page 60.

Switching off readiness for operation

If the vehicle is not unlocked within 3 days the
Porsche Entry & Drive readiness for operation is
switched off.
f Pull the door handle once, to reactivate the
system.
f Pull the door handle again, to open the door.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 25

Doors Opening unlocked doors from inside Childproof rear door locks
f Pull inner door handle. Childproof locks are fitted to the rear doors.
Opening unlocked doors from outside The doors cannot be opened from inside once
f Pull door handle. Opening locked doors from inside these locks are engaged.

f Pull inner door handle twice. Locking (Active)

Please observe the chapter “LOCKING CONDI- f Turn safety catch to position A.
TIONS” on Page 22.
Unlocking (Inactive)
f Turn safety catch to position B.

26 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Avoiding false alarms Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered
f Always close the sliding/lifting roof or the
Panorama roof system, and all door windows. f Unlock vehicle doors or
f Do not leave a mobile phone switched on in the f Switch ignition on.
glasses case of the roof console.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you at- Function indication
tach a trailer. The inclination sensor could trig-
ger the alarm unintentionally. The locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by
a rapid flashing of the light-emitting diode A on the
driver’s door.
Switching on The light-emitting diode goes out when the vehicle
is unlocked.
f Lock the vehicle.
The alarm system, passenger compartment The passenger compartment monitoring
monitoring system and inclination sensor are system and inclination sensor are switched
switched on. on
f Please observe the chapter “CENTRAL LO- f The light-emitting diode flashes for 2 seconds,
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system
CKING SYSTEM” on Page 21. rapidly, then slowly.
Alarm System, Ultrasound The passenger compartment monitoring
Switching off
Passenger Compartment system and inclination sensor are switched
Monitoring System, Inclination f Unlock the vehicle. off
Sensor The alarm system, passenger compartment
f The light-emitting diode flashes rapidly for
monitoring system and inclination sensor are
2 seconds, goes out for 28 seconds and then
f Please observe the chapter “ALARM” on switched off automatically.
flashes slowly.
Page 103.
Note on operation
Faults
If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door
f The light-emitting diode flashes rapidly for
lock, you must switch the ignition on (ignition lock
2 seconds, shines for 28 seconds and then
position 1) within 15 seconds of opening the door
flashes slowly.
in order to prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 27

The following alarm contacts are Switching on
monitored f Unlock the vehicle and lock it again.
– Doors Note on operation
– Engine compartment lid You can deactivate the passenger compartment
– Rear lid monitoring system and inclination sensor sepa-
rately on the multi-purpose display in the instru-
– Rear window ment panel.
– Passenger compartment f Please observe the chapter “COMFORT” on
– Vehicle inclination Page 103.

If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the

alarm horn sounds for approx. 30 seconds and
the emergency flashers flash.
After 10 seconds of interruption the alarm is
triggered again. This cycle is repeated ten times.

Deactivating
Temporarily deactivating ultrasound
passenger compartment monitoring f Lock the vehicle quickly twice with the remote
system and inclination sensor control or

If people or animals are remaining in the locked ve- f In vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, operate
hicle or the vehicle is being transported on a pas- button A in the door handle quickly twice.
senger train or ship, for example, the passenger The doors are locked but can be opened from the
compartment monitoring system and inclination inside:
sensor must be deactivated.
1. Pull inner door handle once.
When locked again, the passenger compartment Door lock is unlocked.
monitoring system and inclination sensor are acti-
vated once more. 2. Pull inner door handle again.
Door can be opened.
f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle
that the alarm system will be triggered if the
door is opened.

28 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Power Windows Readiness for operation of power windows
– With ignition switched on or
Warning!
– A maximum of 10 minutes with door closed
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
and ignition key withdrawn, but only until driv-
This applies especially if the windows are
er’s or passenger door is first opened.
closed with the comfort function, because
The one-touch operation for closing the door
with this function the window goes up auto-
windows is available only when the ignition is
matically.
switched on.
f Make sure nobody can be injured when the win-
dows close.
f Remove the ignition key or switch ignition off in
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive to
shut off power to the window switches when
the vehicle is not attended by a responsible
person. Always take the ignition key with you
when leaving the vehicle. Uninformed persons
could injure themselves by operating the pow- A- Power window in driver’s door
er windows. B- Power window in passenger’s door
C- Safety button
f In case of danger, immediately release the car D- Left rear power window
key or the button in the door handle in vehicles E- Right rear power window
that have Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended. Opening/closing windows
Risk of an accident. Opening window with the rocker switch
f Do not put anything on or near the windows f Press rocker switch until the window has
that may interfere with the driver's vision. reached the desired position.

Closing window with the rocker switch

f Pull rocker switch until the window has reached
the desired position.
f f f

Controls, Safety, Instruments 29

 One-touch operation for front windows Comfort function when locking the vehicle
f Pull or press rocker switch to its final position
in the driver’s door. Warning!
Window moves to its final position. Danger of injury. The window will close with
Press or pull again to stop the window in the its full closing force.
desired position.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
Comfort function when unlocking the vehicle when the windows close.

f Hold the car key in the door lock in the unlock- f Hold the car key in the door lock in the locking
ing position until the windows and the position until the windows and the sliding/lift-
Panorama roof system have reached the de- ing roof or the Panorama roof system have
sired position. reached the desired position.
If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door
lock, only the driver’s door is opened. In order to Comfort function when locking for vehicles
prevent the alarm system from being triggered, with Porsche Entry & Drive
you must switch the ignition on within 15 seconds
of opening the door. Warning!
Power windows in passenger’s door and rear doors
Danger of injury. The window will close with
Note on operation its full closing force.

Rocker switches A and B in the driver’s door have f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
a two-stage function: when the windows close.

– If the switch in question is pressed or pulled to f Push the button in the door handle until the win-
the first level, the front window is opened or dows and the sliding/lifting roof or the Panora-
closed manually. ma roof system are closed.
– If the switch is completely pressed or pulled to
Note on operation
the second level, the front window is opened or
closed automatically (one-touch operation). The comfort function remains available for approx.
45 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.

30 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Note on operation Storing final position of the door windows Safety button
If a door window is blocked during closing, it will
The end positions of the door windows are lost
stop and open again by several inches. The power windows, the central locking buttons
when the battery is disconnected and reconnect-
However, this is not the case if: on the rear doors and the rear control panel for
ed. The one-touch operation of the windows is dis-
the air conditioning can be disabled using the safe-
– The rocker switch is pressed again within abled.
ty button C in the armrest of the driver’s door.
10 seconds of the window being blocked and
Perform these procedures for all windows:
– The windows are closed using the car key in Switching off
1. Close window completely once by pulling rock-
the door lock (comfort function).
er switch. f Press safety button C.
The windows close with their full closing force. The symbol in the safety button lights up.
2. Pull rocker switch again.
The upper end position of the window is Switching on
Warning!
stored.
f Press safety button C again.
Danger of injury. If the rocker switch is
3. Open window completely once by pressing The symbol in the safety button goes out.
pressed again within 10 seconds of the
rocker switch.
window being blocked, the window will close
with its full closing force. 4. Press rocker switch again.
The lower end position of the window is stored.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the windows close.

One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds

after blockage of the door window.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 31

Front seats Seat position
A correct sitting position is important for safe and
Danger!
fatigue-free driving. We recommend the following
The seat may move unexpectedly if you at- procedure for adjusting the driver’s seat to suit
tempt to adjust while driving. This could individual requirements:
cause sudden loss of control or personal in-
1. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
jury.
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
2. Adjust the seat until, with the accelerator pedal
tion.The backrest locks must be engaged at all
fully depressed, your leg is straight but your
times while the vehicle is in motion.
entire foot still rests on the accelerator pedal.
Safety belts only offer protection when the
3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
backrest angle and steering wheel position so
positioned on the body. Improperly posi-
that your arms are almost outstretched.
tioned safety belts can cause serious person-
However, your shoulders must still rest on the
al injury or death in an accident.
backrest.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or pas-
senger backrests excessively reclined.
4. If necessary, correct the seat fore-and-aft Adjusting the seat
adjustment.
A Front seat height adjustment.
5. Adjust the height of the headrest so that the
upper edge is at eye level or higher. B Rear seat height adjustment.
C Fore and aft adjustment.
D Backrest angle adjustment.
E Lumbar support adjustment.
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the back-
rest curvature is infinitely adjustable in vertical
and horizontal directions for individual pelvis
and spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrows until the desired setting is reached.

32 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning! Recalling the settings using the
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of vehicle key or in vehicles that have
settings. Porsche Entry & Drive
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any f Open the driver’s door.
of the seat adjustment buttons. The stored settings of the driver's seat are re-
called automatically.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Cancelling setting
Memory options Automatic settings can be cancelled immediately
by pressing any driver’s seat setting button.
– Seat adjustment
– Door mirror adjustment Recalling the settings with person buttons
1 - 3 (driver’s and passenger’s seat)
Comfort memory options 1. Unlock vehicle and open the driver’s door.
– Seat adjustment 2. Press the relevant person button until the
Front seat with memory – Door mirror adjustment stored positions have been reached
or
Personal seat, door mirror, steering wheel and – Steering wheel and safety belt height adjust- Briefly touch the person button if the ignition
safety belt height adjustments can be stored and ment key is inserted or if the ignition is switched on
recalled on the person buttons A and car keys. (in vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
f Please observe the chapter “EASY ENTRY The stored positions for each seat are recalled
FUNCTION” on Page 35. automatically.

Cancelling setting
Automatic settings can be cancelled immediately
by pressing any seat adjustment button.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 33

Storing driver’s seat settings 5. Set the control switch A for the mirror setting
to the passenger’s side.
Storing settings on a person button and a car The passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
key
6. Adjust the passenger’s mirror to the required
1. Apply the parking brake. setting.
2. Switch ignition on. 7. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
3. Close doors. within 10 seconds, hold down the person but-
ton on which the setting is to be stored until an
4. Make the required adjustments to the seat, acknowledge tone is obtained.
mirror, steering wheel and safety belt.
5. Briefly press the SET memory button and, Storing passenger seat settings
within 10 seconds, hold down one of the per-
son buttons (1, 2 or 3) until an acknowledge 1. Apply the parking brake.
tone is obtained. 2. Switch ignition on.
The settings are now stored on the desired
person button. 3. Adjust seat position and belt height.

6. Withdraw car key or switch ignition off in vehi- A - Mirror adjustment 4. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
cles that have Porsche Entry & Drive. within 10 seconds, hold down one of the per-
Storing passenger mirror setting as a son buttons (1, 2 or 3) until an acknowledge
7. Press the SET memory button within tone is obtained.
10 seconds and keep the button depressed parking aid
until an acknowledge tone is obtained.
The settings are now assigned to the car key.
If the passenger’s mirror is supposed to swivel Automatic storage – driver’s seat
downwards when reversing, this can also be
stored in the driver’s seat setting. If settings were changed after the driver’s door
was opened, these new settings are temporarily
1. Apply the parking brake.
stored when the vehicle is locked.
2. Switch ignition on. This storage is deleted if the vehicle is unlocked
with a programed key and the driver’s door is
3. Press the relevant person button.
opened. Then the settings of the key used is
4. Engage reverse gear. recalled.

34 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning! Switching Easy Entry function on and off
Risk of crushing if persons are behind the
f Press switch A.
driver's seat when settings are recalled.
Risk of damage if the rear seat bench is folded for- Entering the vehicle
ward when settings are recalled. When the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat
f Switch off the Easy Entry function if there are moves to the rear.
persons behind the driver's seat or if the rear Once the driver’s door is closed and the ignition
seat bench is folded forward. key is inserted or, in the case of vehicles that have
Porsche Entry & Drive, the ignition is switched on,
the seat and steering wheel move into the stored
position.

Exiting the vehicle

The steering wheel moves into the frontmost, top
position.
– After the ignition key is removed or
Easy Entry Function – After the ignition is switched off and the driv-
The Easy Entry function makes it easier for you to er's door is opened on vehicles equipped with
get in and out of the car. Porsche Entry & Drive or
– When the steering column is locked.
When the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat
moves to the rear.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 35

 Rear seats Adjusting
f Press button B and push the headrest all the
The heights of the headrests for the front seats
way down.
and the outer headrests for the rear seats can be
f Press button A and, at the same time, pull the adjusted.
headrest completely out.
Danger!
Installing Improperly positioned headrests can cause
serious personal injury or death in an acci-
Note
dent.
The middle headrest of the rear seat bench must
f Adjust the headrest so that the upper edge of
only be fitted to the middle seat of the rear seat
the headrest is at last at eye level or higher.
backrest.
f Do not drive the vehicle without the headrest in
1. Insert the headrests into the guides.
place and properly adjusted.
2. Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
Raising
is reached.
Headrests Install the middle headrest of the rear seat f Push headrest upwards until the desired
bench only on the middle seat and push it down position is reached.
Removing fully. Additionally press button B on the rear seat
headrests.
Front seats
Lowering
f Press button A and, at the same time, com-
pletely remove headrest. f Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
is reached.

36 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Rear Seats On vehicles with automatically controlled
four-zone air conditioning:
The rear seats are divided and can be folded
forward individually to make the loadspace bigger. Safety button

Caution! f Press the safety button in the driver's door

armrest before folding the rear seats forward.
Risk of damage to seat cushions, backrest, The rear control panel for the air conditioning
and seat belt if only the backrest is folded ceases to function.
forward. This prevents unintentional adjustment of the
f Always fold seat cushions and backrest air conditioning.
forward. The symbol in the switch lights up.
1. Remove the headrests of the backrest to be
folded forward.
Please observe the chapter “HEADRESTS” on
Page 36.
2. Move front seats forward.
Folding rear seats forward 3. Pull seat cushion up at loop A.

If the luggage safety net is installed, first set up 4. Pull seat cushion forward (arrow B).
the left seat cushion in a vertical position and fold f f f
the left rear seat backrest forward.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 37

5. Raise seat cushion vertically. 6. Pull release lever A and fold the backrest 7. Insert mounting hook on the seat cushion in
forward. the eyelet of the backrest (arrow).

38 Controls, Safety, Instruments

8. Insert headrest B into the receiver in the seat Positioning rear seats 3. Fold seat cushion forward.
cushion (arrow).
4. Push seat cushion under the backrest.
1. Remove the headrests from the seat cushion.
5. Press seat cushion downward at the front.
2. Make sure that the safety belts are not
Make sure that the buckles are accessible.
trapped.
Raise the backrest until it locks with an audible 6. Insert the headrests into the backrest.
click. Please observe the chapter “HEADRESTS” on
The red “verification flag” A must be lowered Page 36.
completely.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 39

A - Front seat, left C - Rear seat, left
B - Front seat, right D - Rear seat, right

Heated Seats – Front and Rear Switching on

The seat heating is ready for operation when the f Turn thumb wheel until the desired position is
ignition is on. The heating power can be infinitely reached.
adjusted with the thumb wheel.
Switching off
f Turn thumb wheel to 0.

40 Controls, Safety, Instruments

A- Switches seat heating on Controlling the temperature
B- Switches seat heating off
C- Temperature control for left seat f Move button C or button D upwards or down-
D- Temperature control for right seat wards until the desired position is reached.

Rear seat heating in vehicles with an Switching off

four-zone air conditioning system f Press button B.
Switching on
f Press button A.
After the seat heating is switched on, the air
conditioning display switches to seat heating
mode for approx. 10 seconds.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 41

Safety Belts f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable ob- f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye glas- may not work properly.
Danger! ses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause inju- Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE IN-
ry. STRUCTIONS” on Page 265.
Always make sure your and your passengers'
safety belts are properly fastened while the f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
with proper positioning of belts.
vehicle is in motion. f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may re- f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or are completely dry after cleaning or this may
sult in serious personal injury or death. damage may occur to the belt. cause damage to the belt.
f For your and your passengers' protection, use f Two occupants should never share the same
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in belt at the same time.
motion.
Care and maintenance
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
small children.
may prevent a secure locking.
Proper wearing of safety belts
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as stretch forces in an accident must be inspect-
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec-
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts tiveness in restraining you.
can cause serious personal injury in case of an The same applies to belt tensioner systems
accident. which have been triggered. In addition, the an-
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your chor points of the belts should be checked.
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be f If safety belts do not work properly, see your
worn behind your back or under your arm. authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
should be worn low across the hips. buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
f Pregnant women should position the belt as to ensure safe operation.
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
is not pressing against the abdomen. in your vehicle.
f Belts should not be worn twisted.

42 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Belt tensioner Safety Belt Warning System
Depending on the force of a collision, fastened
An audio-visual warning system is interconnect-
seat belts are automatically tightened in an acci-
ed with the driver’s safety belt.
dent.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
The belt tensioners are triggered in: sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
– Front and rear impacts passenger to buckle up.
In addition, the gong will sound if vehicle speed
The belt tensioners are not triggered in: exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h.)
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
– Side impacts panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
– Vehicle overturning as the driver has buckled up.

Maintenance note
The belt tensioner system can be triggered only
once; the system must be replaced afterwards.
Work may be performed on the belt tensioner
system only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered.
This does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 43

 f The belt cannot be pulled out while accelerat-
ing and slowing down, when cornering and
when driving uphill.
f Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate
buckle on the inboard side of the seat, until it
locks securely with an audible click.
f Make sure that belts are not trapped or twist-
ed, and that they are not rubbing on sharp edg-
es.
f The horizontal section of the belt should al-
ways fit snugly across the pelvis. Therefore, af-
ter fastening the belt, always pull the diagonal
part of the belt upwards.
Pregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis, and ensure
that it is not pressing against the abdomen.
Fastening the safety belt f Pull on the diagonal section of the belt now and f Make sure that the belts and buckles fit
again during the journey to ensure that the correctly on the rear seat bench.
f Assume a comfortable sitting position. horizontal section remains tight.
Adjust the backrest of the front seat so that the
Releasing the safety belt
belt always rests on your upper body and runs
across the middle of your shoulder. f Hold the belt tongue.
f Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in a f Press the red button (arrow).
slow, continuous motion across your chest and
lap. f Guide belt tongue to the reel.

Note on operation
The belt can be blocked if the vehicle is standing
at an angle or if the belt is pulled out using a jerk-
ing movement.

44 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Automatic locking retractor
The safety belts for the passenger and rear seats
are equipped with an automatic locking retractor
for securing the child restraint system. When acti-
vated, this retractor allows you to securely fasten
the child restraint system in place so that inadvert-
ent movements will not occur.

Activating the automatic locking retractor

1. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
2. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
3. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
Safety belt height adjustment Adjusting belt height electrically it to retract.

The heights of the belt deflectors for the driver’s f Operate rocker switch B in the desired
direction until the optimal belt adjustment is Releasing the safety belt
seat, passenger’s seat and the outer rear seats
can be adjusted. reached. 1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT 2. Then make certain that the belt has fully re-
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the WITH MEMORY” on Page 33. tracted. At this point the automatic locking fea-
neck. ture will be disengaged.

Adjusting belt height manually

f Upward – push belt deflector up.
f Downward – press button A and move belt de-
flector.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 45

 Warning!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-
cumstances are they to be used for adults
safety belts or harnesses. Such use could re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
Only attach one child seat tether per anchor-
age.
They are not designed to withstand loads im-
posed by adults.

Child Restraint Anchorages

f Please observe the chapter “AUTOMATIC LO-
CKING RETRACTOR” on Page 45.
If your child restraint seat or seats require the use
of a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor
points A provided behind the rear seat backrests
under the carpet.
To ensure proper installation, see your authorized
Porsche dealer.
The tether strap can be moved to the other anchor
point if required.

46 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Child Restraint Systems Danger! Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the The use of a child restraint system in the
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
child. front passenger seat can result in serious
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
personal injury or death to the child from an
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with f Follow all child restraint instructions and
airbag deployment.
applicable laws. warnings in this manual.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
The use of infant or child restraints is required by bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
– When using an infant or child restraint system,
law in all 50 states and the Canadian provinces. mends:
be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
The child restraint system should be one that com-
tions on installation and use. f Do not use a child restraint system in the front
plies with U.S. Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
passenger seat.
Safety Standards 213 and should be secured by a – Infants and small children should never be held
lap belt or lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt or on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
f Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
for child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem with another occupant while the vehicle is in
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also motion.
of a Porsche child restraint system.
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
– Children too big for child restraint systems
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli- Rearward facing child restraint system:
should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
ance with this standard can be found on the in-
struction label on the restraint and in the instruc-
can be used providing it does not cross the f Use only in the rear seat. Must not ever be
face or the neck of the child. used in the front seat.
tion manual provided with the restraint.
– For maximum safety and protection, do not
use a child restraint system in the front passen- Forward facing child restraint system:
ger seat. f Use only in the rear seat. Must not ever be
used in the front seat.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 47

 Danger!
LATCH Child Seat System
The use of a child restraint system in the
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH front passenger seat can result in serious
system recommended by Porsche. personal injury or death to the child from an
These systems have been tested and adjusted to airbag deployment.
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
child age groups. Other systems have not been bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury. mends:
You can obtain child seats that are f Do not use a child restraint system in the front
LATCH-compatible at your authorized Porsche passenger seat.
dealer.
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer for
f Always observe the separate installation in- correct Porsche Child Seat availability.
structions for your child seat.
f Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche
Child Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether
for Children system (LATCH)

1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as

outlined in the operating manual for the child
Installing an LATCH child seat system seat.
Markings on the right and left for the LATCH child 2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
seat anchorage can be found on the backrests of points are engaged correctly.
the outer rear seats.
The anchor bars A for the LATCH child seat
anchorage can be found directly under the
markings between backrest and seat cushion.

48 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Airbag Systems Below the actuation threshold of the airbag sys- Function
tem, and during types of collisions which do not
The Airbags in combination with the safety belts cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts The front airbags are triggered during a frontal col-
makes up a safety system which offers the driver provide the primary protection to the occupants lision of sufficient force.
and the passenger the greatest known protection when correctly worn. In the event of a side impact of corresponding
from injuries in case of accident. Therefore, all persons within the vehicle force, the side airbag on the impact side is
must wear safety belts at all times (in many triggered.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the
states, state law requires the use of safety belts).
safety belts must be worn at all times, The inflation process generates the amount of gas
because the front airbag system is only actuated f Please observe the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” required to fill the airbags at the necessary pres-
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient se- on Page 42. sure in fractions of a second.
verity.
The front airbags are located under the padded Airbags protect the face and upper body, while si-
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on multaneously damping the motion of the driver
the passenger's side, in the dashboard. and passenger in the impact direction in the event
The side airbags for the front seats are installed of a frontal impact or side impact.
on the side in the seat backrests.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
The head airbags are installed above the doors
diagnostic module. This module will record the
in the roof area.
use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
and front passenger when the side airbags and
head airbags are inflated.
f f f

Controls, Safety, Instruments 49

 Danger! f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
to the steering wheel or in the area of the pas-
Warning lights and warning
To provide optimal occupant protection, air-
senger airbag and side airbags. Doing so may
messages
bags must inflate at very high speed. If you
adversely affect the functioning of the airbag Faults are indicated by a warning light on the ta-
are not wearing your safety belt or are too
system or cause harm to the occupants if the chometer and a message on the instrument
close to the airbag when its deployed, inflat-
airbag system should deploy. panel’s multi-purpose display.
ing airbags can result in serious personal in-
jury or death. f Do not undertake any wiring for electrical ac- f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
cessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
f Make sure there are no people, animals or ob- AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the air-
jects between the driver or passenger and the
bag system or inadvertant inflation. f In the following cases you should immedi-
area into which the airbag inflates. ately consult an authorized Porsche
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag sys-
f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
tem should be repaired immediately by your tem is functioning properly:
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
authorized Porsche dealer.
vehicle control. – If the warning light does not light up when the
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
f Do not lean against the inside of the doors. ignition is switched on or
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer area. – If the warning light does not go out once the
rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel. engine is running or

f Never transport heavy or sharp objects on or Note – If the warning light appears while driving.
in front of the passenger seat. Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door
f Always keep the lid of the door storage com- trim) may be disassembled only by an authorized
partment closed. Objects must not protrude Porsche dealer.
out of the door storage compartment. When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety
f Give your passenger all of the information in instructions must be followed. These instructions
this chapter. can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer.

f No changes must be made to the wiring or

components of the airbag system.

50 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Airbag maintenance Disposal
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the air- f Non-ignited gas alternators, or whole vehicles
bag system must be inspected by an authorized or subassemblies with airbag units, must not
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in be disposed of as “normal” scrap or waste or
your Maintenance Booklet. put into any other form of end storage.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be able to
Important information give you details about disposal.
If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
owner's manual (safety and disposal rules).
Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as
well as on all airbag components.
For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints:
f Please observe the chapter “CHILD RES-
TRAINT SYSTEMS” on Page 47.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 51

 Horn Steering Wheel Heating
f Press button B to operate the horn. If the interior temperature in the vehicle is lower
than +54°F (+12°C)when the ignition is switched
Airbag unit on, the steering wheel heating is switched on au-
tomatically.
Airbag unit C is located behind the padded steer- When this happens, the steering wheel adjusts to
ing wheel boss. a temperature of +73°F (+23°C).
In conjunction with the safety belts, the “airbag” is If the interior temperature rises above +71°F
a safety system designed to provide the driver and (+22°C) when the vehicle is operational, the steer-
passengers with maximum protection from injury ing wheel heating switches off again.
in an accident.
f Please observe the chapter “AIRBAG SYS-
TEMS” on Page 49.

Steering Wheel
Tiptronic rocker switches
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
and features an “automatic” and a “manual” gear-
shift mode.
You can change temporarily to manual mode using
rocker switches A on the steering wheel.
f Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
Page 203.

52 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Steering Wheel Adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident. The steering wheel may
move further than desired if you attempt to
adjust it when driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
seat memory settings.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.

Manual adjustment Electrical adjustment

1. Swivel locking lever A downwards. f Press control switch B in the relevant direction
until the desired setting is reached.
2. Adapt the steering wheel setting to the back-
rest angle and your seat position. Move the The steering wheel setting can be stored in the
steering wheel in the desired direction. seat memory.
3. Swivel locking lever A back until you feel it en- f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT
gage. WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 53

Multi-Functional Steering Wheel Readiness for operation of multi-
functional steering wheel
Warning!
– With ignition switched on and
There is a danger of accident if you set or
– With Porsche communication systems
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
switched on.
gation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving. f Please observe the operating instructions sup-
This could distract you from the traffic and plied for the Porsche communication systems
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. before operating the function keys.
f Operate the components while driving only if
Note on operation
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
The Porsche communication systems cannot be
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting switched on and off using the multi-functional
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. steering wheel.

Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you

can use these function keys to operate the follow-
ing Porsche communication systems: Operating the function keys
– Radio with CD drive
The function keys on the steering wheel (arrows)
– CD changer can be operated by pressing and by pulling.
– Satelite radio Various functions may require you to press or pull
the buttons several times in order to achieve the
desired setting.

54 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Manual tuning
– Set radio station manually.

Scan titles, radio stations

– Scan titles, radio stations briefly.

Increase the volume of the relevant

communication system

Decrease the volume of the relevant

communication system

Next radio station/title

– Select the next radio station or title.

Last radio station/title

– Select the previous radio station or tit-
le.
Function keys Steering wheel buttons – lighting
Switch off the sound
f Please read the operating instructions sup- When the light switch is operated, the light switch-
plied for the Porsche communication systems Source selection es on automatically.
before operating the function keys. – Select available audio source. Using the buttons on the back of the steering
Depending on the equipment in your wheel (arrow), the lighting for the function keys
vehicle, the following sources are avai- and the rocker switches can be switched on and
lable: off.
radio, CDS (single CD player), CDC
(CD changer). Switching lighting off
f Press button.

Switching lighting on
f Press button again.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 55

 Warning!
Risk of accident. Vehicles or objects appear
smaller in convex mirrors and further away
than they are in reality.
f Bear this distortion in mind when estimating
the distance of vehicles behind you and when
reversing into a parking space.
f Also make use of the interior mirror for judging
the distance.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
f Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash.

Interior Mirror A- Door mirror setting – driver’s side

B- Heat door mirror
Initial position – lever forward C- Door mirror setting – passenger’s side
Anti-dazzle setting – lever back D- Fold in door mirrors

Note on operation Door Mirrors

When the interior mirror is being adjusted, anti- The convex mirror glass on the passenger's side
dazzle lever A must point forward. provide a larger field of view.

56 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Adjusting mirrors Unfolding door mirrors Automatically swivelling down mirror
glass on the passenger's side
f Please observe the chapter “MIRRORS” on f Switch ignition on.
Page 105. f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT
f Turn control switch to A or C.
WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
1. Switch ignition on. Both door mirrors unfold automatically.
f Please observe the chapter “PARKING AIDS”
2. Select A for the driver’s side or C for the If the electrical adjustment facility fails on Page 162.
passenger’s side by turning the control switch.
f Unfold mirrors manually.
3. Move the door mirrors in the appropriate Door mirror heating
direction by tilting the control switch.
The door mirror heater is ready for operation
If the electrical adjustment facility fails when the ignition is switched on.
f Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror
face. Switching on
f Turn control switch to B.
Folding in door mirror Both door mirrors are heated.

f Switch ignition on. Switching off

f Turn control switch to D. f Change the position of the control switch.

Both door mirrors fold in automatically.

If the electrical adjustment facility fails

f Fold in mirror manually.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 57

 Warning! Note on operation
Danger of injury. Electrolyte fluid can The incident light in the area of light sensors G
emerge from broken mirror glass. This fluid must not be restricted (e.g. by stickers on the
irritates the skin and eyes. windshield).
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact Switching off automatic anti-dazzle
with the skin or eyes, immediately rinse it off operation
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary. f Press button F.
Light-emitting diode E goes out.
Risk of damage to paintwork and leather and
plastic parts, and clothing. Electrolyte fluid Note on operation
can be removed only while it is still wet.
Anti-dazzle operation switches off automatically,
f Clean the affected parts with water. if:
– Reverse gear is engaged or
– Interior lighting and/or
reading lights in the front are switched on.
E - Light-emitting diodes (LED)
F - Button for automatic anti-dazzle operation Switching on automatic anti-dazzle
G - Light sensors operation
f Press button F.
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Mirror Light-emitting diode E lights up.
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light. The mirrors au-
tomatically change to anti-dazzle position or revert
to their normal state, depending on the light inten-
sity.

58 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Ignition lock position 0
Initial position
The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the ig-
nition is switched on or when the engine is started.
To withdraw the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
f On vehicles with Tiptronic S:
Move selector lever to position P.
f Switch ignition off.
f Withdraw the ignition key.

Note on operation
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
0- Initial position Porsche Entry & Drive control unit
1- Ignition on f Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY
2- Start engine For vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive OPERATION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION
3- Ignition off KEY” on Page 18.
you do not need to insert the key into the ignition
lock again but merely keep it with you. The ignition
Ignition Lock/Steering Lock key is replaced by a control unit in the ignition
lock, which always remains in the ignition lock, un-
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock po-
less the vehicle is being towed.
sitions.
Removing the control unit from the ignition
Note on operation
lock
The car key rebounds to the initial position from
f Press button A and remove the control unit.
every ignition lock position.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 59

Ignition lock position 1 f Do not operate the starter longer than approx. Locking the steering column
10 seconds.
Ignition on If necessary, repeat the starting procedure af- Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
f Turn ignition key to position 1. ter a pause of approx. 10 seconds. The steering column is automatically locked
Ignition is switched on. Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 3 when the ignition key is withdrawn from the
(ignition off) first. ignition lock.
Note on operation f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. The steering column is automatically unlocked
All electrical equipment can be switched on. Drive off immediately. when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
The warning lights light up for a lamp check. Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the lock.
engine has reached operating temperature.
f Please observe the chapter “INSTRUMENT PA- Vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
NEL USA MODELS” on Page 70. f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can
be used to start the engine. The steering column is automatically locked
Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY when the ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
Ignition lock position 2 STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on locked.
Starting engine Page 331. f To lock intentionally, once the ignition is
f Operate footbrake. Notes on operation
switched off, turn the control unit again to the
ignition lock position 3 and hold it there for
f Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal or on The first operation of the starter is ended 2 seconds.
vehicles with Tiptronic S: automatically when the engine starts. The steering column is locked.
move the selector lever to position P or N. If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically. The steering column is automatically unlocked
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.
by turning the control unit from ignition lock
The engine control module will provide the When the engine is started, the warning lights
position 0.
correct starting mixture. must go out.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
Ignition lock position 3
Ignition off
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.

60 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Starting and Stopping the Engine Starting vehicles with manual f Do not warm up the engine when stationary.
transmission Drive off immediately.
f Please observe the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the
Page 19. f Operate footbrake. engine has reached operating temperature.
f Please observe the chapter “EMISSION f Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal. f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can
CONTROL SYSTEM” on Page 263. be used to start the engine.
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral.

Danger! f Do not press the accelerator pedal. The engine

f Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY
control module will provide the correct starting
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gas contains STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
mixture.
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Page 331.
(CO), which is toxic even in low concentra- f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
Note on operation
tion. Carbon monoxide can cause uncon- f Do not operate the starter longer than approx.
sciousness and even death if inhaled. 10 seconds. If necessary, repeat the starting To ensure a good charge condition for the battery
f Never start or let the engine run in an en- procedure after a pause of approx. and thus its ability to start the engine, all electrical
closed, unventilated area. It is not recommend- 10 seconds. Turn the ignition key back to accessories which are not required should be swit-
ed to sit in your car for prolonged periods with ignition lock position 3 first. ched off when the ignition is switched on and when
the engine on and the car not moving. engine revolutions are low (in stop and go traffic).
The first operation of the starter is ended automat-
An unattended vehicle with a running engine ically when the engine starts.
is potentially hazardous. If warning lights If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
should come on to indicate improper opera- operations will not be ended automatically.
tion, they would go unnoticed.
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
Danger of fire.
f Do not drive or park your car where combus-
tible materials, such as dry grass or leaves,
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department. Do not endanger your life
by attempting to put out the fire.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 61

Starting vehicles with Tiptronic S f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. Starting with auxiliary battery
Drive off immediately.
f Operate footbrake. Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the If your vehicle is fitted with an additional battery
engine has reached operating temperature. in the luggage compartment, you have the possi-
f Move selector lever to position P or N.
bility of starting the engine with the ignition key,
f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can
f Do not press the accelerator pedal. even if the main battery fails.
be used to start the engine.
The engine control module will provide the
Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY In vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive:
correct starting mixture.
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
1. Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. Page 331.
from the ignition lock.
f Do not operate the starter longer than Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
Note on operation
approx. 10 seconds. CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on
If necessary, repeat the starting procedure To ensure a good charge condition for the battery Page 59.
after a pause of approx. 10 seconds. Turn the and thus its ability to start the engine, all electrical
accessories which are not required should be 2. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock and
ignition key back to ignition lock position 3
switched off when the ignition is switched on and start the engine as described.
first.
when engine revolutions are low (in stop and go f Please have the cause of the fault remedied at
The first operation of the starter is ended traffic). an authorized Porsche dealer.
automatically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.

62 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Stopping Radiator fans
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
f Withdraw the ignition key only when the vehicle
the car.
is stationary, otherwise the steering lock en-
gages and the vehicle cannot be steered.
Warning!
f Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle
Danger of injury. After the ignition is
comes to a stop, as there is no steering assis-
switched off, the engine compartment and
tance and brake boost when the engine is
coolant temperatures are monitored for ap-
switched off.
prox. 30 minutes. During this period, and de-
f Always withdraw the ignition key and engage pending on temperature, the radiator fan
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. may continue to run or start to run.
The control unit always remains in the ignition
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
lock in vehicles that have Porsche Entry &
gine off and exercise extreme caution.
Drive.

Note on operation
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.

Warning!
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 63

 Applying the parking brake Releasing the parking brake
f Press down firmly on the foot pedal.
f Press on the footbrake and pull handle A of the
The warning light in the instrument panel lights
parking brake.
up.
The warning light and the message disappear.
A message will be displayed on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the
parking brake is not released before moving
off.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and the vehicle is
not moving at all.

Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
Parking Brake partially engaged parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
The parking brake acts on the rear wheels and injury or death to any person in its path.
serves to secure the car while parked.
f Engage the parking brake fully.
f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle
has come to a full stop. f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.

64 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Parking Brake warning Brakes Note
light USA f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to cor-
Parking Brake warning brakes before driving.
rode if your car is parked for an extended period.
light Canada The brakes will tend to “rub“ as a result.
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
The warning lights will go out after the parking (100 km/h), for example, it is not twice but four pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
brake is fully released. times longer than 30 mph (50 km/h). Tire traction parked, whether road salt or grit was spread and
The warning lights are not an indicator that the is also less effective when the roads are wet or whether grease-dissolving agents were used in
parking brake is fully applied; it is only intended to slippery. car washes.
be a warning to release the parking brake before If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
driving the car. f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
recommend having the brake system checked by
from the car in front of you.
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Caution!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and
cause excessive wear.
f Release the parking brake fully.

f When parking your car, press down firmly on

the foot pedal.
f Move the selector lever to “P“ (Tiptronic) or
move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
gear (Manual transmission).
f On hills also turn the front wheels towards the
curb.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 65

Brake system function Warning!
Brake warning light USA
Risk of an accident. In the unlikely event of
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted Brake warning light
hydraulic failure of one brake circuit:
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc Canada
brakes at the front and rear. f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
Both circuits function independently. One brake that position. A mechanical linkage activates
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up.
circuit operates the front left and rear right wheel the second circuit, and you will be able to bring
A message will be displayed on the multi-purpose
and the other operates the front right and rear left the vehicle to a stop.
display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid
wheel.
f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop, level is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has in-
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op- avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it creased) one of the two brake circuits has failed.
erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal towed to the nearest authorized Porsche deal-
travel when you apply the brakes.Failure of one A greater braking pressure will be required, stop-
er for repair.
brake circuit will cause the stopping distance to in- ping distances will be longer and the braking be-
crease. havior will change, particularly in curves.
With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly
working brake system, the pedal travel to the
point of brake application should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. (30 to 40 mm). Whenever the brake
pedal travel exceeds this value, have the brake
system checked.

66 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Brake pedal Warning! Brake booster
To avoid overheating and premature wear of
Warning! The brake booster assists braking only when
the brakes:
the engine is running.
Risk of an accident. f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could in- When the car is moving while the engine is not run-
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
crease the stopping distance. ning, or if the brake booster is defective, more
driving position to control speed.
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
f Always check the movement of the brake pedal f Do not “ride the brakes“ by resting your foot on the car to a stop.
before driving and make sure that it is not ob- the pedal when not intending to apply brake
structed by a floor mat or any other object. Moisture, road salt or grit on brakes affects brak-
pressure.
ing. When the vehicle is driven on salted or gritted
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too of- roads for extended periods, the brakes should be
into positions that could interfere with the safe ten. This could cause the brakes to get hot and washed down thoroughly about every 2 weeks. An
operation of your vehicle. not function properly. automatic carwash facility cannot do this job prop-
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you erly. Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake ap-
floor mats of the correct size including a secur- plications.
ing possibility.
Warning!
Note
Driving through water may reduce the trac-
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, in- tion. Moisture on brakes from road water, car
creased pedal travel is required to bring your vehi- wash, or a coating of road salt or grit may af-
cle to a full stop. fect braking efficiency.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after
being exposed.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 67

Brake wear Brake pads and brake discs New brake pads or linings
New brake pads have to be “broken in“, and there-
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
fore only attain optimal friction when the car has
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear de- to a great extent on the driving style and the con-
covered several hundred miles or km.
pends on how the brakes are used. ditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
in actual miles on the road.
f Have the brake system inspected at the inter- pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
vals recommended in your Maintenance Book- The high-performance brake system is designed This also applies whenever the brake pads and
let. for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tem- brake discs are replaced.
peratures.
Brake wear warning light Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient con-
USA ditions (such as temperature and humidity) there-
fore might cause the brakes to squeal.
Brake wear warning light
Canada
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up.
A message will be displayed on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel if the brake pads
are worn, excessively.
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.

68 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning! f Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
corrode if your car is parked for an extended
or other objects.
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a re-
The brake booster is ready for operation only sult.
while the engine is running. The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
If the engine is switched off or there is a defect in pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
the brake booster, much greater force has to be parked, whether road salt or grit was spread
applied to the pedal when braking. and whether grease-dissolving agents were
used in car washes.
f Please observe the chapter “TOWING” on
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired,
Page 350.
we recommend having the brake system
In heavy rain, while driving through water or after checked by experts at an authorized Porsche
leaving a car wash, the braking action may be de- dealer.
layed and increased pressure may be required.
f To relieve the braking system on downhill
f For this reason, keep further back from the ve- stretches, change down to a lower gear in
hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying good time to obtain engine braking.
them at intervals. Make sure that following traf- If engine braking is insufficient on steep
fic is not affected. stretches, operate the footbrake at intervals.
Continuous braking overheats the brakes and
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a
reduces the braking effect.
coating may form on the brake discs and pads
that significantly reduces friction and thus braking f Please observe the chapter “BRAKE-FLUID LE-
action. VEL” on Page 251.
f Therefore, clean the brake discs and pads ap-
prox. every 2 weeks with a strong jet of water.
The cleaning effect of automatic car washes is
insufficient.
To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, “brake
them dry” before parking the car.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 69

Instrument Panel USA Models Warning and indicator lights on the A Oil temperature gauge
speedometer B Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights on the C Clock
Trailer turn signal
tachometer
Indicator light D Clock reset button
Emission Control warning light E Cooling system temperature gauge
(Check Engine) Rear fog light indicator light
F Multi-purpose display
Airbag warning light Tire pressure warning light G Fuel gauge

Differential locking indicator light H Reset button for trip counter display
Safety belt warning light
I Speedometer
PSM warning light Brake warning light J Mileage displays

Fog light indicator light K Voltmeter

ABS warning light

General warning
Cruise control readiness
Observe warning message on the multi-
purpose display!
Disengageable anti-roll bars
Indicator light
High beam indicator light

Indicator lights in central instrument

panel

Turn signal light, left

Indicator light

Turn signal light, right

Indicator light

70 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Controls, Safety, Instruments 71
Instrument Panel Canada Models Warning and indicator lights on the A Oil temperature gauge
speedometer B Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights on the C Clock
Trailer turn signal
tachometer
Indicator light D Clock reset button
Emission Control warning light E Cooling system temperature gauge
(Check Engine) Rear fog light indicator light
F Multi-purpose display
Airbag warning light Tire pressure warning light G Fuel gauge

Differential locking indicator light H Reset button for trip counter display
Safety belt warning light
I Speedometer
PSM warning light Brake warning light J Mileage displays

Fog light indicator light K Voltmeter

ABS warning light

General warning
Cruise control readiness
Observe warning message on the multi-
purpose display!
Disengageable anti-roll bars
Indicator light
High beam indicator light

Indicator lights in central instrument

panel

Turn signal light, left

Indicator light

Turn signal light, right

Indicator light

72 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Controls, Safety, Instruments 73
 Oil Temperature Gauge Tachometer
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur- The start of the red zone on the tachometer scale
pose display of the instrument panel if the engine is a visual warning of the maximum permissible en-
oil temperature is too high. gine speed.

f Reduce speed and engine load immediately if If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
the red zone is reached. feed is interrupted in order to protect the engine.

74 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Engine coolant temperature warning Engine coolant level warning
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur- A warning message will appear on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the engine pose display of the instrument panel if the engine
coolant temperature is too high. coolant level is too low.
f Switch engine off and let it cool. f Switch engine off and let it cool.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of f Top up coolant.
car for obstructions. Please have the cause of the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Check coolant level.
Add coolant if necessary. f Please observe the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL”
Please have the fault remedied at an autho- on Page 249.
rized Porsche dealer.
f Please observe the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” Caution!
on Page 249. Risk of engine damage.

Note on operation f Do not continue driving if the warning persists

even when the engine coolant level is correct.
Cooling System To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
air guides must not be restricted by covers
(e.g. films, “stone guards”). rized Porsche dealer.

Temperature gauge
Pointer below 180°F (80°C) – engine cold
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
loading.

Pointer between 180°F (80°C) and 260°F

(100°C) – normal operating temperature
Pointer may move up to the red area when engine
is heavily loaded and outside temperature is high.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 75

 Fuel reserve warning
When the engine is running, the warning light on
the multi-purpose display of the instrument panel
lights up if less than 3 gallons (12 liters) of fuel re-
Fuel mains in the tank or the range on remaining fuel Odometer
falls below approx. 30 miles (50 km).
The upper display counts the total mileage, the
Level gauge f Fill up at the next opportunity. lower display counts the short trips.
After exceeding 6213 miles (9999 kilometers),
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed. Caution! the short trip counter returns to 0.
f Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on A shortage of fuel may cause damage to the
Page 362. emission control system. Resetting the short trip counter to “O”
If the vehicle's inclination changes (e.g. going up- f Never drive the tank dry.
f Press button A for approx. 1 second.
hill/downhill), minor deviations in the indication
f If the warning lights have come on, do not take
may occur.
turns at high speed.

f Please observe the chapter “HOW EMISSION

CONTROL WORKS” on Page 264.

76 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Clock A is adjusted on the multi-purpose display:
f Press button B.
The SETTINGS > CLOCK menu is automatical-
ly opened on the multi-purpose display.
f Please observe the chapter “CLOCK” on
Page 101.

Clock
Danger!
Risk of an accident and loss of control.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
f In the event of a sudden turn or airbag deploy-
ment, serious personal injury could result if
hand is positioned through steering wheel
spokes.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 77

 Battery/alternator
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the voltage
drops significantly.
f Stop in a safe place and switch off the engine.

Possible causes
– Defect in the battery charging system
– Broken drive belt

Warning!
Risk of accident and risk of engine damage.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is re-
quired to steer) and engine cooling fails.
Voltmeter f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
The voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. rized Porsche dealer.
Normal range: 12 to 16 volts.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
The voltage may drop considerably when the a long journey in the water if the drive belt
vehicle is being started. slips.
If the indicator is continually below 12 volts f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
when the engine is running: be required to steer.
f Please have the battery charging system
checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.

78 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Emission Control The warning light in the instrument panel flashes to Caution!
indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring)
Risk of damage. If the warning light in the in-
which might cause damage to certain parts of the
Check engine warning light emission control system.
strument panel continues flashing even when
you have eased off the accelerator pedal,
The emission control system detects malfunctions f In this case, immediately reduce the engine the emission control system may overheat.
early that could, for example, cause increased pol- load by easing off the accelerator.
f Stop as soon as possible in a safe place.
lutant emissions or consequential damage. The warning light in the instrument panel is lit
Make sure that combustible materials, such as
Faults are indicated by the warning light in the in- continuously after the critical range is left.
dry grass or leaves, cannot come into contact
strument panel by being continuously lit or flash-
f In order to avoid consequential damage to the with the hot exhaust system.
ing.
engine or emission control system (e.g. cata-
The faults are recorded in the control unit's fault f Switch off the engine.
lytic converter) go immediately to the nearest
memory.
authorized Porsche dealer to have the fault f Contact your nearest authorized Porsche deal-
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up diagnosed and rectified. er to have the fault rectified.
when the ignition is switched on as a lamp check
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
starts.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 79

Multi-Purpose Display To call selected menu line
f Press RESET switch.
Warning!
To scroll in the menu
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi- Arrows at the top and bottom of the menu indicate
gation system, telephone or other equipment additional entries.
when driving. f Press rocker switch up or down.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. In the COMFORT menu, the menu scrolls
automatically as you approach the end of the list.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Note on operation
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting Depending on the equipment of your vehicle,
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. some information or functions may not be avail-
able on the multi-purpose display (e.g. navigation,
It is not possible to describe all details of the audio system, compass or tire pressure).
functions in this Owner's Manual.
The examples clearly demonstrate the functional Readiness for operation
principle and clarify the menu structure.
– Ignition is on.
As a rule, you can use the menu items:
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > FACTORY SETTINGS Operation, controls
to return to the basic factory settings. The multi-purpose display is operated with the
f Please observe the chapter “FACTORY SET- rocker switch at the end of the wiper stalk and the
TINGS” on Page 107. RESET switch at the bottom of the wiper stalk.

To move up in the menu

f Press rocker switch up.

To move down in the menu

f Press rocker switch down.

80 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Basic Screens Information in the basic screen Changing basic screens
The following basic screens are available once the
The selected basic screen shows the following: f Operate the rocker switch.
ignition has been switched on:
– Top display A:
– Main menu Resetting basic screens
Audio information (e.g. station, frequency, CD)
– Range on remaining fuel The values can be reset to zero in the basic
– Centre display B:
– Average speed Information about range on remaining fuel, screens for average speed.

– Navigation
average speed, compass, navigation, tyre f Press RESET switch for longer than 1 second.
pressure, or access to main menu The value is cleared.
– Tire pressure
– Bottom display C:
– Compass Outside temperature indicator
(except for compass, navigation, and tyre
Note on operation pressure)
Depending on the equipment of your vehicle,
some information or functions may not be avail-
able on the multi-purpose display (e.g. navigation,
compass, audio system or tire pressure).

Controls, Safety, Instruments 81

General information The submenus are listed:
– MPH limit
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously – Vehicle info
recomputed while driving based on fuel level, – Tire pressure
current consumption and average consumption.
– Settings
Average speed
Note
The displayed values are based on the distance
It is possible to leave the main menu via the BACK
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
command at any time by confirming the RESET
Note on operation switch.

Switching the ignition off does not reset the Main Menu
measurements. Values can thus be collected over
long periods. Disconnecting the vehicle battery f Operate the rocker switch until the basic
clears the memories. screen MAIN MENU is displayed.

Further on-board computer functions can be dis- f Press RESET switch.

played in the PCM.
Please follow the separate operating instructions
for PCM.

82 Controls, Safety, Instruments

MPH limit Accepting current speed Preset speed
MAIN MENU > MPH LIMIT
To accept the current speed as the limit: To accept a target speed as the limit:
f Select CURRENT MPH with the rocker switch.
A speed limit can be entered to monitor the driving
speed. When it is exceeded, a signal sounds and f Select XXX MPH SET with the rocker switch.
the message LIMIT EXCEEDED appears in the f Press RESET switch. f Press RESET switch.
multi-purpose display. LIMIT ACTIVE is activated automatically.
The selected speed limit is shown. f The limit is set in increments of 1 mph (around
1 km/h) by pressing the rocker switch up or
down.
If the rocker switch is operated for longer than
2 seconds, the setting is changed to incre-
ments of 6 mph (10 km/h).
f Press RESET switch.
LIMIT ACTIVE is activated.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 83

 Vehicle info The following information can be displayed:
Activating/deactivating the limit
– Warnings
f Select LIMIT ACTIVE with the rocker switch. MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO
All current warnings and messages pertaining
f Press RESET switch. f Select VEHICLE INFO with the rocker switch. to the safety of the vehicle can be displayed.
f Press RESET switch. – Level
The current state of the vehicle's ground clear-
ance can be displayed for vehicles with level
control.
– Locks/reduction
The selected driving programs for Low Range/
High Range can be displayed.
– Average consumption
The average fuel consumption can be dis-
played and reset.

84 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Example: Brake pad warning message Example: Front side light warning message
Level
Warnings Returning to the VEHICLE INFO menu
MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > LEVEL
f Press RESET switch.
MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > WARNINGS The ground clearance of vehicles equipped with
Caution! level control is shown in the LEVEL menu.
NO WARNING is displayed if the vehicle is in
perfect condition. Warning messages indicate possible faults. Note on operation
Any warning messages are displayed.
f Go to an authorized Porsche dealer f The level is set using the rocker switch behind
f Select warnings one after the other with the immediately. the selector lever in the center console.
rocker switch.
f Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUST-
MENT” on Page 236.

Returning to the VEHICLE INFO menu

f Press RESET switch.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 85

 Note on operation
f The driving program is set using the rocker
switch behind the selector lever in the center
console.
f Please observe the chapter “DRIVING
PROGRAMS FOR ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING” on Page 211.

Average consumption
Locks/reduction
MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > AVERAGE CON-
MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > SUMPTION
LOCKS/REDUCTION
The displayed value is based on the distance trav-
The selected driving programs for elled since the last reset to “zero”.
Low Range/High Range are displayed.
Resetting average consumption
– Longitudinal lock on/off
f Select RESET with the rocker switch.
– Reduction on/off
f Press RESET switch for longer than 1 second.
– Transverse on/off
The value is set to “- -.-”.
Returning to the VEHICLE INFO menu
f Press RESET switch.

86 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Tire Pressure Danger! f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu or from tire pressure
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors the messages or warnings when correcting the
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure in-
pressure in the four road wheels and warns the tire pressure.
creases increases risk of a tire failure and re-
driver if the pressure is too low.
sulting loss of control. Furthermore, low tire f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
The display as well as the settings for tire pres- pressure increases rate of wear of the affect- being present. A tire pressure warning will then
sure monitoring are done on the multi-purpose dis- ed tires. appear in the multi-purpose display.
play in the TYRE PRESSURE menu. Correct the tire pressure.
f When a flat tire has been displayed, immedi-
However the tire pressure must be set manually
ately stop in a suitable place and check the f The tire pressure monitoring system gives a
on the wheel.
tires for damage. If necessary remedy the warning about tire damages due to insufficient
The tire pressures to be monitored for tire type damages with a tire sealant. tire pressure as well as about a gradual loss of
are permanently set in the tire pressure pressure due to foreign objects.
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
monitoring system and cannot be changed. The tire pressure monitoring system cannot
leaking tires.
warn you about tire damages occurring sud-
The driver is solely responsible for filling the tires
f Defective tires must be immediately replaced denly (e.g., flat tire due to sudden external ef-
correctly and for selecting in the multi-purpose dis-
by a specialist workshop. fects).
play.
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
f If a message is displayed, check the tire
circumstances.
pressure at the next opportunity.
f Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
f Before fitting tires approved by Porsche which
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
are not stored in the on-board computer, the
workshop. The maximum permitted speed is
missing information should be supplemented
50 mph (80 km/h).
in the on-board computer.
f Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
of doubt, have tires checked by a specialist
workshop.
f If the tire pressure monitoring system is
defective (e.g., defective wheel transmitter),
contact a specialist workshop immediately and
have the damages repaired.
The tire pressure will not be monitored by a
defective tire pressure monitoring system.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 87

 The values displayed on the basic screen there-
fore do not allow conclusions to be drawn about
possible pressure deviations.
f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu or from tire pressure
messages or warnings when correcting the
tire pressure.

Tire pressure screen Filling information

Indication of tire pressures on the basic Tire pressure menu

screen "Tire pressure"
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE
The basic screen "Tire pressure" shows the cur- (only when vehicle is stationary)
rent actual values of the tire pressures. These val-
ues would be identical to those of a pressure gage Deviations in the tire pressures from the required
connected to the four valves. These pressures pressure are shown in the TYRE PRESSURE menu
change while the vehicle is being driven. (filling information). The tire pressure monitoring
system takes this relationship between tyre pres-
– The tire pressures increase as the temperature sure and temperature into account.
in the tires rises, e.g. during high-speed high-
way driving. A “–” in front of the value indicates a pressure loss.

– The tire pressures decrease as the tempera- f The tire pressures must be adjusted to the re-
tures drop, e.g. during trips in cold regions quired pressure.
(such as mountains). Example: If the tire pressure display shows
The pressure changes by around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) “–3 psi”, you must increase the tire pressure by
for a temperature change of 50°F (10°C). 3 psi.

88 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Note
The spare wheel and collapsible spare wheel do
not contain a wheel transmitter and are not
monitored by the tire pressure monitoring system.
The tire pressures for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C) are
shown in the TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling infor-
mation) during the learning phase. The required
pressure for the spare wheel is always displayed
in the TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling information).
f Check the tire pressure for the spare wheel
and collapsible spare wheel manually.

System learning phase Tire pressure menu

Each time a wheel is changed, the tire pressure MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE
monitoring system re-learns the tires. The system
The TYRE PRESSURE menu provides an overview
identifies the wheel positions.
of the current pressure specifications for the
The current tire pressures will not be available on
respective wheel (filling information). The pressure
the multi-purpose display until the learning phase
differences with respect to the required pressure
is complete.
are specified.
System learning phase If the wheels have not been learned, the current
f Select tire type and tire size in the menu TYRE pressures are unavailable.
PRESSURE > SETTINGS > TYRES. The spare wheel is not monitored. The required
The learning process is started. The tire type pressure is specified in brackets.
and size must be selected even if the settings
for the new set of wheels are the same as for To make changes to the settings of the tire pres-
the old wheels. sure monitoring system, select SETTINGS in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 89

 The following settings made in this menu serve as
the basis on which the tire pressure monitoring
system determines the correct pressure.
– Tyres
Select the type and size of the tires on the
vehicle.
– Load
Select the type of loading.
– System
Switch tire pressure monitoring on.

Note on operation
Settings can be made only when the vehicle is sta- Tire type menu
Tire pressure settings
tionary.
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS Tire type
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
Warning! TYRE TYPE
Incomplete entries on the multi-purpose The tire type and corresponding tire size are set in
display affect correct information of the TYRE TYPE menu.
warnings and messages.
– Summer
f After one of the following actions, the settings
must be updated in the TYRE PRESSURE – All season
menu: – Winter
– Changing a wheel – All terrain
– Filling with tire sealant – Spare wheel
– Adding air (after previous warning “Flat tyre”)
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION AF-
TER WARNING” on Page 97.

90 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Note on operation
f The tire size and type can be found on the tire
sidewall.
Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS”
on Page 277.

Note
Before fitting tires approved by Porsche which are
not stored in the multi-purpose display, the
missing information should be supplemented in
the multi-purpose display.
f Go to an authorized Porsche dealer
Selection of tire sizes for summer tires immediately. Spare wheel selection

Example: Selecting summer tires Speed limits for tires

Spare wheel
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS > Danger!
TYRE TYPE > SUMMER MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
Risk of accident due to excessive speed. TYRE TYPE > SPARE WHEEL
f Select tire type with the rocker switch. This could lead to severe personal injury or This menu lists all possible spare wheel types
f Press RESET switch. death. available depending on the equipment of the
f Select tire size with the rocker switch f Always observe the permissible maximum vehicle.
(e.g. 255/55 R 18). speed of the respective tire. – Spare wheel
f Press RESET switch. f Exceeding maximum tire speed could result in – Collapsible spare wheel
The menu returns to TYRE PRESSURE > SET- a tire burst, causing lose of control of the vehi-
TINGS and shows the current settings. cle. This could lead to severe personal injury or – Sealing set
death. f f f
Moreover, Porsche recommends obeying all
traffic laws at all times to maintain the safety
of yourself and all vehicle occupants.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 91

Spare wheel Collapsible spare wheel Tire sealant/sealing set

Warning! Warning! Warning!

Risk of accident. Risk of accident. Risk of accident.
The spare wheel does not contain a wheel The spare wheel does not contain a wheel
f Have the tire replaced by a specialist work-
transmitter and is not monitored by the tire transmitter and is not monitored by the tire
shop as soon as possible.
pressure monitoring system. pressure monitoring system.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
f The spare wheel must be used only over short f The collapsible spare wheel must be used only
speeds.
distances. over short distances.
f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL” f Please observe the chapter “COLLAPSIBLE (80 km/h).
on Page 307. SPARE WHEEL” on Page 302.
f Please observe the safety and operating in-
f Select SPARE WHEEL with the rocker switch. f Select COLLAPSIBLE WHEEL with the rocker structions on compressor.
switch.
f Press RESET switch.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT”
The message SYSTEM NOT ACTIVE, WORK- f Press RESET switch.
on Page 296.
SHOP appears after the RESET switch is The required pressure and speed limit for the
pressed. collapsible spare wheel are displayed at first. f Select SEALING SET with the rocker switch.
The display automatically returns to the TYRE This is followed by the message SYSTEM NOT
f Press RESET switch.
PRESSURE menu (filling information). ACTIVE, WORKSHOP.
The display automatically returns to the
The required pressure specifications can be
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling information).
read.
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
f Inflate tires according to the displayed
f Select BACK. The menu returns to the basic
The reminder SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OP- pressure differences.
screen.
ERATION appears each time the ignition is
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
The reminder SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OP- switched on.
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
ERATION appears each time the ignition is
f Please observe the chapter “” on Page 98.
switched on. SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OPERATION ap-
pears each time the ignition is switched on.
f Please observe the chapter “” on Page 98.
f Please observe the chapter “” on Page 98.

92 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Selecting load
f Select type of load with the rocker switch.
f Press RESET switch. The set load status is
shown.
Deviations from the required pressure are shown
in the menu TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS (filling
information).
f Correct the pressure according to these spec-
ifications.

Load
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
LOAD
The tire pressure must be adjusted according to
the vehicle load.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
RES, COLD” on Page 361.
– Partial load
up to 3 people and 46 lbs (21 kg) of luggage
– Full load
more than 3 people and 46 lbs (21 kg) of lug-
gage

Controls, Safety, Instruments 93

 Switching on tire pressure monitoring
f Select ON with the rocker switch.
f Press RESET switch.
The display automatically returns to the menu
TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS.
f Check whether the settings in the menu agree
with the tires mounted on the vehicle. Correct
any incorrect settings before driving the vehi-
cle.
f Select the tire type and tire size in the menu
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS.
The system will re-learn the wheels only if the
System tire type and tire size have been selected.
“Monitoring off” message
If tire pressure monitoring is deactivated, the mes-
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
Switching off tire pressure monitoring sage MONITORING OFF appears each time the ig-
SYSTEM
nition is switched on.
f Select OFF with the rocker switch.
Tire pressure monitoring can be switched on or off
f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
in the SYSTEM menu. f Press RESET switch.
The message MONITORING OFF is displayed f Press RESET switch.
If tire pressure monitoring is switched off, tire
for 10 seconds. The menu then returns to the
pressures and warnings are not shown.
basic screen.
Tire pressure information is not available on the
tire pressure monitoring screen either.

94 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Tire pressure warnings and
messages
The tire pressure monitoring system warns about
loss in pressure in two stages, depending on the
amount of pressure loss:
Stage 1 – Tyre pressure too low message
(3 to 6 psi (0.2 to 0.4 bar) loss in pressure)
Stage 2 – Flat tyre warning
(loss in pressure as of 6 psi (0.4 bar))

Warning!
Risk of accident. Tire damage may impair
Message indicating tire pressure loss Message indicating tire pressure loss for
road safety.
a wheel
f Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Check the This message indicates a pressure loss of be-
tires for signs of damage and change them if tween 3 and 6 psi (0.2 and 0.4 bar) if the wheel The system has identified the wheel positions. The
necessary. positions have not been identified. deviation from the required pressure is displayed
for the corresponding wheel.
This message appears when the vehicle is station-
Example: If the tyre pressure display shows This message indicates a pressure loss of be-
ary and the ignition is switched on again.
„– 3 psi“, you must increase the tyre pressure by tween 3 and 6 psi (0.2 and 0.4 bar).
3 psi. f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
This message appears when the vehicle is station-
Tires lose air over time without a tire defect being f Press RESET switch. ary and the ignition is switched on again.
present. The tire pressure monitoring system will
Note on operation f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
then issue a corresponding message or warning.
f Correct the tire pressure at the next opportuni- f Press RESET switch.
f Correct the tire pressure.
ty. When correcting the tire pressure, add only
Note on operation
the pressure differences shown in the "Tyre
pressure" menu. f Correct the tire pressure at the next opportuni-
ty. When correcting the tire pressure, add only
the pressure differences shown in the "Tyre
pressure" menu.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 95

Message indicating a flat tire while the Message indicating a flat tire after the
system is learning learning phase has been completed
This warning message indicates a flat tire with a This warning message indicates a flat tire with a
pressure loss of at least 6 psi (0.4 bar). pressure loss of at least 6 psi (0.4 bar).
The system has not identified the wheel positions The system has identified the wheel positions. The
yet; the tire pressures are not displayed. deviation from the required pressure is displayed
for the corresponding wheel.
This warning cannot be acknowledged.
This warning cannot be acknowledged.
f Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Check the
tires for signs of damage and change them if f Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Check the
necessary. tires for signs of damage and change them if
necessary.
When the vehicle is stationary, the screen changes
to SELECTION AFTER WARNING. When the vehicle is stationary, the screen changes
to SELECTION AFTER WARNING.
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION AF-
TER WARNING” on Page 97. f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION AF-
TER WARNING” on Page 97.

96 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Adding air Sealing set
f After inflating the wheel in question, select f After repairing the flat with the tire sealant, se-
ADD AIR. lect menu item SEALING SET.
The display returns to the basic screen after
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT”
acknowledgement.
on Page 296.
For vehicles without air suspension
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT/
f Please observe the chapter “REDUCING FIL- SEALING SET” on Page 92.
LING PRESSURE ON VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR
The display returns to the basic screen after se-
SUSPENSION” on Page 304.
lecting SEALING SET.
For vehicles with air suspension A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
f Please observe the chapter “REDUCING TIRE
PRESSURE ON VEHICLES WITH AIR SUSPENSI- Note on operation
Selection after warning ON” on Page 306.
If you make a selection without performing the
When the vehicle is stationary after a tire pressure Wheel change action described in the selection, the message
warning, the screen changes to SELECTION AF- CAUTION – FLAT TYRE – CHECK TYRES will
TER WARNING. f For changing a wheel, select menu item
appear again.
WHEEL CHANGE.
f In the menu, select the task performed. The display returns to the SPARE WHEEL menu f Check the tires for signs of damage and fill or
after acknowledgement. change them if necessary.
f Select spare wheel type.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL”
on Page 91.
f Please observe the chapter “LIFTING THE VE-
HICLE WITH A JACK” on Page 298.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 97

Warning “When vehicle stops: Wheel change message Message “Spare wheel or sealing set
Hit selection” operation”
The WHEEL CHANGE? CHECK SETTINGS
If you drive off after changing a wheel or inflating message appears after a wheel change, if the tire The message SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET
the tires and neglect to make a selection in the type and tire size of the new tires have not been OPERATION? appears after switching on the
screen SELECTION AFTER WARNING, the following set in the TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS menu. ignition if a spare wheel type (spare wheel,
message will appear: WHEN VEHICLE STOPS: collapsible spare wheel, or sealing set) was set.
When the vehicle is stationary, the display
HIT SELECTION
changes to SELECTION AFTER WARNING. f Select YES or NO with the rocker switch.
f The next time you stop the vehicle, perform
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION f Press RESET switch.
the settings in the “Selection after warning”.
AFTER WARNING” on Page 97.
f Select WHEEL CHANGE. The menu
automatically changes to TYRE TYPE.
f Select the appropriate tire type and tire size.
Only if the tire type and size are selected will
the tire pressure monitoring system re-learn
the tires.

98 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Yes: No monitoring Tire pressure monitoring system
– In case of sealing-set operation, the menu warning light
In the event of faults the tire pressure monitoring
changes directly to the basic screen. All
cannot monitor the tire pressure. f All warnings and messages in the tire pressure
settings are retained. monitoring system are also indicated by the
The warning light on the instrument panel and a
– If the vehicle is operated with a collapsible message on the multi-purpose display light up. warning light in the instrument panel.
spare wheel or spare wheel, the warning mes- The warning light goes out as soon as all faults
Monitoring is not active when: are remedied.
sage “SYSTEM NOT ACTIVE, WORKSHOP” is
initially displayed for 10 seconds. The system – the tire pressure monitoring system is faulty,
then returns to the basic screen.
– wheel transmitters for the tire pressure
No: monitoring system are not present,

The display automatically returns to the menu – temporarily after changing a wheel,
TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS. – has detected too many wheel transmitters,
f Set the mounted tire set with tire type and tire – there is external interference by other radio
size. The system will re-learn the tires. sources, e.g., wireless headphones,
– tire temperatures are too high.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 99

 In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for a temperature change
of 50°F (10°C).

Tire pressure specifications

The tire pressure must match the prescribed value
(required pressure).
You can find information on the tire pressure for
cold tires (68°F/20°C):
– In the TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling informa-
tion):
As a deviation from the required pressure for
each wheel if the system has learned the
values.
Pressure increase as the result of – In the TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling informa-
temperature increase tion):
As a required pressure for each axle if the
A- Tire pressure
B- Tire temperature system has not learned the values.
C- Tire pressure for cold tires
– And in the front left door aperture for each
D- Tire pressure for hot tires
E- Pressure increase as the result of temperature wheel.
increase
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
F - Pressure drop in faulty/leaking tires
1- Required-pressure line RES, COLD” on Page 361.
2- Notification of tire-pressure loss
Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to
(from -3 to -6 psi/-0.2 bar to -0.4 bar)
3- Flat-tire warning (as of -6 psi/-0,4 bar) overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
quently correcting the tire pressure.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS”
on Page 277.

100 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Settings
Clock To select 12 h mode:
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS
f Select 12 h MODE with the rocker switch.
The following functions can be selected in the MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > CLOCK
main menu SETTINGS: f Press RESET switch.
To set the clock:
– Clock f Select time with the rocker switch. Note on operation
– Compass f Press RESET switch. There is also a button on the instrument panel to
call the CLOCK menu.
– Comfort (only with vehicle stationary) f Select the hours or minutes display with the
rocker switch. f Please observe the chapter “CLOCK” on
– Lights (only with vehicle stationary)
Page 77.
– Units (only with vehicle stationary) f Press RESET switch.

– Language (only with vehicle stationary) f Set the time in increments of 1 h or 1 min.

– Factory settings (only with vehicle stationary) f Press RESET switch.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 101

Compass
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMPASS
If you drive your vehicle across the magnetic field
zone set on the multi-purpose display, you must
enter your current zone in the COMPASS menu Calibrating
(see illustration).
In rare cases, external disturbances may necessi-
f Enter the corresponding zone in increments of tate calibration of the compass. The warning mes-
1 using the rocker switch. sage “CAL.” appears on the multi-purpose display.
f Press RESET switch. f To calibrate the compass, follow the displayed
instructions DRIVE IN A FULL CIRCLE.
The system automatically returns to the screen af-
ter successful calibration.

102 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Alarm Passenger compartment
Comfort
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > ALARM The alarm is triggered if motion is detected in the
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT interior with the doors closed (e.g. if a window is
The passenger compartment monitoring system
The COMFORT menu offers the following broken in a theft).
and the inclination sensor (protection against
submenus: towing) can be temporarily deactivated in the f Select INTERIOR with the rocker switch.
ALARM menu.
– Alarm f Press RESET switch.
When locked again, the ultrasound passenger
– Door opening This activates/deactivates passenger com-
compartment monitoring system and inclination
partment monitoring.
– Mirrors sensor are activated once more.

f Select the entry with the rocker switch. f Please observe the chapter “COMFORT FUNC- Inclination
TION WHEN UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE” on The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised mark-
f Press RESET switch. Page 30. edly at one end with the doors closed (e.g. theft
Note on operation f Please observe the chapter “TEMPORARILY attempt by towing).

Comfort settings can be made only when the vehi-

DEACTIVATING ULTRASOUND PASSENGER f Select ANGLE with the rocker switch.
COMPARTMENT MONITORING SYSTEM AND
cle is stationary. INCLINATION SENSOR” on Page 28. f Press RESET switch.
This activates/deactivates the inclination sen-
sor.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 103

 Vehicle side
Both doors on the driver's side are unlocked.
The doors on the access side are unlocked in
vehicles equipped with Porsche Entry & Drive.

All
All doors are unlocked.

Tailgate
When the TAILGATE function is active, rear access
(rear lid, rear window and spare wheel bracket) is
included in the central locking system.
Access is possible when the vehicle is stationary
Door opening Doors and unlocked.
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR At speeds higher than 4 mph (6 km/h), release is
OPENING OPENING > DOORS blocked until, with the vehicle stationary:
Locking and unlocking of the doors and the form Door unlocking can be set on an individual basis. – A door is opened or
of response when the vehicle is locked can be set
individually and stored on the respective radio re- Single door – The button in the driver's door is pulled.
mote control. To do this: Only the driver's door is unlocked. When the TAILGATE function is deactivated, ac-
1. Select the desired setting with the rocker The door of the access side is unlocked in cess is possible only:
switch. vehicles equipped with Porsche Entry & Drive.
– Using the button in the driver's door or
2. Press RESET switch. – With button 2 of the remote control.
3. Switch ignition off.
4. Close the driver's door.
5. Lock the vehicle with the radio remote control
(button 1).
The settings are now stored on this radio re-
mote control.

104 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Auto lock

If the AUTO LOCK function is active, the doors lock

automatically when the vehicle exceeds 4 mph
(6 km/h).

Note on operation
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button and opened by pulling
on the inside door handle twice.
f Please observe the chapter “UNLOCKING” on
Page 22.

Auto unlock Signal Mirrors

When the AUTO UNLOCK function is active, the MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > MIRRORS
doors unlock automatically when the ignition key is OPENING > SIGNAL
withdrawn (or when the ignition is switched off in When this function is active, the mirrors move
vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry & Drive). If the function is active, opening of the door is simultaneously and in the same direction.
confirmed by the emergency flashers flashing.
f Select SYNCHRONISING with the rocker
f Select TURN SIGNALS with the rocker switch. switch.
f Press RESET switch. f Press RESET switch.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 105

 f Select the desired item with the rocker switch
and the RESET switch.
f Activate or deactivate the desired units with
the RESET switch.

Lighting Units
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > LIGHTS MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > UNITS
You can set the duration the headlights remain on The UNITS menu offers the following options:
after the vehicle is locked.
– Speedometer
f Select OFF DELAY with the rocker switch. Select unit for speedometer:
mph, km/h
f Press RESET switch. The set coming home
time is active. – Consumption
Select unit for fuel consumption:
f Select time with the rocker switch and press
l/100km, mpg (USA), mpg (UK), km/l
the RESET switch.
– Temperature
f You can use the rocker switch to set an off-de-
Select unit for temperature: °F, °C
lay time (Coming Home function) ranging from
15 to 90 seconds. The time is set in incre- – Tyre pressure
ments of 15 seconds. Select unit for pressure: psi, bar
f Press RESET switch.

106 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Language Factory settings Resetting
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > LANGUAGE MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > FACTORY SETTINGS f Select RESET with the rocker switch.

f Select language with the rocker switch. All settings made (Clock, Compass, Comfort, f Press RESET switch.
Lights, Units, Language) can be reset to the facto-
f Press RESET switch. Note
ry settings.
Note on operation This will delete all personal settings selected up to
this point.
Changing the language will affect the entire multi-
purpose display.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 107

Warning Lights and Warning Messages
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in this Owner's Manual.
Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Steering faulty Steering lock engaged.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Ignition lock faulty Do not continue driving.

Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

System fault – Workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Key not recognised in vehicle Make sure that you have the remote control with you.

Turn ignition key to left for Engage the steering lock.

2 seconds

Key: replace battery Replace the remote-control battery.

Move the steering wheel Turn the steering wheel so that the steering wheel lock can
engage/disengage.
Key not found Make sure that you have the remote control with you.

Switch selector lever to position “P”. Tiptronic S: The vehicle could roll away.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector lever
position P.

Apply the brake Apply the brake when starting.

Move selector lever to position Tiptronic S: The vehicle can be started only in position P or N.
“P” or “N”

Applying the clutch Manual transmission: Apply the clutch when starting.

Immobiliser active Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

108 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Check left cornering light Check bulb.

Check right cornering light Check bulb.

Check dipped beam Check bulb.

Check trailer lights Check bulb.

Check direction indicators Check turn signal bulb.

Check brake lights Check bulb.

Check high beam Check bulb.

Check number plate light Check bulb.

Check fog lights Check bulb.

Check reversing lights Check bulb.

Check tail lights Check bulb.

Check front side lights Check bulb.

Check headlight beam adjustment Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Daytime driving lights off Daytime driving lights switch off when the engine is shut off.
Switch on lights if necessary.

Airbag faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Safety belt Fasten safety belt.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 109

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Warning – Flat tire – Check tires Stop in a suitable place and check the tires. Change wheel if
necessary.

Check spare wheel – Required pressure: Appears about every 6 months.

50 psi/3.4 bar Check if the pressure of the mounted spare wheel matches the
required pressure, as it is not monitored electronically.

Tire pressure too low – Add air System detects a pressure loss of at least 2.9 psi. (0.2 bar).
Correct tire pressure at the next opportunity.
Collapsible spare wheel/sealing set Observe maximum permitted speed.
max. 50 mph (80 km/h)

Collapsible spare wheel 51 psi/3.5 bar Information on driving with a collapsible spare wheel.
max. 50 mph (80 km/h) Observe maximum speed of max 50 mph or 80 km/h and
required pressure of 51 psi or 3.5 bar.

System not active Indication when spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel is used
or tire pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Select new set of wheels in the Tire pressure menu after
changing the wheels.

System not active – Brief disturbance External interference (e.g., wireless headphones) or excessive
temperature (over 248 °F/120 °C) at the wheel transmitters.
Tire pressure monitoring system will reactivate itself.
System not active – Tire pressure monitoring system detects more than 4 wheel
Too many wheel transmitters transmitters (winter wheels in in the luggage compartment,
for example).
System will reactivate itself.

No monitoring – System learning After the tire type and size are selected in the tire pressure
menu, the system re-learns the tires.

Wheel change? Check settings Display after a wheel change without changed settings in the tire
pressure menu. Select tire type and size.

110 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
When vehicle stops: Hit selection Displayed after a flat tire if the system was not informed about
the work performed.
Make a selection on the multi-purpose display when the vehicle
is stationary.

Monitoring off Tire pressure monitoring was intentionally deactivated.

Tire pressure monitoring can be switched on or off on the
multi-purpose display.

Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.

Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.

Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.

Battery/generator warning Stop in a suitable place and switch engine off. Do not continue
driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Starting engine The battery discharges if the engine is not running and loads are
switched on.
Start the vehicle or switch the loads off.

Electrics – Loads – Switch-off Vehicle electrical system is overloaded. Certain loads (e.g.
heated rear window, seat heating) will be switched off.

Please refuel

Topping up washer fluid

Oil level monitoring – Failure – Workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Checking the oil level

Controls, Safety, Instruments 111

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Oil pressure too low Immediately stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Check engine oil level. Add oil if necessary.
Do not continue driving if the warning light comes on even when
the oil level is correct. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Service in 1864 mls (3000 km) Service indicator

Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance
shown has been covered.

Service now Service indicator

Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Brake pads – Workshop Have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Porsche dealer
without delay.
Warning – Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

ABS failure – Workshop Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

PSM failure – Workshop Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Warning – Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Parking brake Parking brake not released.

PSM on Porsche Stability Management was switched on.

PSM off Porsche Stability Management was switched off.

PHC failure The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant (manual transmission) and the
Engine Braking Support (downhill assistance) are not available.

Brake booster faulty Greater braking pedal force necessary. Drive carefully to the
nearest authorized Porsche dealer.

112 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Sport shock absorber Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management.

Normal shock absorber Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management.

Comfort shock absorber Current setting of Porsche Active Suspension Management.

Warning – Air suspension Stop in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.

Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Air suspension faulty – Workshop Drive carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer.

Spare wheel filling Collapsible spare wheel being filled with level-control
compressor. Do not drive off!

Control off Level control has been switched off (to jack up the vehicle).

Not permissible The prerequisites for setting the desired level have not been
met.

Pressure accumulator charging Level control temporarily unavailable.

All-wheel drive system faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Shifting not possible, Tiptronic S: When changing between Low Range and High
Speed too high Range, the limit speed (Low Range program) must not be
exceeded.

Changing only possible Tiptronic S: The selector lever must be in position N when
in Neutral changing between Low Range and High Range.

Possible only in neutral Manual transmission: The vehicle must be stationary,

with brake applied the brakes must be applied, and the gearshift lever must
be in the Neutral position when changing between Low Range
and High Range.

Warning – Parking lock! Do not continue driving. Apply the parking brake.
Operate footbrake. Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 113

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Warning – off-road anti-roll bar The anti-roll bars cannot be engaged; the system is faulty.
Drive carefully to the nearest workshop. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer as soon as possible.

Off-road anti-roll bar faulty The anti-roll bars cannot be disengaged.

Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Off road anti-roll bar disengaged, max. The anti-roll bars are disengaged.
30 mph (50 km/h) Speeds above 30 mph (50 km/h) are impermissible.
Not permissible The prerequisites (speed and lateral acceleration) for
disengaging the anti-roll bars have not been met.

Only possible with reduction Disengagement of the anti-roll bars is only possible with
Low Range engaged.

Spare wheel not locked

Lock spare wheel bracket properly.

Driver’s door open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

Passenger’s door open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

Rear left door open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

Rear right door open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

114 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
Hood open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

Rear lid open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

Rear window open

All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).

System fault – Workshop Several systems may have failed.

Have the fault remedied by a qualified specialist workshop.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 115

 Note on operation
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the parking light) are
on, an acoustic signal (gong) warns of possible
battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.

Light switch with driving light assistant Light switch without driving light assistant

Light Switch Fog lights

Only when side lights or low beam are
Light is switched off. switched on:
Pull switch to first click.
Driving light assistant
Indicator light lights up.
Side lights
Lincence plate light, instrument illuminati- Rear fog light
on Pull switch to second click.
Low beam, high beam Indicator light lights up.

Only when the ignition is switched on

116 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Automatic driving light assistant Warning! Bi-Xenon main headlights with
Risk of accident due to driving without lights. dynamically controlled cornering light
The driving light assistant is a comfort function.
Your Porsche’s driving light (low beam) is switched f Always carefully monitor the automatic driving The Bi-Xenon main headlights are equipped with
on and off automatically, irrespective of the ambi- light control. an additional light in vehicles with a cornering
ent brightness. light. As a result of its particular positioning, the
Highway function additional light provides significantly better lane
Despite possible support by the driving light assis-
lighting to the left and right of the main light beam.
tant, it is the responsibility of the driver to switch The light is switched on at speeds of over 87 mph
on the driving light using the conventional light (140 km/h). If you are travelling slower than
switch in accordance with the relevant national 40 mph (65 km/h), the driving light is switched off
regulations. after a delay of approx. 2 minutes, if the external
Activating the headlights using the driving light as- lighting conditions permit.
sistant does not therefore absolve the driver
of responsibility for the correct operation of the Rain function
driving light. The driving light is switched on after five seconds
The low beam is switched on automatically in the of continuous wiper operation.
following situations: The driving light is switched off approx. 4 minutes
– Dusk after the wipers have stopped.

– Darkness
– Travelling through tunnels
– Rain (in conjunction with the rain sensor)
– Highway driving

Note on operation
Fog is not recognised.
f In the event of fog, the driving light must be
switched on manually.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 117

 Automatic Headlight Beam
Adjustment
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
automatic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
headlight beam automatically changes in accor-
dance with the vehicle load. The level of the head-
light beam is automatically kept constant during
acceleration and braking.

Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load. It this test
item is not met, the headlight beam adjustment
A - Instrument lighting knob
system must be checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Instrument Illumination
When the light is switched on, the brightness of
the instrument illumination can be adjusted by
turning thumb wheel A.
f Please observe the chapter “A - BUTTON FOR
DIMMING THE COMFORT LIGHTING” on
Page 151.

118 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Note on operation
When the high beam is switched on or the head-
light flasher is operated, the blue indicator light on
the speedometer is lit.

Parking light
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off.
f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.

Turn signal/High Beam/Headlight

Flasher Stalk
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready
for operation when the ignition is on.
1 – Turn signal light, left
2 – Turn signal light, right
3 – High beam
4 – Headlight flasher
Lever in center position – low beam
(when the light is switched on)

Controls, Safety, Instruments 119

 Danger!
Risk of an accident.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
Hot engine compartment components can
Emergency flasher burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
The emergency flasher is ready for use regardless partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
of the ignition lock position. down sufficiently.

Switching on and off

f Press button A.
All turn signal lights and indicator lights on the
dashboard flash when the switch is operated.

120 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk f Always switch the windscreen wipers off (posi-
tion 0) before opening the engine compart-
Caution! ment lid. If the wiper arms are not in position
0, they will automatically move to this position
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers when the engine compartment lid is opened.
operate unintentionally. This will happen even if the ignition is off.
Risk of damage to the engine compartment The wiper arms remain in this position until the
lid, windshield and wiper system. lid is closed and the wiper system is switched
f Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet, off and then on again.
otherwise it could be scratched.
f Loosen frozen wiper blades before driving off.
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(rain sensor operation).
f Do not operate headlight washer in car wash- 0 – Windshield wipers off
es. 1 – Front windshield wiper – rain sensor op-
eration
f Always switch off windshield wipers before f Move wiper stalk upwards to the first click.
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
operation (rain sensor operation). Notes on operation
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re- The amount of rain or snow which has settled on
placing the wiper blade. the windshield is measured. Wiper speed is auto-
matically adjusted accordingly.
f f f

Controls, Safety, Instruments 121

 Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor 5 – Front windshield wipers and washer sys-
tem
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
f Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel.
f Adjust switch A upwards – The washer system sprays and wipes while the
high sensitivity. lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
windshield. wipes are executed.
Headlight washer (on vehicles with Bi-Xe-
f Adjust switch A downwards –
non headlights):
low sensitivity.
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
2 – Front windshield wiper – slow beam is switched on.
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the second click. To activate the headlight washer system, the
wiper lever must be pulled for a longer period
3 – Front windshield wiper – fast
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the third click.
of time.
The spray duration is limited.
At speeds of less than approx. ca. 2.5 mph
(4 km/h), rain sensor operation mode is automat- Maintenance note

The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper

ically activated if the windshield wiper is switched f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
on. If you exceed a speed of approx. 5 mph
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is (8 km/h), the system switches to the pre-selected f Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be
switched on. wiper level. regularly removed.
To switch the rain sensor on again: Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE IN-
4 – Front windshield wiper – one-touch oper- STRUCTIONS” on Page 265.
f Move wiper stalk to position 0 and then to ation
position 1 – switching on is confirmed by one f Move wiper stalk downwards. The front wind- The front windscreen washer nozzles are heat-
wipe of the windscreen – or shield wipers go through one wipe cycle. ed when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
freezing.
f Operate windscreen washer system 5 –
switching on is confirmed by three wipes of the
windscreen – or
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with
four-stage switch A.

122 Controls, Safety, Instruments

6 – Rear window wiper – intermittent Maintenance note
operation
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
f Move wiper stalk forwards to the first click.
result of the following:
The rear window wiper wipes at preset
intervals. – If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
7 – Rear window wiper – one-touch
These residues can only be removed using a
operation
special cleaning solution.
f Push wiper stalk forward briefly. The washer
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
system sprays and the rear window wiper goes
for further information.
through three wipe cycles.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
8 – Rear window wiper and washer system
f Push wiper stalk forwards as far as it will go. f Replace the damaged wiper blades
The washer system sprays and wipes while the immediately.
lever is pulled away from the steering wheel.
When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
wipes are executed.
The front windshield washer nozzles are heat-
ed when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
freezing.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 123

 Warning! Switching cruise control readiness on
Risk of accident in heavy traffic and conse-
f Pull back the operating lever to position 1 until
quent personal injury, on twisting roads or
it clicks audibly into place.
under unfavorable road conditions (e.g. win-
try or wet conditions, varying road surfaces). Cruise control readiness
f Do not use the cruise control under such The green indicator light on the tacho-
conditions. meter now indicates readiness.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
Risk of an accident, personal injury and loss Maintaining and storing speed
of control.
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the ac-
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
celerator.
spokes while driving.
f Press button A.
The desired speed has now been stored.

A - SET (Store speed)

1 - RESUME
(Switch on/resume cruise control readiness)
2 - OFF (Interrupt)
3 - + SPEED (Accelerate)
4 - – SPEED (Decelerate)

Cruise Control
Cruise control maintains any selected speed be-
tween 25 and 124 mph (40 and 200 km/h) with-
out your having to use the accelerator.
The cruise control is operated with the operating
lever on the steering wheel.

124 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Accelerating (e.g. to overtake) Decelerating Interrupting cruise control operation
Option 1 Option 1 The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory.
f Increase the speed as usual with the accelera- f Push operating lever down into position 4 until
tor. the desired speed is reached. f Push the operating lever forward to position 2
When you ease off the accelerator, the previ- The speed reached is maintained and stored (it doesn’t engage) or
ously stored value is set again. when the operating lever is released.
f Operate brake or clutch pedal or , on vehicles
Option 2 Option 2 with Tiptronic S, select position N.

f Push operating lever upwards into position 3 f Push operating lever slightly downwards into f Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
until the desired speed is reached. position 4 (a maximum of 10 times). Page 203.
The speed reached is maintained and stored The speed is reduced by 1 mph (2 km/h).
when the operating lever is released. Cruise control operation is interrupted
automatically:
Option 3 – If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
f Push operating lever slightly upwards into po- than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than
sition 3 (a maximum of 10 times). 20 seconds.
The speed is increased by 1 mph (2 km/h). – If the actual vehicle speed falls by approx.
6 mph (10 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
Note on operation for longer than 5 seconds (e.g. upward
Cruise control operation is automatically interrupt- slopes).
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx.
– If Porsche Stability Management (PSM) inter-
16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds.
venes for longer than 0.2 seconds.
– If Low Range is switched on.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 125

Resuming the stored speed
f Pull back the operating lever to position 1.

Note on operation
The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.

Switching cruise control readiness off

f Push forward the operating lever to position 2
until it clicks audibly into place.
The memory is cleared and the green
readiness light goes out.
When the vehicle is parked and the ignition
switched off, the memory is cleared.

Tip on driving
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by cruise control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, therefore, you have to
change down to a lower gear.

126 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Changing air flow direction Fresh-air intake
f Swivel vent fins B in the desired direction. In order to ensure unhindered air intake:

Note on operation f Keep the fresh-air intake between the wind-

shield and the engine compartment lid free
Fresh air or conditioned fresh air can be delivered from snow, ice and leaves.
from all vents depending on the air distribution
setting.

A - Continuous opening and closing

B - Setting vent direction

Vents
Opening vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A upward.

Closing vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A downward.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 127

 Cover Flap of the Air-Conditioning
Control Panel
Opening the cover flap
f Swivel cover flap on the handle (arrow) down-
wards. Other buttons for operating the air-con-
ditioning system are uncovered.

Sensors
To avoid damaging the air-conditioning system:
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument
panel and temperature sensor E on the front
control panel of the air-conditioning system.

Heated Rear Window Switching on

f Press button B.
The heated rear window is ready for operation Indicator light in button lights up.
when the ignition is on.
Depending on the outside temperature, the
heating switches off automatically after approx.
5 to 20 minutes.
The heating can be switched back on again by
pressing the switch again.

Switching off
f Press button B.
Indicator light in button goes out.

128 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 A- Windscreen defroster
B- Heated rear window
C- Recirculated air
D- Air-conditioning display
E- Air-quantity button
F- Air to windscreen
G- Air to central and side vents
H- Air to footwell
I - ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
J- REST button (engine residual heat)
K- Temperature button

Manual Air Conditioning Display

Air quantity, air distribution, and temperature The air-conditioning display panel shows the
can be set on the control panel of the manual air following:
conditioning.
– Air quantity,
This individual adjustment is shown on the
– Air distribution,
air-conditioning display panel.
– Selected interior temperature,
– Individual settings,
– Time that is identical to that shown in the
instrument panel.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 129

 Setting temperature Setting air quantity Defrost windscreen

f Use button K to select the interior temperature f Push button E or K up or down for air quantity. f Press button A.
to suit personal comfort. The selected air quantity is shown in a bar Indicator light lights up.
display on the display above the button. The air flows to the windscreen and the front
f Push temperature button up or down.
side windows.
The selected temperature is shown in a bar If the air quantity was reduced so much that “OFF”
The windscreen is demisted or defrosted as
display on the display above the button. appears on the display, the outside-air supply is
quickly as possible.
If a bar cannot be seen, the air conditioning is interrupted.
running at its maximum setting. Ending the function
If all bars can be seen, the heating is running Warning!
at its maximum setting. f Press button A again.
Risk of accident due to hampered vision. If
Note the air quantity is “OFF”, the windows may
mist up.
f For maximum cooling, activate recirculated air
(button C). f Push button E up (to increase air quantity).

130 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Switching circulating-air mode on Air to windscreen

f Press button F.
Warning! The air flows to the windscreen.
Risk of accident due to hampered vision. In Air to central
circulating-air mode, the windows may mist and side vents
up.
f Press button G.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short The air flows from the central and side vents.
periods. Vents must be open.
f If windows mist up, end circulating-air mode by Air to footwell
pressing the circulating-air button again and
selecting the function “Defrost windscreen”.
f Press button H.
f Press button C. The air flows to the footwell.
Indicator light in button lights up.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 131

 A- Windshield defroster
B- Heated rear window
C- AUTO button (automatic mode)
D- Recirculated air, automatic recirculated air
E- Temperature sensor
F- Air-conditioning display
G- Air-quantity button, for the left or right side
H- Temperature button, left side
I - Air to windshield
K- Air to central and side vents
L- Air to footwell
M- ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
N- REST button (engine residual heat)
O- Temperature button, right side

Automatically Controlled Two-Zone Display

Air Conditioning The air-conditioning display panel shows the
Depending on various factors (e.g. sunlight, air following:
quality), the air-conditioning system controls the – Air quantity
preset interior temperature fully automatically.
– Selected interior temperature, left/right
If necessary, the automatic system can be manu-
ally influenced. – Individual settings
This individual adjustment is shown on the air-con- – Time that is identical to that shown in the in-
ditioning display panel. strument panel.

132 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Automatic mode Setting temperature Setting air quantity
f Press AUTO button C. To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
f Push button G up or down to adjust the air
Indicator light in button lights up. can be adjusted between 61°F and 85°F (16°C
quantity.
Air quantity and distribution are automatically and 29.5°C).
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
controlled and variations are compensated. Recommendation: 72°F (22°C)
display on the display above the button.
f Push temperature button up or down.
Note on operation f Press AUTO button C to return to automatic
Button H: left side of vehicle
If necessary, the automatic system can be manu- mode.
Button O: right side of vehicle
ally influenced. The selected temperature is shown on the If the air quantity was reduced so much that “OFF”
This manual setting is retained until the appropri- display above the button. appears on the display, the outside-air supply is in-
ate function button is pressed again or the AUTO terrupted.
button is pressed. If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
Warning!
Switching MONO function on er. Automatic mode is switched off.
Risk of accident due to impaired vision. If the
The temperature settings for the driver’s side can If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
air quantity is “OFF”, the windows may mist
be accepted for the entire vehicle. quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in au-
up.
tomatic mode.
f Press AUTO button C for 2 seconds.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
The MONO logo appears on the air-condition-
this way. periods.
ing display panel.
f If windows mist up, turn off the recirculating-air
Ending MONO function setting by pressing the circulating-air button
f Press AUTO button C for 2 seconds or briefly and select the function “Defrost wind-
shield“.
f Change the settings in the air-conditioned ar-
eas. f Push button G up (to increase air quantity).

Controls, Safety, Instruments 133

 Defrosting the windshield Switching circulating-air mode on Air to windshield
f Press button A. f Press button I.
Indicator light in button lights up. Warning! The air flows to the windshield.
The air flows to the windshield and the front
side windows. Risk of accident due to hampered vision. Air to central and side vents
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as In circulating-air mode, the windows may
quickly as possible. mist up. f Press button K.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short The air flows from the central and side vents.
Ending the function periods. Vents must be open.
f Press button A again or f If windows mist up, end circulating-air mode by
Press the AUTO button C.
Air to footwell
pressing the circulating-air button again and

Switching automatic
selecting the function “Defrost windshield”. f Press button L.
circulating-air mode on The air flows to the footwell.
f Press button D twice.
f Press button A once. Indicator light in button lights up. Ending air distribution functions
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
Indicator light in button lights up. f Press the relevant button again or
Control of the outside-air supply depends on the inside air is circulated.
the air quality. f Press the AUTO button C.
Note on operation
Note When the air-conditioning compressor is switched
The recommended operating mode is automatic off manually or automatically, circulating-air mode
circulating-air mode. ends after approx. 3 minutes.

134 Controls, Safety, Instruments

ECON mode Information on air-conditioning REST mode
compressor
The outside air that is flowing in does not dry up if Using engine residual heat
the air-conditioning compressor is switched off. The air-conditioning compressor:
The residual heat of the engine can be used to
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex- heat the interior up to 20 minutes after the ignition
Warning! treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling. has been switched off.
Risk of accident due to hampered vision. – Switches off automatically at temperatures be- f Press REST button N.
If the air-conditioning compressor is low approx. 37.4°F (3°C) and cannot be The air-conditioning settings cannot be
switched off, the windows may mist up. switched on, even manually. changed in REST mode.
f Do not switch off the air-conditioning compres- – Operates most effectively with windows
sor in damp weather. Ending the function
closed.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, f Press REST button N.
Switching air-conditioning compressor off however, it is a good idea to ventilate the
Note on operation
interior briefly with the windows open.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed 37.4°F
(3°C), the air-conditioning compressor is always If the battery positive voltage is too low, REST
Notes on operation mode is automatically ended.
switched on in automatic mode.
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel, Depending on the outside temperature and humid- f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
but control comfort is then limited: ity, condensation can drip from the evaporator AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.
and form a pool under the car.
f Press ECON button M. This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
The ECON logo appears on the air-conditioning
display panel. If uncooled air flows out when the lowest temper-
The air-conditioning compressor is switched ature has been set (“LO”), switch off the air-condi-
off. tioning compressor and have the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.
Switching air-conditioning compressor on
f If the interior temperature is too high:
Press ECON button M or
Press AUTO button C.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 135

 Control panel for air-conditioned areas –
front and rear
A - Windshield defroster
B - Heated rear window
C - AUTO button (automatic mode)
REST button (engine residual heat)
D - Recirculated air, automatic recirculated air
E - Temperature sensor
F - Air-conditioning display
G - Air-quantity button, left
H - Temperature button, left
I - Air to windshield, left
K - Air to left central and side vents
L - Air to footwell, left
M- Setting for air-conditioned areas, rear
N - ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
O - Air to windshield, right
P - Air to right central and side vents
Q - Air to footwell, right
R - Temperature button, right
S - Air-quantity button, right
Automatically Controlled If necessary, the automatic system can be manu-
ally influenced.
Four-Zone Air Conditioning This individual adjustment is shown on the air-con-
Depending on various factors (e.g. ambient tem- ditioning display panel.
perature, sunlight, air quality), the air-conditioning
system controls the preset interior temperature Display
fully automatically.
Temperature, air quantity and air distribution can The air-conditioning display panel shows the fol-
be set individually for the front left, front right, rear lowing:
left and rear right air-conditioned areas. – Air quantity
– Selected interior temperature
– Individual settings
– Time that is identical to that shown in the in-
strument panel.

136 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Control panel for air-conditioned areas at the
rear
C- AUTO button (automatic mode)
F- Air-conditioning/seat heating display
G- Air-quantity button, left
H- Temperature button, left; seat heating, left
I - Air to vent, left door post
K- Air to left central vent (center console)
L- Air to footwell, left
O- Air to vent, right door post
P- Air to right central vent (center console right)
Q- Air to footwell, right
R- Temperature button, right; seat heating, right
S- Air-quantity button, right
T- Seat heating off/on

Seat heating Disabling control panel for

air-conditioned areas at the rear
f Please observe the chapter “HEATED SEATS –
FRONT AND REAR” on Page 40. The rear control panel for the air conditioning can
be disabled using the safety button in the armrest
of the driver’s door.

Safety button
f Please observe the chapter “SAFETY BUTTON”
on Page 22.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 137

 Switching MONO function on Setting temperature
Automatic mode
The temperature and air quantity settings for the
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
You can switch to automatic mode for the front driver’s side can be accepted for the entire
for each of the four air-conditioned areas can be
and rear air-conditioned areas, independently of vehicle.
adjusted between 61°F and 85°F (16°C and
one another.
f Press AUTO button C in the front control panel 29.5°C).
f Press AUTO button C on the front or rear for 2 seconds. Recommendation: 72°F (22°C)
control panel. The MONO logo appears on the air-condi-
f Push temperature button up or down.
The indicator light in button C of the front con- tioning display panel.
Button H:
trol panel and the Auto indication in the rear
Ending MONO function Left air-conditioned area at the front or rear.
control panel are lit.
Button R:
Air quantity and distribution are automatically f Press AUTO button C in the front control panel Right air-conditioned area at the front or rear.
controlled and variations are compensated. for 2 seconds or The selected temperature is shown on the
Note on operation f Change the settings in the air-conditioned display above the button.
areas. If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually influenced. is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
This setting is retained until the appropriate er.
function button is pressed again or the AUTO If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
button C is pressed. quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in au-
tomatic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.

138 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Setting air quantity Defrosting the windshield Switching circulating-air mode on
The air quantity can be selected individually for f Press button A on the front control panel.
each of the four air-conditioned areas. Indicator light lights up. Warning!
The air flows to the windshield and the front
f Push button for air quantity up or down. Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
side windows.
Button G: In recirculating-air mode, the windows may
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
Left air-conditioned area at the front or rear. fog up.
quickly as possible.
Button S:
Right air-conditioned area at the front or rear. f Only select recirculating-air mode for short
Ending the function periods.
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. f Press button A again or f If windows mist up, end circulating-air mode by
Press the AUTO button C.
f Press AUTO button C to return to automatic pressing the circulating-air button again and
mode. selecting the function “Defrost windshield”.
Switching automatic circulating-
If the air quantity on the front control panel was re- air mode on f Press button D on the front control panel
duced so much that “OFF” appears on the display,
f Press button D on the front control panel once. twice.
the outside-air supply is interrupted. Indicator light in button lights up.
Indicator light in button lights up.
Control of the outside-air supply depends on The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
Warning! the air quality. the inside air is circulated.
Risk of accident due to impaired vision Note on operation
caused by misted windows. If the air quantity Note
is “OFF”, the windows may mist up. When the air-conditioning compressor is switched
The recommended operating mode is automatic
off manually or automatically, recirculating-air
f Push button G up (to increase air quantity). circulating-air mode.
mode ends after approx. 3 minutes.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 139

 Air to windshield and side windows ECON mode Information on air-conditioning
compressor
The outside air that is flowing in does not dry up if
The air quantity can be selected individually for
the air-conditioning compressor is switched off. The air-conditioning compressor:
each of the four air-conditioned areas.
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex-
– Front control panel: Warning! treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling.
The air flows to the windscreen.
Risk of accident due to hampered vision. – Switches off automatically at temperatures be-
– Rear control panel: If the air-conditioning compressor is low approx. 37.4°F (3°C) and cannot be
The air flows to the respective side window. switched off, the windows may mist up. switched on, even manually.
f Press button I or O. f Do not switch off the air-conditioning compres- – Operates most effectively with windows
sor in damp weather. closed.
Air to central and side vents
If the car has been in the sun for a long time,
Switching air-conditioning compressor off
f Press button K or P. however, it is a good idea to ventilate the inte-
rior briefly with the windows open.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed 37.4°F
– Front control panel:
(3°C), the air-conditioning compressor is always
The air flows from the front central and side Notes on operation
switched on in automatic mode.
vents. Depending on the outside temperature and humid-
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
– Rear control panel: but control comfort is then limited: ity, condensation can drip from the evaporator
The air flows to the center vents. and form a pool under the car.
f Press ECON button N on the front control pan- This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
f Vents must be open. el. The air-conditioning compressor is
switched off. If uncooled air flows out when the lowest temper-
Air to footwell ature has been set (“LO”), switch off the air-condi-
Switching air-conditioning compressor on tioning compressor and have the fault remedied at
f Press button L. f If the interior temperature is too high:
an authorized Porsche dealer.
The air flows to the footwell. Press ECON button N or
Press the AUTO button C.
Ending air distribution functions
f Press the relevant button again or
f Press the AUTO button.

140 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 REST mode Controlling rear air-conditioned
areas with the front control panel
Using engine residual heat f Press button M.
The Symbol appears on the display.
The residual heat of the engine can be used to The rear air-conditioned areas can be con-
heat the interior up to 20 minutes after the ignition trolled from the front control panel.
has been switched off.
f Press AUTO/REST button C on the front Ending the function
control panel. f Press button M again.
The air-conditioning settings cannot be
changed in REST mode. Note on operation

Ending the function The function is ended automatically 10 seconds

after the last settings are made.
f Press AUTO/REST button C.

Note on operation
If the battery positive voltage is too low, REST
mode is automatically ended.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 141

 The parking heater is operated using the following
buttons on the front air-conditioning control panel:

Switch parking heater on and off

Activate program
Start programming
Call memories
Set ON times
Activate heating function
Set ON times
Activate ventilating function

A- “–” button
B- TIMER button Danger!
C- ON/OFF button
D- “+” button Risk of poisoning due to carbon monoxide
(CO). The parking heater consumes fuel and
emits exhaust fumes. Exposure to such
Parking Heater fumes can cause unconsciousness, serious
The parking heater features two functions: parking personal injury or death.
heating and parking ventilation. f Switch off the parking heater before refuelling.
The parking heater is ready for use regardless of f Do not operate the parking heater in enclosed
the ignition key position. spaces (e.g. a garage).
The parking heater is also used as an auxiliary
heater. Operation of the parking heater is clearly
audible when outside temperatures are low, even
if the parking heater has been manually switched
off.

142 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Notes on operation Switching parking heater on and
The parking heater runs on fuel, and it therefore off
cannot be switched on after the reserve warning
lights up. Switching on

f Please observe the chapter “FUEL RESERVE f Press ON/OFF button C.

WARNING” on Page 76. The programed parking heating or parking ven-
tilation function is switched on.
The parking heater must be operated at least
once per month, with the engine cold and the Switching off
blower at its lowest setting.
f Press ON/OFF button C again.
Ignition off: When the parking heater is running,
the remaining running time is shown on the display Note on operation
panel. f After switching off the parking heater using
Operation of the parking heater is clearly audible ON/OFF button C wait for at least 2 minutes
when outside temperatures are low and the engine before you press the button again.
is cold. The combusion chamber is cleaned.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 143

 Programming function
1. Switch ignition off.
2. Press TIMER button B on the front air-condi-
tioning control panel.
The symbols for the parking heating or parking
ventilation function flash on the display.
3. Select function.
Press “+” button D for parking heating
or “–” button A for parking ventilation.
If no other entry is made within 10 seconds, the
display returns to its initial status.
However, the selected function is retained and is
activated when the parking heater is next turned
on.
f Please observe the chapter “SWITCHING
E- Parking ventilation symbol Complete programming of the parking heater re- PARKING HEATER ON AND OFF” on Page 143.
F- Memory symbol quires definition of the
G- ON time symbol
H- Parking heating symbol – Function and
I - ON time
– ON time.
Programming the parking heater
The parking heater has three independent memo-
ries for programming the ON times. The ON time,
together with the associated parking heating or
parking ventilation function, can be programed in
each memory.

144 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Programming ON times Activating the memory Example:
1. Switch ignition off. The parking heater runs for 30 minutes. It then The parking heater is to activate the parking
switches itself off automatically. heating function at 9:48 a.m.
2. Press TIMER button.
The program must be reactivated for every subse- To do this:
3. Select function (parking heating or parking quent run.
1. Switch ignition off.
ventilation). To do this:
2. Press TIMER button B on the front air-condi-
4. Select the memory using TIMER button B. 1. Switch ignition off.
tioning control panel.
The desired memory can be selected by
2. Press TIMER button. The symbols for the parking heating or parking
pressing button B several times.
ventilation function flash on the display.
3. Select function (parking heating or parking
5. Set ON time using the “+” and “–” buttons A
ventilation). 3. Press “+” button D.
and D.
This selects the parking heating function.
Pressing the buttons adjusts the time on a 4. Select the memory using TIMER button B. The
minute-by-minute basis. If the button is kept ON time that was last saved is displayed. 4. Select the memory using TIMER button B.
depressed, the time is adjusted faster.
5. Press ON/OFF button C. 5. Set ON time to 9:48 a.m. using the “+” and
ON times are only valid for 24 hours.
The program is reactivated. “–” buttons (A and D).
6. Press ON/OFF button C. Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds.
6. Press ON/OFF button C.
Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds. Button C can be pressed again to switch off
The parking heater has now been programed
Button C can be pressed again to switch off the displays before this time has elapsed.
and the selected memory is active.
the displays before this time has elapsed. ON time I, clock symbol F and memory G are
ON time I, clock symbol F and memory G are displayed for 2 minutes after ON/OFF button C Note on operation
displayed for 2 minutes after ON/OFF button C has been pressed.
has been pressed. The display then goes out. If the parking heater is switched on manually prior
The display then goes out. The parking heater has now been programed to program start of an active memory, this will
The parking heater has now been programed and the selected memory is active (symbol G delete the programming.
and the selected memory is active (symbol G is lit). The memory must be reactivated if it is needed.
is lit). If the memory is not reactivated, the parking
Note on operation heater will not switch on.
Note on operation
Only one memory can be active at any one time.
Only one memory can be active at any one time.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 145

Parking heater faults
In the event of faults in the parking heater, no
function symbol appears on the display – only the
remaining running time is shown. The display
flashes on briefly and then goes completely dark.
f Have the parking heater checked at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
In the event of a serious accident, the parking
heater switches off automatically for safety
reasons.
The parking heater is not ready for operation.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
If the temperature rises, the overheating protec-
tion switches the parking heater off automatically.
The parking heater is not ready for operation.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
The parking heater is switched off automatically if
the voltage is too low. The parking heater is
temporarily unavailable.

146 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Note on operation
Please note that sun visor B must be swivelled
upwards before swivelling back sun visor A.
Otherwise, sun visor B can no longer be swivelled
upwards.

Sun Visors Make-up mirror

Warning! The make-up mirror on the rear of the sun visor is

closed with a sliding cover.
Risk of injury.
f The make-up mirror illumination is switched on
f Keep the sliding cover closed while driving. automatically when the sliding cover is opened
(arrow).
f Swing sun visor A down to prevent dazzle from
the front.
You can cover the gap above the interior mirror
using the small sun visor C.
f If you are dazzled from the side, unclip sun
visor A from the inner bracket and swivel it
round so that it is in front of the door window.
You can also swivel sun visor B downwards.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 147

 Pulling out sun blinds
f Pull out sun blind (arrow) and engage in
holders A.

Retracting sun blinds

f Disengage the sun blind from holders A and
carefully guide it back into the retractor roller.

Sun Blinds, Rear Side Windows

The sun blinds in the rear door trim panels can be
pulled out.

Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Pull out sun blinds during the journey only when
door windows are closed.

148 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Reading lights, front Interior light, front
Switching on Switching on
f Press button A or E. f Move switch C to the left.

Switching off Switching on and off automatically

f Press button A or E or f Move switch C to the right.
The lights are switched on when a door is un-
f Press switch D.
locked or opened or when the ignition key is
All interior lights are switched off.
withdrawn from the ignition lock.The lights are
switched off with a delay of approx.
30 seconds after the door is closed. The light
goes out immediately as soon as the ignition
key is inserted in the ignition lock or the vehicle
is locked.

Switching off
A, E - Switch for reading lights f Move switch C to center position or
B - Button for dimming the comfort lighting
C - Switch for interior light f Press switch D.
D - Switch for switching off all interior lights All interior lights are switched off.

Interior Lighting
Note on operation
f If the interior lights were switched off with
switch D, switch D must be pressed again be-
fore the interior lights are switched on.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 149

 Switching on and off automatically

f Move toggle switch to center position.

The lights are switched on when a door is un-
locked or opened or when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the ignition lock.The lights are
switched off with a delay of approx.
30 seconds after the door is closed. The light
goes out immediately as soon as the ignition is
switched on or the vehicle is locked.

Switching off

f Move toggle switch back.

f Operate switch D for switching off all interior
lights.
All interior lights are switched off.
Reading lights, rear right

Rear reading lights

Switching on

f Move toggle switch forward.

150 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Dimming (adjusting the brightness of) the Coming Home Function (Off Delay)
comfort lighting
The following lights remain switched on for a
Once the last door is closed, the footwell and door certain period to allow you to get out of the vehicle
panel lights are dimmed to the set value. safely and with the best possible view at dusk or
in darkness:
The comfort lighting is dimmed using button A in
the front roof console. – Lights in the door mirrors
f Hold down button A until the level of brightness – Side marker light
that you require is reached.
– Lincence plate lights.
Door-Surrounding Lighting
Note on operation
The door-surrounding lighting enables passengers f Set light switch to auto.
to enter the vehicle safely. Obstacles on the
ground (e.g. puddles) can be identified more f Please observe the chapter “LIGHT SWITCH”
easily. on Page 116.

The area in front of the vehicle is illuminated with The lights are switched off when the vehicle is
A - Button for dimming the comfort lighting the following lights when the vehicle is unlocked by locked or, at the latest, after the Coming Home
remote control or by Porsche Entry & Drive: light that has been set on the multi-purpose
display has expired.
Comfort Lighting – Low beam
f Please observe the chapter “LIGHTING” on
The footwell and door panel lighting improve your – Lights in the door mirrors Page 106.
orientation inside the vehicle when it is dark.
– Side marker light
These lights are switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked and switched off again automatically – Licence plate lights.
when the vehicle is locked.
The door-surrounding lighting switches off after
the Coming Home light (light that is used during
twilight hours) that has been set on the multi-pur-
pose display has expired or when the ignition is
switched on.
f Please observe the chapter “LIGHTING” on
Page 106.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 151

Sliding/Lifting Roof Readiness for operation of the sliding/
lifting roof
The electric sliding/lifting roof is made of single-
sheet safety glass. It is equipped with a sliding- – With ignition switched on.
roof cover that can be infinitely adjusted manually
– With ignition key withdrawn until door is
to protect against the sun.
first opened, but only for a maximum of
The sliding/lifting roof is operated using a knob in 10 minutes.
the roof console.
Readiness function of the sliding/lifting
Warning! roof switches off after 10 minutes
Risk of injury when operating or automatical-
If the vehicle is unlocked, the sliding/lifting roof
ly closing the sliding/lifting roof.
can no longer be operated after 10 minutes
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured (to save the vehicle battery). The power supply is
when the sliding/lifting roof is operated. switched back on when the ignition is switched on
or the engine started.
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off in vehicles that
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the ig- A- Closes sliding/lifting roof completely
nition key with you when leaving the vehicle. B- Opens sliding/lifting roof to comfort setting
C- Opens sliding/lifting roof completely
Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure
D- Opens sliding/lifting roof in lift position
themselves by operating the sliding/lifting
roof. Note on operation
f In case of danger, release the knob or car key Using the automated presetting system, every us-
immediately and operate the sliding/lifting roof able sliding/lifting roof position can be controlled
in the opposite direction. directly with the knob.

152 Controls, Safety, Instruments

A - Closing sliding/lifting roof completely B - Opening sliding/lifting roof to comfort
setting
f Turn knob to switch position A.
f Turn knob to switch position B.
Note on operation
The sliding/lifting roof opens in switch position B
The sliding/lifting roof is equipped with a force until it reaches the best position from the point of
limiter. If the sliding/lifting roof is obstructed view of noise. It can be opened fully, however, if
during the closing process, the sliding/lifting roof you continue to turn the switch beyond the limit to
opens again immediately. position C.

Using the force limiter to close the sliding/

lifting roof C - Opening sliding/lifting roof completely
f Remove the obstruction. f Turn knob beyond stop position B to switch po-
sition C.
f Turn knob to position A again.
This requires a somewhat greater effort.
Comfort function when locking/unlocking Once released, the knob rebounds to position
the vehicle B.

f Hold the car key in the door lock in the locking

position until the windows and the sliding/ D - Lifting sliding/lifting roof
lifting roof have reached the desired position.
f Turn knob between switch positions A and D
f On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, keep until it reaches the required position. The roof
the button in the door lock pressed until the is lifted completely in switch position D.
windows and the sliding/lifting roof have
reached the desired position.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 153

Emergency operation of sliding/lifting
roof
If the sliding/lifting roof is defective, this can be
closed or opened manually.

Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury and damage
to the sliding/lifting roof during emergency
operation.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the sliding/lifting roof is operated.
f During and after emergency operation, the slid-
ing/lifting roof may no longer be operated with
the rocker switch.

1. Open the glasses case in the roof console 3. Remove key B from the lower storage tray (un-
(arrow). derneath the rubber mat) in the center
console.
2. Unclip cover A.

154 Controls, Safety, Instruments

4. Insert the key in opening C. This requires a
somewhat greater effort.
5. Close sliding/lifting roof
To close the roof – turn to the right.
To open the roof – turn to the left.
6. Remove the key and return it to the storage
tray.
7. Clip in cover.
f Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 155

Panorama roof system Caution!
Risk of damage when activating the
(available as of 01/05 at the earliest)
Panorama roof system due to improperly
The Panorama roof system of your Porsche atteched roof elements.
consists of a total of four roof elements.
f Check that the roof elements are securely
Roof element 1 is the draft deflector. This attached before starting to drive.
adjusts itself according to the speed, and helps
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
protect from the disturbing effects of the wind
between the Panorama roof system and the
when the Panorama roof system is open,
attached roof elements.
especially at high speeds or from turbulent air
flow.
Both roof elements 2 and 3 can be moved by Readiness for operation of the
activating the knob in the vehicle's longitudinal Panorama roof system
direction. Roof element 3 can also be raised. This
allows the interior to be better ventilated. – With ignition switched on.

Roof element 4 is a fixed glass element and – With ignition key withdrawn until door is
completes the Panorama roof system. 1- Draft deflector
first opened, but only for a maximum of
2- Sliding roof element 10 minutes.
3- Sliding/lifting roof element
4- Fixed glass element
Readiness function of the Panorama roof
system switches off after 10 minutes
If the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle electronics
are switched off after 10 minutes to save the vehi-
cle battery. The roof elements can then no longer
be activated. The power supply is activated when
the ignition is switched on.

156 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning! A - Closes Panorama roof system
Risk of injury when operating or automatic- completely
ally closing the Panorama roof system.
f Turn knob to switch position A.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the Panorama roof system is operated. B - Opens sliding roof element completely
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off in vehicles that f Turn knob to switch position B.
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the Roof element 2 will be opened completely.
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle. The roller blind will open automatically to the
Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure selected opening width.
themselves by operating the Panorama roof
system. C - Opens Panorama roof system
completely
f In case of danger, operate the knob in the
opposite direction or release the car key f Turn knob beyond the stop position B to switch
immediately. position C.
Roof elements 2 and 3 will be opened
A- Close Panorama roof system completely completely.
B- Open sliding roof element completely
The roller blind will open automatically to the
C- Open Panorama roof system completely
D- Sliding/lifting roof element in lift position selected opening width.
E- Open sliding/lifting roof element completely
D - Raises sliding/lifting roof element
Note on operation
Using the automated presetting system, every Turn knob to switch position D.
usable roof position can be controlled directly with Roof element 3 will be raised completely. The
the knob. roller blind does not change position here.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 157

E - Opens sliding/lifting roof element Force limiter for the Panorama roof Save final position of the Panorama roof
completely system system
f Turn knob to switch position E. All roof elements are equipped with a force limiter. After disconnecting/reconnecting the vehicle
If the sliding roof or the sliding/lifting roof element battery or if the vehicle battery is discharged, or
f Roof element 3 will be opened completely.
is obstructed during the closing or opening after emergency starting with jumper cables, the
The roller blind will open automatically to the
process, the respective roof element opens or final positions of the Panorama roof system are
selected opening width.
closes again immediately. lost.

Comfort function when locking/unlocking Closing a roof element after triggering the Warning!
the vehicle force limiter
Risk of injury when closing the Panorama
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the 1. Remove the obstruction. roof system. The force limiter is not available
unlocking or locking position until the windows 2. Turn knob to position A again. and the roof elements will close with full
and the Panorama roof system have reached force.
the desired position.
Electric emergency closing function f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
f On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, keep when the Panorama roof system is closing.
the button in the door lock pressed until the Warning!
windows and the Panorama roof system have 1. Switch ignition off.
Risk of injury from the emergency closing
reached the desired position.
function for the Panorama roof system. The 2. Turn knob to position A.
force limiter is not available and the roof
3. Switch ignition on.
elements will close with full force.
4. Hold knob in position A. The closing process
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
begins after around 5 seconds. Hold the knob
when the Panorama roof system is closing.
in position until the roller blind and all roof
elements are completely closed. The proce-
If the roof cannot be closed due to dirt, ice, or
dure lasts approximately 20 seconds.
similar substances:
1. Turn knob to position A. Note on operation

2. Hold the knob in position A until all roof If the procedure is interrupted, saving the final po-
elements are completely closed. sitions must be started from the beginning.

158 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Opening/closing the roller blind Roller blind cleaning position
The rocker switch has a two-stage function: 1. Close Panorama roof system and roller blind
completely.
– If the rocker switch is pressed to the first
stage, the roller blind opens or closes as long 2. Turn knob to position C. The Panorama roof
as the rocker switch is being pressed. system opens completely.
– If the rocker switch is pressed completely, the 3. When the Panorama roof system has reached
roller blind opens or closes to the final the final position, hold the rocker switch G to
position. the front for longer than 3 seconds, until the
roller blind is completely closed.
Opening the roller blind
4. Remove dirt (e.g., leaves).
f Press rocker switch to the rear F.
5. Keep the rocker switch F pressed to the rear,
Closing the roller blind until the roller blind is completely closed.
f Press rocker switch to the front G. 6. Close sliding roof element.

Note Caution!
Roller blind
If the rocker switch is pressed completely while Risk of damage if the Panorama roof system
A roller blind is integrated into the Panorama roof the roof elements are moving, the roller blind and roller blind are in the roller blind
system and can be adjusted by activating the opens or closes to the final position after the roof cleaning position while driving.
rocker switch in the roof console. elements have reached the selected position.
f Close the Panorama roof system completely
one time before driving off.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 159

Emergency operation of the Panorama
roof system
Use emergency operation only under exceptional
circumstances if the electric emergency closing
function cannot be implemented and the end
position cannot be stored.
f Before using emergency operation, please
check whether the fuse is defective. After the
fuse has been changed, the limit positions of
the Panorama roof system will have to be
stored again.

Warning!
Risk of injury when closing the roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the roof elements are activated. 1. Remove key B from the lower storage tray 2. Unclip cover.
(underneath the rubber mat) in the center
3. Insert the key in opening H or I until it can be
console.
felt and heard to engage.
This requires a somewhat greater effort.
H – Emergency operation for the sliding roof el-
ement and the draft deflector
I – Emergency operation for the sliding/lifting
roof element

160 Controls, Safety, Instruments

4. Hold the key in this position and turn.
To close the roof – turn clockwise.
To open the roof – turn counter-clockwise.

Note on operation
When using emergency closing for the sliding/
lifting roof element, make sure that the roof
element is completely closed (center position
between sliding and lifting roof position).
5. Remove the key and return it to the storage
tray.
6. Clip in cover.
f Have the fault eliminated at your authorized
Porsche dealer.
To rule out malfunctions in the system, the final
positions of the Panorama roof system must be
saved again after emergency operation.
f Please observe the chapter “SAVE FINAL
POSITION OF THE PANORAMA ROOF SYSTEM”
on Page 158.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 161

Parking Aids Gearshift lever position:
– R – ParkAssist is activated for the front and
ParkAssist rear areas.
– In all other gearshift positions – ParkAssist
ParkAssist provides a visual and acoustic indica-
is activated for the front area.
tion to the driver of the distance between the
vehicle and a large obstacle. Note
ParkAssist is switched on automatically when the On vehicles with manual transmission, the parking
engine is started and remains active up to a speed assistant is not switched on in the rear area if the
of approx. 9 mph (14 km/h). vehicle rolls backward without reverse gear enga-
ParkAssist is switched off automatically at high ged.
speed. ParkAssist is switched on again auto-
matically when the speed drops below approx. Danger!
9 mph (14 km/h). Risk of serious personal injury or death.
The selector lever position determines activation ParkAssist cannot detect small objects such
levels for ParkAssist and the corresponding area as children and pets.
that is monitored. Even when using ParkAssist, the driver is still Switching ParkAssist on and off
responsible for taking due care when park-
Selector lever position: ing and when assessing obstacles. f Switch ParkAssist on and off using button A in
the roof console.
– P – ParkAssist is not activated. f Make sure that no persons especially small When ParkAssist is switched off, the indicator
– R, N – ParkAssist is activated for the front and children, animals or obstacles are within the light in the button lights up.
rear areas. maneuvering area.
Note on operation
– D, M – ParkAssist is activated for the front ar-
It is a good idea to switch off ParkAssist when
ea.
driving off-road and on unpaved surfaces.

162 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Maintenance note
f The sensors must always be kept free of dust,
ice and snow in order to ensure that they are
fully functional.
f Do not damage sensors by abrasion or
scratching.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is
too high.

Note on operation
The rear ultrasound sensors may not function
correctly if tires that have not been recommended
by Porsche are fitted on the spare wheel bracket.
If the spare wheel bracket is open, this may impair
Front ultrasound sensors Rear ultrasound sensors the function of the rear ultrasound sensors.

Sensors – Range of rear middle sensors (arrow) In vehicles that have air suspension with level
(only in vehicles without spare wheel bracket): control and height adjustment, the system may
Six ultrasound sensors in the front and rear not recognise obstacles near the ground at terrain
approx. 59 in. (150 cm)
bumpers measure the distance to the closest ob- level or special terrain level.
stacle. – Range of rear middle sensors
(only in vehicles with spare wheel bracket):
– Range of outer sensors
approx. 48 in. (120 cm)
(front and rear):
approx. 24 in. (60 cm) Obstacles cannot be detected in the "blind" sensor
area (above and below the sensors).
– Range of front middle sensors (arrow):
approx. 48 in. (120 cm)

Controls, Safety, Instruments 163

 If the first yellow light segment lights up, the ob-
stacle is still 48 in. (120 cm) (to the front) or 48 in.
to 59 in. (120 to 150 cm) (to the rear) away.
A brief signal tone sounds when reversing.
An intermittent tone sounds when the distance
becomes less than approx. 24 in. (60 cm). The
fourth yellow light segment lights up.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance be-
comes less than approx. 10 in. (25 cm) (on vehi-
cles with trailer coupling: approx. 14 in. (35 cm)).
The second red light segment lights up.
If the obstacle is approached even closer, the sys-
tem may not be able to recognize the obstacle any
longer.
f Set the radio volume so that the signal tones
are not drowned out.
A - Front display – left monitoring area C - Rear display – right monitoring area
B - Front display – right monitoring area D - Rear display – left monitoring area
You can have the volume of the signal tones ad-
justed to your own requirements at your autho-
Warning indicators, signal tones, distances If ParkAssist is activated, the green light seg- rized Porsche dealer.
ments of the active warning indicators are lit up
The warning indicator for the front area is located Note on operation
continuously.
on the dashboard.
If the obstacle is approached even closer after the
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that has
The warning indicator for the rear area is located continuous tone sounds and the second red light
been detected by the sensors, one or more of the
in the rooflining at the rear of the loadspace. segment lights up, the system may not be able to
yellow or red light segments lights up, depending
recognize the obstacle any longer.
The warning indicators for the various monitoring on the distance to the obstacle.
areas (left and right) are subdivided respectively
into one green, 4 yellow and 2 red light segments.

164 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Limits of ultrasonic measurement Fault indication with warning tone Driving with a trailer
– ParkAssist cannot detect sound-absorbing ob- In the event of a long-lasting fault in ParkAssist, The ParkAssist rear monitoring area is switched
stacles (e.g. powder snow), the red light segments of the active warning indi- off when the trailer’s power supply is plugged in.
cators light up and a continuous tone sounds for
– Sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfac-
three seconds after a transmission range has
es, flat painted surfaces),
been selected.
– And very thin obstacles.
Possible causes
Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic brakes
of other vehicles, jackhammers) can interfere with – Defect or system fault.
detection of obstacles. f Switch ParkAssist off.
When ParkAssist is switched off, the indicator
Fault indication without warning tone
light in the button lights up.
All red light segments of the active warning indica-
f Please have the fault remedied at an autho-
tors light up when there is a temporary fault in
rized Porsche dealer.
ParkAssist.

Note
Correct operation is no longer ensured if there is
a temporary fault (e.g. caused by ice formation or
heavy soiling on the sensors).
The system detects the temporary fault.
All light segments light up until a speed of
9 mph (14 km/h) is reached.
ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the
interference has been eliminated.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 165

 Preconditions
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
– Control switch A must be turned to position C
(passenger mirror’s setting).
– Reverse gear must be engaged.

Moving mirror glass to its initial position with

reverse gear engaged
The mirror glass swivels to its initial position when:
– The car is shifted out of reverse gear or
– The position of the control switch for the door
mirror setting is changed.

A - Control switch for door mirror adjustment

C - Passenger mirror setting

Swivelling down mirror glass as parking

aid
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass
on the passenger's side swivels down slightly to
show the curb area.
f Please observe the chapter “MIRRORS” on
Page 105.

166 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning! Notes on operation
Risk of accident when using the garage door f Always use the garage door opener in the di-
opener if persons, animals or objects are rection of travel.
within the range of movement of the equip- Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
ment that is being operated. out.
f When using the garage door opener, ensure f Before selling the vehicle, delete the pro-
that no persons, animals or objects are within gramed signals in keypad A of the garage door
the range of movement of the equipment that opener.
is being operated.
f Please read the instructions for the original
f Observe the safety notes for the original hand- hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
held transmitter. original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
To operate the device in question
(e.g. garage door, gate to the property,
alarm system):
f Press the relevant button in keypad A.
A - Programable keypad Light-emitting diode B lights up during the
B - Light-emitting diode for status identification
signal transfer.

Garage Door Opener

The programable garage door opener in your
Porsche replaces up to three original hand-held
transmitters used to operate a variety of devices
(e.g. garage door, gate to the property, alarm
system).
You have the option of programming each individ-
ual key in key pad A with an original hand-held
transmitter frequency.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 167

 Garage door opener with fixed code system Garage door opener with changeable code
system
1. Point the original transmitter at the position
marked. 1. Allocate the required keys as for the systems
with fixed code (points 1 to 4).
2. Press the button of the original hand-held
transmitter and at the same time the button to 2. To synchronise the system:
be allocated on keypad A. Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator.
3. Keep both buttons depressed until light-emit-
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
ting diode B starts to flash (first slowly and
30 seconds to initiate step 3.
then quickly).
Only release both keys when light-emitting 3. Press allocated button in keypad A twice
diode B flashes quickly. (in some devices you must press the allocated
The rapidly flashing light-emitting diode B button a third time to complete the setting).
confirms that the new frequency signal was
4. Repeat the programming steps to allocate sig-
programed successfully.
nals for the garage door opener to other but-
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate signals for the tons.
garage door opener to other keys.
Allocating garage door opener signals to Note
the keys f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
if you have not been able to successfully allo-
f Please follow the operating instructions for the cate signals for the garage door opener to the
original hand-held transmitter. keys even though you have carefully followed
the instructions in this chapter and the operat-
Before programming the keypad the first
ing instructions for the original hand-held trans-
time with garage door opener signals
mitter.
This process deletes the standard codes set at
the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
program further buttons.
f Keep the two outer buttons of keypad A
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode B begins to flash.

168 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Reprogramming an individual button of
keypad A
1. Press the button of keypad A to be repro-
gramed. Do not release the buttons before
step 4 is executed.
2. When the light-emitting diode B flashes slowly
(after approximately 20 seconds), point the
original transmitter at the position marked.
3. Press the button of the original hand-held
transmitter and keep it depressed.
4. The light-emitting diode B first flashes slowly
and then more quickly.
Only release both buttons when light-emitting
diode B flashes quickly.

Deleting programed signals

(e.g., when selling the vehicle)
f Keep the two outer buttons of key pad A
pressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode B begins to flash.
All programed signals are deleted.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 169

Ashtray
Warning!
Danger of fire.
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.

Ashtray, front Ashtray, rear

Opening Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, an

ashtray can be installed in the rear door panels.
f Press ashtray lid briefly.
Opening
Emptying
f Press ashtray lid briefly.
f Move unlocking button A to the right; the
ashtray insert pops out. Emptying
f Once you have emptied the ashtray, replace
f Open ashtray cover and press carefully to the
the insert and push it down until it clicks
door trim panel.
audibly into place.
The insert is raised slightly.
f Remove and empty insert.

170 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Cigarette Lighter
Warning!
Danger of fire and burning. The cigarette
lighter is ready for use, regardless of the ig-
nition lock position.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
f Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
f Hold the lighter by the knob only.

The cigarette lighter is ready for use regardless of

the ignition lock position.

Lighter, front Lighter, rear

f Press ashtray lid briefly. Ashtray opens inde- f Press cover in the center console briefly. Cov-
pendently. er opens independently.
f Press lighter into the receptacle (arrow). When f Press lighter into the receptacle (arrow). When
the element is red hot the lighter jumps back the element is red hot the lighter jumps back
to its initial position. to its initial position.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 171

Car Audio Operation/Tips Fading and drifting Multipath
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km), ex- Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM, di-
For radio operation see your radio manual
cept for some high power stations. rect and reflected signals may reach the antenna
which is included with your on-board litera-
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
ture. If a vehicle is moving away from the desired sta-
out.
tion's transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead
FM reception or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
or loss of reception.
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio. Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec- Station swapping
are constantly changing. tion of a stronger signal.
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
Static and fluttering an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
path area, interrupts the original signal, some-
tion. When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
times the stronger second signal will be selected
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun-
automatically until the original one returns.
problems when they are not. tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
This swapping can also occur as you drive away
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
The following characteristics are completely nor- from the selected station and approach another
FM.
mal for a given reception area, and they do not in- station of a stronger signal.
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
dicate any problem with the radio itself.
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
Note This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust-
Electronic accessories should only be installed by ing the tone control for greater bass response un-
your authorized Porsche dealer. til the disturbance has passed.
Equipment which has not been tested and ap-
proved by Porsche may impair radio reception.

172 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use
the surfaces from the center to the outside in hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the
a radial direction with a soft cloth. road and park before using a hand-held tele-
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or phone.
Compact disc player anti-static record preservative.
Disc cleaners are available in audio stores. It is essential to observe the instructions of
Caution! the telephone manufacturer before putting
the telephone into operation.
To avoid damage to compact disc player and Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms
discs. Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
Important legal and safety information re- is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown, hav-
garding the use of cellular telephones accordance with the technical requirements of
ing no dirt, damage or warpage.
Porsche.
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular tele-
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
phones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and The transmission power must not exceed
of the player unit. Do not insert any object oth-
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the 10 W.
er than a disc into the slot.Remember there are
areas where you drive. The devices must possess a type approval for
no user-serviceable parts inside the compact
your vehicle and have an “e“ symbol.
disc player.
Danger! If you should require equipment with transmission
f Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
Risk of an accident. power values greater than 10 W, please consult
prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
Severe personal injury or death can result in your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
This may cause poor sound quality.
the event of an accident. He is familiar with the technical requirements for
Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.
Looking away from the road or turning your installing devices of this kind.
f When not in use, take the disc out of the player, attention away from your driving can cause The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
put the disc back into its case and store it an accident and serious personal injury or transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
away from dust, heat, damp and direct sun- death.
light. The improper installation of radios or telephones
Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun When using your cellular telephone, you should al- or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
can damage the disc. ways: antenna inside the car may cause the warning
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the lights to come on.
road and park before making or answering a Improper installation of such equipment can cre-
call if traffic conditions so require; and ate a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
f f f

Controls, Safety, Instruments 173

If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer- Porsche Communication If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
ship technicians or outside the selling dealer, train), the system may take a few minutes after be-
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
Management (PCM) ing switched on before it determines the current
equipment is not covered under the New Car War- location.
ranty. Warning!
Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about There is a danger of accident if you set or may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
the installation of non Porsche approved equip- operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
gation system, telephone or other equipment When the battery has been disconnected, it may
ment.
when driving. take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
Reception quality This could distract you from the traffic and system is operational once more.
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re-
The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interfer-
sulting in serious personal injury or death. Satellite radio
ence caused by buildings, landscape and weather f Operate the components while driving only if
You must have the satellite radio activated before
is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
you can put it into operation. You will need a con-
to hear when using the hands-free function due to f Carry out any complicated operating or setting tract with a provider in order to use this radio.
external noise such as engine and wind noise. procedures only with the vehicle stationary
f Refer to the separate radio operating instruc-
Automatic car-wash f If it is necessary to operate these components tions before putting into operation.
f Unscrew external antennas before using an au- while the vehicle is in motion, use the function
tomatic car-wash. keys on the multi-functional steering wheel.

f Refer to the separate operating instructions

before putting the PCM into operation.
When put into operation for the first time, a dis-
tance of approx. 3 miles (5 km) must be driven in
order for the navigation system to complete the
process of fine calibration. The same applies
when the tires are changed (e.g. summer/winter
tires) or new tires fitted. Full location accuracy is
not yet achieved during the fine-calibration pro-
cess.

174 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Fire extinguisher under the right front seat
f Take the fire extinguisher out of the drawer un-
der the seat.Pay attention to the expiration
date on the fire extinguisher. If the fire extin-
guisher is used after its expiration date has
elapsed, it may not function properly.

Note
f Follow the operating instructions on the fire ex-
tinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1 to 2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.

Fire Extinguisher
If the vehicle is equipped with a fire extinguisher, it
is mounted underneath the left or right front seat,
depending on equipment level.

Fire extinguisher under the left front seat

f To remove the fire extinguisher in case of an
emergency, hold the fire extinguisher with one
hand, and press the PRESS button on the fire
extinguisher holder with the other hand
(arrow).

Controls, Safety, Instruments 175

Storage Storage options
– In the glasses case in the roof console
Warning!
– In the glove compartment, pen holder
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional – In the front and rear armrests
changes or in an accident and cause serious
– In the drawer underneath the passenger’s seat
personal injury or death.
– In the storage compartments at the sides of
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
the luggage compartment
passenger compartment unsecured.
– In the door trim panel
f Do not transport any heavy objects in open
storage trays. – In the center console, front and rear
f Always keep the storage trays closed while – On the back of the front seats
driving.
– Coat hook on the rear grab handles
f Always protect the passenger compartment
– Under the load compartment floor
with a safety net and a luggage compartment
cover. – In the front and rear cupholders Glasses case in the roof console
f Please observe the chapter “EXAMPLE FOR Sunglasses (for example) can be stored in this
DETERMINING THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF storage compartment.
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO” on Page 196.
Opening
f Press button (arrow).

Closing
f Close the lid until it clicks audibly into place.

176 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Opening
f Press button A and open cover.

Locking
f Always lock button A with the car key to secure
the contents from unauthorized access.

Glove compartment B - Thumb wheel for cooling the glove compartment

C - Holder for pens
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in Cooling the glove compartment.
case of an accident.
f Rotate thumb wheel B leftwards.
f Keep the glove compartment closed while driv-
ing. Switch cooling off

A drawer, designed to hold the vehicle folder, is lo- f Rotate thumb wheel B rightwards.
cated in the glove compartment.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 177

Storage trays in the armrest between the Opening the lower tray Storage tray in the rear armrest
front seats f Press button B and lift top tray with the cover One storage tray is located in the armrest.
Two storages trays are located in the armrest. closed.
Opening the storage tray in the armrest
Opening the top tray
1. Fold down the armrest completely.
f Press button A and lift the cover.
2. Press button C and lift the cover.

178 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Opening the storage compartment
f Pull off the cover on the handle recess.

Closing the storage compartment

f First, insert the cover at the bottom and then
close it until it clicks audibly into place.

Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Because of the heat, the right-hand storage
compartment cannot be used as such in
vehicles that have air suspension with level
control and height adjustment.

Drawer underneath the passenger’s seat Side storage compartments in the

luggage compartment
There is room for the fire extinguisher in the draw-
er underneath the right front seat. On vehicles with Space is provided for the warning triangle in the
DVD navigation, the DVD player is under the right right-hand storage compartment.
front seat.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, there
Please observe the chapter “DVD PLAYER UNDER
is an additional storage option in the left-hand
THE RIGHT FRONT SEAT” on Page 181.
storage compartment.
Opening The intermediate base can be removed to in-
crease the size of the drawer.
f Lift the unlocking handle and pull out the draw-
er.

Closing
f Close the drawer until it clicks audibly into
place.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 179

Cupholder
You can place drinks cans and cups in the cup-
holder.
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.

Warning!
Risk of accident, scalding or damage due to
spilling drinks.
f Only use cupholder when safe to do so it is.
f Only use containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never use hot drinks.

Opening front cupholder Removing cupholder insert

f Open shutter A (arrow). The cupholder insert can be removed for cleaning.
Removing the insert makes an additional storage
tray available.
f Open shutter A.
f Press together the cupholder insert at the two
engagement recesses B.
f Remove the cupholder insert.

180 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Opening rear cupholder DVD player under the right front seat Closing the cover
f Insert the four guide lugs of the cover into their
f Press on the cover of the cupholder (arrow). On vehicles with DVD navigation, the DVD player is openings (arrow).
under the right front seat behind a cover.
f Press the cover into place.
Closing rear cupholder
Opening the cover
f Push down the cover until it can be felt clicking
f Close and engage the cupholder. f Pull cover upwards on the handle into place.
(direction of the arrow 1).
f Pull out cover towards the front
(direction of the arrow 2).

Controls, Safety, Instruments 181

Rear Lid
The equipment features “Porsche Entry & Drive”
and “spare wheel bracket” affect operation of the
rear lid.
f Please observe the chapter “UNLOCKING VE-
HICLE DOORS” on Page 24.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL”
on Page 307.

Danger!
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gases can enter
the passenger compartment when the rear
lid is open.
f Always keep the rear lid closed when the
engine is running.
Unlocking rear lid f Briefly press button 2 on the remote control.
f Always keep the rear lid closed while driving. If the vehicle doors and the rear lid are not
f Pull button A in the driver's door or opened, the rear lid will lock automatically after
30 seconds.

182 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Warning!
Danger of crushing. The rear lid is auto-
matically pulled into the lock and locked.
f Make sure that your fingers are not under the
rear lid.
f Keep foreign objects or limbs away from mov-
ing parts (latch striker) of the power closing
mechanism.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.

Automatic locking
f Please observe the chapter “TAILGATE” on
Page 104.

Opening rear lid Closing rear lid

On vehicles with spare wheel bracket, the bracket The rear lid has a power closing mechanism.
must be swung aside before the rear lid can be
f Pull down the rear lid using the closing handle
opened.
(arrow) and rest it against the lock.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL” The rear lid is automatically pulled closed and
on Page 307. locked.
f Press unlocking handle (arrow) and open the
rear lid.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 183

 Unlocking Engine Compartment Lid
f Briefly press button 2 on the remote control.
The rear window can be opened with unlocking Opening
button A.
Caution!

Opening Risk of damage to engine compartment lid or

windshield wipers.
f Press unlocking button A or
f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not
f Press button 2 of the remote control for ap- pulled out forwards when opening the engine
prox. 2 seconds. compartment lid.
The rear window pops open.
f Always switch the windshield wipers off (posi-
tion 0) before opening the engine compart-
Closing ment lid.
If the wiper arms are not in position 0, they will
f Lower the rear window and press it into the automatically move to this position when the
lock until it can be felt to engage and lock. engine compartment lid is opened. This will
Rear Window Automatic Locking
happen even if the ignition is off.
The wiper arms remain in this position until the
Danger! f Please observe the chapter “TAILGATE” on lid is closed and the wiper system is switched
Page 104. off and then on again.
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gases can enter
the passenger compartment when the rear
window is open.
f Always keep the rear window closed when the
engine is running.
f Always keep the rear window closed while
driving.

f Please observe the chapter “UNLOCKING VE-

HICLE DOORS” on Page 24.

184 Controls, Safety, Instruments

 Closing
Danger!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.

f Lower lid and let it fall into the lock.

If necessary, push the lid with the palm of your
hand in the area of the lock.
f Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
1. Pull release lever (arrow). Hood is unlocked. 2. Unlatch safety catch A. If the lid is not closed properly, a message will
be displayed on the multi-purpose display of
3. Open the lid completely. the instrument panel while the vehicle is being
When the lid is open, the engine compartment driven.
is lit by an under hood light.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 185

Loadspace 2. Unclip prop B and insert it into receiver C in the Tie-down rings
loadspace floor.
The maximum permissible load on the loadspace You can secure the load in the luggage compart-
floor is 400 kg or 880 lbs. The weight must be dis- ment against slipping. Tie-down straps or the
tributed evenly over the entire loadspace.
Closing loadspace floor
luggage net can be fastened to tie-down rings D.
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- 1. Lift the loadspace floor slightly and clip prop B f Make sure that all rings are equally loaded
MATION” on Page 195. into its holder in the vehicle floor. when securing a load.
2. Close the loadspace floor.
Opening loadspace floor Note on operation
The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain a
1. Pull handle A and lift the loadspace floor. heavy load in an accident.

186 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Luggage Compartment Cover
The luggage can be protected against prying eyes
with the luggage compartment cover.
f Always pull out the luggage compartment cov-
er when transporting objects in the luggage
compartment.
The luggage compartment cover is not de-
signed to carry objects.
f Do not hang bags or objects on the support
brackets A. The support brackets could break
off.
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
MATION” on Page 195.

Warning!
Danger of injury. During braking, direction Pulling out luggage compartment cover Remove luggage compartment cover
changes or in an accident, objects can slide
into the passenger compartment and endan- f Pull out the cover by the handle and insert it f Pull the release B back.
into the guides on the left and right side walls
ger the occupants. f Lift the cover at the right and remove.
of the luggage compartment.
f Do not place objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
Retracting luggage compartment cover
f Disengage the luggage compartment cover
from the guides on the side walls and carefully
guide it back into the retractor roller.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 187

Installing luggage compartment cover
f Insert the cover into the receiver on the left
side.
f Press the cover down into the receiver on the
right side until it can be heard and felt to en-
gage.
Release B must point forwards.

188 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Luggage Safety Net Permitted uses
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- Option 1
MATION” on Page 195.
The safety net can hold back only lightweight
items during braking, direction changes or in an
accident.

Warning!
Danger of injury. During braking, direction
changes or in an accident, an unsecured
load can slip and endanger the occupants. Option 2
f Always secure the passenger compartment
with the luggage safety net.
f Always fasten the load at the tie-down rings.
f The load must never project over the top edge
Securing interior with luggage safety net
of the seat backrest.
f If the safety net was heavily stressed or dam- Pulling out luggage safety net
aged during braking or an accident, etc., have f Open covers of the luggage safety net
the luggage safety net and its bracket checked brackets.
by an authorized Porsche dealer. Option 3
f Pull the luggage safety net out and engage the
fastening hooks on the left and right sides into
the rings on the ceiling.
The luggage safety net fastening hooks can be
pulled out at the sides.
f Make sure that the luggage safety net fasten-
ing hooks are properly engaged in the rings.

f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR

SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 189

Removing luggage safety net assembly Fastening luggage safety net assembly at
from the rear seat backrest the bottom of the rear seat backrest
f Open both rear doors. If you wish to make better use of the luggage
space, you can fasten the luggage safety net as-
f Fold down the left seat backrest first, followed
sembly at the lower part of the rear seat backrest.
by the right seat backrest. The seat cushions
need not be folded for this purpose. f Insert the luggage safety net assembly into re-
ceivers A and push it in up to the stop
f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR
(arrows).
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.
1. Push the luggage safety net assembly in the
direction of the arrow 1.
2. Lift the luggage safety net assembly off
(direction of the arrow 2).

190 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Ski Bag 2. Fold down the armrest of the rear seat back- 5. Pull out and unfold the ski bag.
rest.
6. Insert objects into the ski bag from the
Long objects such as skis can be transported in
3. Pull protective cover B off the Velcro strap at luggage compartment.
the passenger compartment, where they can be
the top and lower it.
kept clean and protected against damage.
4. Press release button C on the lid of the
Loading ski bag through-load facility downwards and fold down
the lid.
1. Press release button A on the lid of the
through-load facility.
Open the lid downward.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 191

 Stowing ski bag
1. Empty ski bag.
2. Pull ski bag into the passenger compartment.
3. Close lid in the luggage compartment.
4. Carefully fold the ski bag and close the lid.
5. Put in the protective cover and secure it with
the Velcro strap.

Note on operation
f Fold up the ski bag only when it is dry.

Securing load
f Secure the stowed objects with tightening
belt D.
f Insert belt tongue into the buckle.

192 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Roof Transport System Warning! When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size and
Risk of an accident, loss of control and dam-
f Please follow the separate instructions for weight of the load being carried.
age to the vehicle.
fitting the Roof Transport System.
f But never drive faster than 90 mph
f Completely remove the Roof Transport System
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- (140 km/h).
before using an automatic car wash – risk of
MATION” on Page 195.
damage to the vehicle. f With the basic carrier fitted and no load, do not
Fitting normal commercially available luggage exceed a maximum speed of 110 mph
f Do not exceed the permissible roof load, the
racks is not possible. (180 km/h).
permissible gross weight and the permissible
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows the axle loads. Adapt your driving style and speed to the changed
transport of various sports and hobby equipment. Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on conditions.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to Page 363. Nevertheless, Porsche recommends that you do
tell you about the manifold uses of the Roof Trans- not exceed the posted speed limit.
f Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
port System.
as possible. Items of luggage must not project Driving, braking and steering behavior change due
beyond the side of the load area. to the higher center of gravity and the greater
wind-resistant area. You should adapt your driving
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
style appropriately.
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners). f Since fuel consumption and noise are in-
creased with the Roof Transport System fitted,
f Before every journey, and at regular intervals
it should not remain on the car if not in use.
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if
necessary and secure additionally by locking.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 193

 f Use only ADAPTER makes tested and ap- Hitching trailer
proved by Porsche.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you at-
f Ensure that all trailer equipment conforms to
tach a trailer. The inclination sensor could trig-
the appropriate classification for total gross
ger the alarm unintentionally.
trailer weight and tongue weight.
f Follow the operating instructions for the trailer
f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
Page 363.
f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- Page 363.
MATION” on Page 195.
Unhitching trailer
Retrofitting
f If the trailer is equipped with an overrun brake,
Have a trailer coupling retrofitted only by an autho- do not unhitch the trailer when its brake is still
rized Porsche dealer. The dealer is familiar with applied.
the manufacturer's specifications and any neces-
sary conversion measures.
Trailer Coupling
Warning!
Electrical connection
Risk of accident. Your Porsche is equipped with a 7-pin connector A
for the electrical connection to the trailer.
f Follow the operating instructions for the trailer
recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
Warning!
f Do not modify or repair the trailer coupling.
Risk of accident. Failure to keep an electrical
f Before having new ADAPTER fitted, find out adapter clean may result in corrosion and af-
from your authorized Porsche dealer about the fect operation of electrical lines, resulting in
current authorization status. possible trailer brake system failure.
f Periodically inspect and clean adapter as
needed.

194 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Loading Information The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor- cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
mation is located on the safety comliance sticker the load limit.
Definitions located in the driver’s side door jamb.
f Never exceed the permissible limits.
The towing capacity (gross weight of the trailer) For determining the compatibility of the tire and
is the sum of the trailer's empty weight and the vehicle load capabilities: Danger!
weight of the load.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRES, RIMS, Risk of personal injury or death.
The vertical coupling load is the weight that the TRACKS” on Page 358. Injuries are much more likely in an accident
trailer drawbar exerts on the trailer coupling of the if persons ride in the cargo area.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a mi-
vehicle.
nimum requirement. f Persons must ride only on the seats provided
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the for this purpose.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the
rear axle plus the weight of the transported load
and the vertical coupling load of the trailer.
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen- f Make sure that everybody fastens their safety
gers, cargo and trailer. belts.
The gross weight of the vehicle and trailer is
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
the sum of the weight of the towing vehicle and the
the maximum total weight limit specified of the damage to vehicle.
weight of the trailer.
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle - is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo f Never exceed the specified axle loads. Over-
vehicle weight including standard and optional that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa- loading can shorten the service life of the tires
equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire tion can be found on the tire pressure plate. and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehicle
assembly. This weight does not include passen- If a trailer is being towed, the trailer tongue weight reactions and long braking distances. Damage
gers and cargo. must be included as part of the cargo load. due to overloading is not covered by the vehic-
le warranty.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle ca-
combined. pacity weight and production options weight.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi- The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, lug- is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
gage, hitch, trailer tongue load and optional equip-
The maximum load rating is the load rating for
ment.
a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pres-
sure.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 195

 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Example for determining the combined weight of occup- Determining the combined weight of
ants and cargo
Consult this manual to determine how this re-
occupants and cargo:
duces the available cargo and luggage load ca-
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add pacity of your vehicle.
Vehicle Load Capacity the total luggage weight (figure).
f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
Steps for determining correct load limit
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle. 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
PLATE” on Page 281. pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture)
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehic-
le.

196 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Stowing load in the vehicle f If the rear seats are not occupied, the back- Driving
rests can be additionally secured with the safe-
f The car's handling changes depending on the
Warning! ty belts. Simply cross the outer safety belts
vehicle loading. Adapt your driving style to the
and insert each into the opposite buckle.
Danger of injury. changed driving behavior.
f Make sure that the cargo cannot damage the
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned cargo f Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and
can slip out of place or endanger the vehicle heating filaments of the rear window and the
the axle load.
occupants during braking, direction changes TV antenna of the side window.
or in accidents. f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Never transport objects which are not se- Luggage net Page 363.
cured. f Luggage must be stowed completely covered f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
f Always transport cargo in the cargo area, nev- by the luggage net. open.
er in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or in The luggage net can prevent only lightweight Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
front of the seats). objects from slipping. compartment.

f Support the cargo on the seat backrests when- Tie-down belts f Adapt the tire pressure to the load.
ever possible. Always lock the backrests into
f Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down f Please observe the chapter “LOAD” on
place. Page 93.
cargo.
f Place the cargo behind unoccupied seats f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
f Do not place belts and straps over sharp edg-
whenever possible. RES, COLD” on Page 361.
es.
f Stow heavy objects as close to the front of the
f Observe the directions for use and information
cargo area as possible, with lightweight ob-
for the tie-down equipment.
jects behind them.
f Use only belts with a tear strength of at least
f The cargo must never project over the top
1543 lbs. (700 kg) and a maximum width of
edge of the seat backrest.
1 in. (25 mm).
f Always protect the passenger compartment
f Cross the belts over the load.
with a luggage safety net and a luggage
compartment cover.
Do not drive with objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 197

Towing a trailer Distributing the load Door mirrors
f Distribute the load in the trailer so that heavy f If the width of the trailer obstructs your view of
Warning! objects are as close to the axle as possible. the traffic behind the trailer, you must have ad-
Driving with a trailer Always safeguard all objects against slipping ditional door mirrors fitted.
and tie them down securely.
f Always observe the permissible towing capac- Headlights, lights
ity, vertical coupling load and rear-axle load. f You should make the best possible use of the
Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on trailer coupling's rated vertical coupling load f Always check the headlight adjustment before
Page 363. when loading the trailer, but never exceed it. driving with a trailer.
If necessary, correct with the headlight beam
f When connected, the trailer must always be Tire pressure adjustment function.
horizontal behind the towing vehicle. If neces-
sary, use a trailer with an adjustable drawbar. f Select the vehicle tire pressure for full load f Check whether the plug of the trailer is
when towing a trailer. plugged into the towing vehicle and whether all
f When the vehicle is driven in the mountains, the lights function.
engine output decreases as altitude increases. f Please observe the chapter “Tire pressure ta-
The maximum weights stated are the values at bles”.
sea level. The total permissable weight of the f Check the tire pressure of the trailer's wheels
car-trailer combination must therefore be re- according to the manufacturer's instructions.
duced by 10% for each increment of 3,280 ft.
(1,000 meters) altitude. A fractional increment
counts as the full 3,280 ft. (1,000 meters).
Please take this into consideration when plan-
ning your route.

198 Controls, Safety, Instruments

Driving with a trailer f Slow down immediately if the trailer starts to
sway. Do not countersteer; brake if necessary.
When towing a trailer you must under all circum-
Never attempt to straighten out the car-trailer
stances adapt your speed to prevailing road and
combination by accelerating.
driving conditions. Never exeed a speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). Towing at excessive speed f Activate Low Range when moving off on steep
can result in loss of control. slopes.
f Carefully and gradually familiarize yourself with f Under no circumstances may people, animals
the handling and braking behavior of the car- or objects be in the space between the trailer
trailer combination. and the towing vehicle when the vehicle is
moving.
f Do not drive with the towing vehicle empty and
the trailer loaded. f When reversing, bear in mind that ParkAssist is
If this unfavorable combination is unavoidable, not active.
please drive especially slowly.
f Bear in mind the different vehicle handling and Maintenance note
size in situations such as braking, parking, Please take into consideration that driving with a
cornering and overtaking, etc. trailer places markedly greater stress on all vehi-
f The driving stability of the car-trailer combina- cle components. Expert inspection and mainte-
tion worsens as the speed increases. There- nance after every use are indispensable prerequi-
fore, drive especially slowly on downhill sites for proper functioning and safety.
stretches and in the case of unfavorable road
and weather conditions (such as wind).
f Drive in an appropriately low gear on downhill
stretches in order to make use of the engine
braking effect.

Controls, Safety, Instruments 199

200 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Manual transmission, clutch ........................ 202
Tiptronic S................................................. 203
Selector Lever Positions ............................. 204
Driving Programs for On-Road and
Off-Road Driving ......................................... 211
Power-Transmission and Running-Gear
Control Systems ........................................ 217
Off-Road Driving ......................................... 227
Air Suspension with Level Control
and Height Adjustment................................ 236
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM) .................................. 239

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 201

 The positions of the gears are shown on the shift Permitted engine speed
diagram on the gearshift lever.
f You should change into a higher gear before
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
the needle reaches the red mark on the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
has fully engaged.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
feed is interrupted.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes. Caution!
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
and engine braking.
shifting down to a lower gear.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
f Take care not to exceed the maximum permit-
on, the reversing lights are lit.
ted engine speed when down-shifting.

Manual transmission, clutch

Warning!
Risk of accident.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.

Floor mats of the correct size and with the

appropriate fasteners are available from your
authorized Porsche dealer.

202 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Tiptronic S Release button
The release button (arrow) on the front side of the
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
selector lever prevents unintentional gear chang-
and features an “automatic” and a “manual” gear-
es.
shift mode.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
In automatic selection mode (selector lever po-
to position R or P.
sition D), gear changing is automatic.
Depending on the driving program, you can The selector lever cannot be operated in the event
change temporarily from automatic to manual of an electrical fault.
mode using the rocker switches on the steering
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTOR LE-
wheel.
VER EMERGENCY RELEASE” on Page 210.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the rocker Starting
switches on the steering wheel or by pushing the
selector lever forward or back. The engine can be started only in selector lever
You can change between selector lever positions position P or N with the brake pedal pressed.
D and M as you wish while driving.
Changing the selector lever position Moving off
Note on operation
The selector lever is locked with the ignition key f Select the desired position for moving off
Take care not to operate the rocker switches on withdrawn. (D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
the steering wheel inadvertently, thereby trigger-
The selector lever can be moved from position P when depressing the brake pedal.
ing undesired gear changes.
or N only with: f Since the car creeps when in gear, do not re-
– The ignition switched on lease the brake until you want to move off.

– The brake pedal pressed and f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
– The release button pressed

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 203

 If there is a fault in the transmission: Selector Lever Positions
– An X appears instead of the current gear indi-
cation on the multi-purpose display of the in- P – Parking lock
strument panel.
The transmission no longer shifts. In selector lever position P, the driven wheels are
mechanically locked.
f To remedy the fault, immediately consult an au-
thorized Porsche dealer. f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is
stationary.
f Engage parking lock after applying the park-
ing brake and release it before releasing the
parking brake.
f Always apply the parking brake before leaving
the vehicle.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector
lever position P.
Display
R – Reverse
Indicator for selector lever position and f Select reverse only if car is stationary and the
engaged gear brake is applied.
When the engine is running, the selector lever po-
sition and engaged gear are indicated. N – Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
when depressing the brake pedal.

204 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

D - Automatic selection mode (in the road The bend is taken in the right gear, and when you The system leaves manual selection mode:
driving program) accelerate out of the bend you do not have to
– automatically after around 8 seconds
change down.
(unless car is cornering, overrunning or
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
Moving off stationary),
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in
the off-road program, Low Range. In 2nd gear, the vehicle moves off with the throttle – if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
f Use selector lever position D for “normal” driv- only slightly open. Move off in 1st gear with the
Temporary change-down
ing. throttle open wider or when the engine is cold.
The gears are shifted automatically according When PSM is switched off, the car generally Precondition
to the accelerator position and speed. moves off in 1st gear.
– Speed is higher than approx. 33 mph
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven and on Shifting gear on the steering wheel (54 km/h).
the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-changing
By shifting gear with the rocker switches on the f Depress accelerator quickly.
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine- The Tiptronic changes temporarily to the sport-
speed ranges. Movement of the accelerator, steering wheel, you can temporarily change from
automatic selection mode D to manual selection iest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest pos-
driving speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration sible gear-changing points. Correspondingly,
and the road profile all have an influence on the mode M.
the transmission shifts down immediately by
gear-changing characteristic. Advantages one, two or three gears.
When PSM is switched off, transmission gear
changes are done at higher engine speeds. – Shifting down before bends and on entering
Ending the function
built-up areas.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are f Release the accelerator markedly (by approx.
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator ped- – Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
25%).
al. braking).
f f f
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward chang- – Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
es on bends are not made until the engine-speed – Selecting 1st or 2nd gear for moving off.
limit is reached.
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
During braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the Tiptronic changes down earlier. – For cornering (depending on the lateral accel-
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is en- eration) and overrunning,
gaged when pressure is applied to the brakes be- – When the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a junc-
fore the bend. tion).

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 205

Kickdown Depending on the route profile, the gear-changing The system leaves manual selection mode:
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine-
The kickdown function is active in selector lever – Automatically after around 8 seconds
speed ranges. On steep downhill stretches, up-
position D. (unless car is subject to high lateral accelera-
ward shifts are prevented until medium engine
tion, is overrunning or stationary),
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak- speeds are reached (at least 2,500 rpm).
ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the – if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
When the car is overrunning, an automatic upshift
full-throttle point (kickdown).
does not occur when the engine speed limit is Kickdown
The transmission shifts down depending on the reached.
speed of travel and engine speed. The kickdown function is active in selector lever
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine Moving off position D.
speeds. The car moves off in 1st gear. f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak-
These gear-changing speeds remain active until ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
the accelerator is released to approx. 80% of the Shifting gear on the steering wheel full-throttle point (kickdown).
full-throttle position.
By shifting gear with the rocker switches on the The transmission shifts down depending on the
steering wheel, you can temporarily change from speed of travel and engine speed.
D - Automatic selection mode (in the off- automatic selection mode D to manual selection Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
road driving program) mode M. speeds.
The functions of selector lever positions D and M Advantages These gear-changing speeds remain active until
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in the accelerator is released to approx. 80% of the
– Shifting down on downward slopes (engine full-throttle position.
the off-road program, Low Range.
braking).
f Use selector lever position D for “normal” driv- Tip on driving
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
ing.
Unlike in the on-road driving program, an automat-
The gears are shifted automatically according – Selecting 1st/2nd or 3rd gear for moving off.
ic upshift is not performed in manual selection
to the accelerator position and speed.
The manual selection mode remains engaged: mode M when the engine-speed limit is reached.
The gears are shifted automatically according to
– For overrunning
the accelerator position and speed. The gear-
changing points have been adjusted to achieve the – Depending on lateral acceleration
best possible vehicle control on difficult terrain.
– When the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a junc-
tion).

206 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

 Warning! Shifting down
The kickdown function is not active in manual f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
selection mode “M“.
f Push selector lever B back in the M gate.
The kickdown function cannot be used to
downshift in manual selection mode “M“. Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time. Gear chang-
f Therefore shift down manually when accelerat-
es which would exceed the upper or lower engine-
ing (e.g. to overtake).
speed limit are not executed by the control unit.
You can change down two gears by quickly press-
Shifting up
ing rocker switches A or selector lever B twice.
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or
If PSM is active and the engine-speed limit is
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate. reached, an automatic upward shift is performed
or, just before idling speed is reached, a down-
ward shift is performed.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
M - Manual selection mode (in the road This will ensure optimum use of engine power
driving program) and engine braking.
If manual mode fails, the control electronics
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
switch to automatic mode.
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in
In this event, the instrument panel will display se-
the off-road program, Low Range.
lector lever position D.
The currently selected gear is retained if you
f To remedy the fault, please consult an autho-
change from D to M.
rized Porsche dealer.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
f f f
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 207

M - Manual selection mode (in the off- Warning! Shifting down
road driving program) The kickdown function is not active in manual f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
selection mode “M“.
The functions of selector lever positions D and M f Push selector lever B back in the M gate.
The kickdown function cannot be used to
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in
downshift in manual selection mode “M“. Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
the off-road program, Low Range.
you can shift up or down at any time. Gear chang-
f Therefore shift down manually when accelerat-
The currently selected gear is retained if you es which would exceed the upper or lower engine-
ing (e.g. to overtake).
change from D to M. speed limit are not executed by the control unit.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map You can change down two gears by quickly press-
Tip on driving
suitable for your current driving style is selected ing rocker switches A or selector lever B twice.
and the appropriate gear is selected. The kickdown function is not active in selector le-
ver position M. The gear is changed down automatically just be-
Unlike in the road driving program, an automatic fore idle speed is reached.
upshift is not performed when the engine-speed f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
limit is reached. and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
Shifting up and engine braking.
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or If manual mode fails, the control electronics
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate. switch to automatic mode. In this event, the instru-
ment panel will display selector lever position D.
f To remedy the fault, please consult an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

208 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Stopping Parking Reduced driving program
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the f Go easy on the accelerator. If there is a fault in the transmission:
selector lever in drive position and hold the ve-
f When parking or maneuvring in a small space, – An X appears instead of the current gear
hicle with the brake pedal.
control the speed by careful use of the foot- indicator on the multi-purpose display of the in-
f Do not hold the car on a slope using the accel- brake. strument panel.
erator. Use the brake pedal or the parking The transmission no longer shifts.
brake instead. Driving in winter f To remedy the fault, immediately consult an au-
f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the thorized Porsche dealer.
handbrake and move the selector lever to In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
position P. steep inclines in manual mode M. This prevents Warning!
the occurrence of gear changes that could cause
Tip on driving wheelspin. Reverse gear lock monitoring is disabled in
the emergency running program.
In selector lever positions D and M, the Hillholder Damage to the vehicle may result as well as
prevents the car from rolling backward when it has loss of control, if the vehicle is moving for-
been stopped on an upward slope with the engine ward fast enough to cause rear wheel lockup.
running.
f Do not shift into R while the vehicle is moving
f Please observe the chapter “HILLHOLDER” on forward.
Page 224.

Tip on driving
3rd or 5th gear in selector position D and reverse
gear R are now available and will allow you to
reach the nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please go to your authorized Porsche dealer
as soon as possible.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 209

Selector lever emergency release 4. Lift trim C at the rear and carefully pull it off. 6. Press foam aside.

In the event of an electrical fault, the selector lever 5. Unplug plug connection D. 7. Press locking lever E aside (to the left) using a
lock in position P can be manually released (for suitable object.
towing the vehicle, for example). 8. Move selector lever to position N.
1. Raise center armrest. 9. Reassemble in reverse order.
2. Use the key for emergency operation of the
sliding/lifting roof to undo screws A. Danger!
Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY Risk of loss of control and personal injury.
OPERATION OF SLIDING/LIFTING ROOF” on
Page 154. f Ensure that the parking brake of the vehicle is
set and that vehicle does not move on its own.
3. Remove trim mounting B.

210 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

 With rocker switch A, you can easily select the ap- Each time the rocker switch is pushed forward,
propriate driving program to suit the special re- the vehicle becomes one step more suitable for
quirements for the respective terrain. off-road driving. This is realised by changing from
the on-road to the off-road driving program or by
Off-road program Low Range engaging the differential locks in stages.
(with reduction) The number of differential locks that can be en-
When Low Range is active, the power transmis- gaged in Low Range depends on the equipment of
sion and running-gear control systems are your vehicle.
automatically adapted to the requirements for Each time the rocker switch is pushed back, the
off-road driving. vehicle becomes one step more suitable for on-
road driving.
On-road driving program High Range
(without reduction) Once the driving program has been selected, the
rocker switch springs back to home position.
When High Range is active, the power-transmis-
sion and running-gear control systems are auto- Notes on operation
matically adapted to the requirements for on-road
driving. If the Low Range indicator light beside the rocker
switch flashes rapidly after the ignition is
Driving Programs for On-Road and switched on, there is a fault in the shifting
Off-Road Driving Use system.

Two different driving programs with special power- Rocker switch A is located in the center console f Please have the vehicle checked immediately
transmission and running-gear control systems of the vehicle. It features a multi-step function and at an authorized Porsche dealer.
(such as ABS, off-road ABS and PSM, etc.) are pro- can be operated in both directions.
vided in your Porsche, with the aim of realising the
best possible driving dynamics combined with
maximum safety.
All control systems meet these requirements for
both off-road and normal driving.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 211

 f Push rocker switch A forward until activation of
Low Range indicator light
the off-road driving program is indicated on the
multi-purpose display of the instrument panel
If the Low Range indicator light beside the rocker
and by illumination of light-emitting diode B.
switch flashes when you attempt to operate rock-
The Low Range indicator lights in the instru-
er switch, the conditions for a shift have not been
ment panel and beside the rocker switch flash
met:
several times during the shifting process.
Vehicles with manual transmission Low Range is now engaged.
– Vehicle is not stationary.
Caution!
– Brake is not pressed.
Risk of engine damage (overrevving). In the
– Gear-shift lever is not in neutral. Low Range program, the gear-changing
Vehicles with Tiptronic S points are shifted towards lower engine-
speed ranges.
– Vehicle has exceeded or gone below the limit
speed. f Shift early to prevent overrevving the engine.

– Selector lever is not in position N.

Tip on driving
A - Rocker switch
B - Low Range is engaged When Low Range is active, the power
transmission and running-gear control systems
Changing from on-road driving program are automatically adapted to the requirements for
to off-road driving program off-road driving.

Vehicles with manual transmission

f Stop the vehicle.
f Apply the brake.
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral.

212 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Vehicles with Tiptronic S f Push rocker switch A forwards in stages until
engagement of the center differential lock is in-
f Reduce speed to below 9.3 mph (15 km/h) or
dicated on the multi-purpose display of the in-
stop vehicle.
strument panel and by the illumination of the
f Move selector lever to position N. two light-emitting diodes B and C.
The center differential lock is changed over to
f Push rocker switch A forward until activation of
fully engaged state by the automatic control
the off-road driving program is indicated on the
system.
multi-purpose display of the instrument panel
and by illumination of light-emitting diode B.
The Low Range indicator light on the instru-
ment panel and light-emitting diode B beside
the rocker switch flash several times during
the shifting process.
Low Range is now engaged.

Danger!
Serious risk of injury or death. Risk of
accident due to uncontrolled vehicle A - Rocker switch
movement. The selector lever is blocked B - Low Range is engaged
during the shifting procedure. Shifting when C - Center differential lock is fully engaged
driving uphill can cause the vehicle to stand
still or even roll backwards, if the shifting Fully engaging the center differential lock
procedure has not yet been completed. in Low Range
When driving downhill, the vehicle can accel-
erate unintentionally while shifting. Tip on driving

f Increased brake readiness is required. When the center differential lock is fully engaged,
there is no longer any speed difference between
f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS- the front and rear axles. If, for example, both
MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS- wheels at the front axle lose traction on an icy
TEMS” on Page 217. road or soft surface, the rigidly linked drive wheels
will permit the vehicle to continue moving never-
theless.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 213

 f Push rocker switch A forwards in stages until
engagement of the rear differential lock (trans-
verse lock) is indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel and by the
illumination of the three light-emitting diodes B,
C and D.
The center and rear differential locks are chan-
ged over to fully engaged state by the auto-
matic control system.

Note on operation Hydraulically disengageable anti-roll bars

The rear differential lock can only be engaged The front and rear anti-roll bars can be disengaged
while the engine is running. to improve traction and comfort when driving off
road. This feature increases the wheel articulation.

Condition for disengaging the anti-roll bars

– Low Range is engaged.
A- Rocker switch
B- Low Range is engaged Note
C- Center differential lock is fully engaged
D- Rear differential lock is fully engaged The anti-roll bars cannot be engaged if the wheel
articulation or lateral acceleration is too great.
Fully engaging the rear differential lock in
Low Range
Tip on driving
When the rear differential lock is fully engaged,
there is no longer any speed difference between
the two rear wheels. If, for example, one drive
wheel at the rear axle loses traction on an icy road
or soft surface, the stiff through-drive function will
permit the car to continue moving nevertheless.

214 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Disengaging Note on operation
Indicator light and warnings
f Press button E. The anti-roll bars are engaged automatically when
Disengagement of the anti-roll bars is indicated a speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) is exceeded or Indication of a fault by:
on the multi-purpose display of the instrument when the lateral acceleration value is high.
– Continuous illumination of the light-emitting
panel and by illumination of light-emitting diode
Notes diode in the button
F.
The light-emitting diode on the button flashes Engagement of the anti-roll bars is audible. – Illumination of the warning light on the
several times during the disengagement instrument panel
process. At temperatures below –4°F (–20°C), the anti-roll
bars take somewhat longer to engage. – A message on the multi-purpose display of the
The anti-roll bars are disengaged.
instrument panel
Note on operation f Adapt your driving behavior to the changed
The anti-roll bars cannot be disengaged manually conditions.
at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Drive slowly to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer and have the fault remedied.
Engaging f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
f Press button E. AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.
Light-emitting diode F on the button flashes
several times during the engagement
process and then goes out.
The anti-roll bars are engaged.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 215

Changing from off-road driving program Vehicles with Tiptronic S Danger!
to on-road driving program f Reduce speed to below 19 mph (30 km/h) or Serious risk of injury or death. Risk of
stop vehicle. accident due to uncontrolled vehicle
Vehicles with manual transmission
movement. The selector lever is blocked
f Move selector lever to position N.
f Stop the vehicle. during the shifting procedure. Shifting when
f Pull rocker switch A back in stages until light-
f Apply the brake. driving uphill can cause the vehicle to stand
emitting diodes B, C and if necessary, D are still or even roll backwards, if the shifting
f Put the gearshift lever in neutral. out. procedure has not yet been completed.
The Low Range indicator light on the instru-
f Pull rocker switch A back in stages until light- When driving downhill, the vehicle can accel-
ment panel and light-emitting diode B beside erate unintentionally while shifting.
emitting diodes B, C and if necessary, D are
the rocker switch flash several times during
out. f Increased brake readiness is required.
the shifting process.
The Low Range indicator light on the instru-
High Range is active.
ment panel and light-emitting diode B beside f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS-
the rocker switch flash several times during MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS-
the shifting process. TEMS” on Page 217.
High Range is active.

216 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Power-Transmission and Running-Gear Control Systems
A complex interconnection of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the running gear has been realised in your Porsche.
All control systems have been linked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety.
The following systems are involved:

System/designation Scope
PTM – Full-time all-wheel drive
Porsche Traction Management
– Electronically controlled center differential lock
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Traction control system (TCS)
– Reduction gear/Low Range

PTM Plus In addition to the PTM features, PTM Plus also includes:
Porsche Traction Management – Electronically controlled rear differential lock
– Hydraulically disengageable anti-roll bars

PSM – Stability management system

Porsche Stability Management
– Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
– Traction control system (TCS)
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Engine drag torque control (MSR)

Air suspension – Fully load bearing air spring struts with integral shock absorbers
with level control and height adjustment
– Air supply system with pressure accumulator

PASM – Shock absorber system with adaptive, continuous shock absorber control
Porsche Active Suspension Management

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 217

Porsche Traction Management (PTM) Advantages of PTM Safety notes!
– Obvious improvement in traction, driving stabil- In spite of the advantages of PTM, it is still the driv-
Porsche Traction Management is a full-time all-
ity and steering ability of the car. er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
wheel control system designed to influence the
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi-
longitudinal and lateral dynamics. It is closely – Vehicle is more manageable when driven at its
tions, as well as the traffic situation.
linked with the Porsche Stability Management performance limits.
(PSM) system: The increased safety that is provided should not in-
– Improved straight-ahead tracking and stability.
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
PTM ensures the best possible power distribution
– The aforementioned features allow for a sport- The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
to the four driven wheels at the front and rear ax-
ier setup of the running gear. overcome, even with PTM.
les. The system realises this optimal traction by in-
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
tervening in the lock control function of the trans- – The TCS and ABD provide even better traction
cannot be reduced by PTM.
fer case and rear differential. PTM is active at all for all wheels.
times and, unlike the PSM, cannot be switched off.

218 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Full-time all-wheel drive Automatic brake differential (ABD) Traction control system (TCS)
With the four-wheel drive, the drive power is vari- The ABD system controls the front and rear axles The traction control system prevents the wheels
ably distributed to the front and rear wheels. separately. If one wheel of an axle starts to spin, from spinning by adjusting the engine power,
Power distribution and wheel speed compensation it is braked so that the other wheel on the same thereby ensuring good lane-holding ability and a
between the front and rear axles is realised with a axle can be driven. stable driving behavior.
transfer box.
The ABD recognises different driving states, and it
Distribution of the drive power depends on the features control strategies adapted to these
wheel speed difference between the two axles. states. In situations in which little propulsive power
The transfer box always controls power distribu- is required, such as when the car moves off on a
tion in such a way that optimal propulsion is level gravel surface, traction control already be-
achieved, even on an unfavorable road surface. comes active at low engine speeds. If great
propulsive power is required, e.g. when moving off
Full-time four-wheel drive ensures optimal handling
on an uphill slope or for rapid acceleration, the
and great stability.
ABD is adapted accordingly.
A special off-road program is used in Low Range
Safety notes! mode.
In spite of the advantages of four-wheel drive, it is
still the driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving
style and maneuvers in line with road and weather
conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not in-
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with four-wheel drive.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed can-
not be reduced by four-wheel drive.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 219

Porsche Stability Management (PSM) Advantages of PSM Readiness for operation
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability PSM is switched on automatically every time you
PSM is an active control system for stabilisation of
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces start the engine.
the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvres. It
with varying friction.
operates together with the Porsche Traction Function
Management (PTM) system. – The system compensates for undesired vehi-
cle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the driver Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
PSM makes use of both the ABD and TCS sys- and engine continuously measure:
releases the accelerator pedal or brakes on
tems, as well as the known functions of the anti-
bends. This compensation functions up to the – Driving speed
lock brake system (ABS) and engine drag torque
maximum lateral acceleration.
control system (MSR). – Direction of travel
– PSM actively stabilises the vehicle in the event
Safety notes! of under and oversteering during dynamic – Lateral acceleration
driving maneuvres (e.g. rapid steering move- – Longitudinal acceleration
In spite of the advantages of PSM, it is still the driv- ments, during lane changes or on alternating
er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and bends). – Rate of turn about the vertical axis
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi-
tions, as well as the traffic situation. – Improved braking stability on bends and on dif- PSM uses these values to determine the direction
ferent or varying road surfaces. of travel desired by the driver.
The increased safety that is provided should not in- PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the ac-
duce you to take greater risks with your safety. tual direction of motion deviates from the desired
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be course (steering-wheel position):
overcome, even with PSM. It brakes individual wheels as needed. If neces-
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed sary, PSM additionally influences the engine power
cannot be reduced by PSM. or the gear-changing characteristic of the Tiptron-
ic in order to stabilise the vehicle.

220 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

The events below inform the driver of PSM control Combined use of PSM and PTM/PTM Plus Off-road PSM
operations and warn him to adapt his driving style (PSM in Low Range program)
In order to ensure optimal stabilisation of the
to the road conditions:
vehicle, the center differential lock (PTM) and When Low Range is active, an off-road PSM
– The information light in the instrument panel possibly the rear differential lock (PTM Plus) are specially matched to off-road driving is activated
lights up. also opened when PSM interventions occur. to enhance traction.
– Hydraulic noises can be heard. Tip on driving At a speed below 22 mph (35 km/h), the terrain
PSM intervenes later if the vehicle should under-
– The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake steer and thereby improves steerability in Low
forces are altered as the PSM controls the
interventions and the traction control system Range.
brakes.
(TCS) are also inactive. If the brakes are highly stressed, the automatic
– Reduced engine power. The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on. brake differential (ABD) switches itself off to
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is protect the brakes. It remains deactivated until the
changed during braking. brake system has cooled sufficiently.
However, it is possible at any time to achieve
full vehicle deceleration by increasing the foot Engine drag torque control
pressure slightly. In conditions of excessive slip, the engine drag
torque control system prevents all driven wheels
Examples of PSM control operations from locking up when the car is overrunning. This
– Vehicle understeers: is also the case for downshifts on a slippery road.
If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, engine power is reduced and the rear
wheel on the inside of the bend is braked if
necessary.
– Vehicle oversteers:
If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 221

 PSM should always be switched on during Collapsible spare wheel
“normal” driving.
f Never switch the PSM off when driving with a
However, it can be of advantage to switch off PSM
collapsible spare wheel.
temporarily in exceptional situations:
– On a loose surface or in deep snow Towing

– When “rocking the vehicle free” f Please observe the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 350.
– When using snow chains.
When the PSM is switched off the slip monitoring Tip on driving
function of the Tiptronic is also deactivated. When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake in-
terventions and the traction control system (TCS)
Information light are also inactive.
– The light indicates a control operation, includ- The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on.
ing when PSM is switched off (brake control in
the event of one-sided wheel spin). Switching on PSM
Warning light f Press button A.
Switching off PSM PSM is switched on after a short delay.
– The warning light in the instrument panel lights
f Press button A. up in combination with the indicator light in the
PSM is switched off after a short delay. button for a lamp check when the ignition is
With PSM switched off, the PSM warning light switched on.
in the instrument panel and the information – Together with the information light in the
light in the button are lit. button, the warning light indicates that PSM is
During braking, the vehicle is stabilised even switched off.
when PSM is switched off. – A fault is indicated by the warning light in the
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented, instrument panel and an indication on the multi-
even with PSM switched off. purpose display of the instrument panel. PSM
is out of order.
Please have the fault remedied at an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

222 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

ABS Function Warning light
(Anti-lock Brake System) The decisive advantage of ABS is in the driving If the ABS warning lights light up in the instrument
stability and maneuvrability of the vehicle in panel and on the multi-purpose display of the in-
Safety notes! hazardous situations, even during heavy braking strument panel while the engine is running, the
In spite of the advantages of ABS, it is still the driv- while cornering. ABS has switched off because of a fault.
er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and In this event, the braking system will operate with-
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi- out lock prevention,as in cars without ABS.
braking, on almost all road surfaces, until shortly
tions, as well as the traffic situation. before the vehicle stops. f Adapt your driving style to the changed brak-
The increased safety that is provided should not in- ing behavior.
The ABS begins to control the braking process as
duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The ABS must be checked immediately at an
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be authorized Porsche dealer in order to prevent
This controlled braking process is comparable to
overcome, even with ABS. the occurrence of further faults the effects of
extremely rapid cadence braking.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed can- which cannot be defined.
The pulsating brake pedal and a “rattling noise”
not be reduced by ABS. warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved
road conditions. tire dimensions.
ABS ensures: The use of tires with non-approved dimensions can
lead to different wheel speeds, causing the ABS to
– Full steering control
switch off.
The vehicle remains steerable
f f f
– Good driving stability
No skidding due to locked wheels
– Optimum braking distance
Shorter stopping distances in most cases
– Lock prevention
No flat spots on the tires

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 223

Off-road ABS Hillholder Safety notes!
(ABS in Low Range program)
In spite of the advantages of the hillholder func-
In selector lever positions D and M, the hillholder
When Low Range is active, an ABS specially tion, it is still the driver’s responsibility to adapt his
function makes it easier to move off from a stand-
matched to off-road driving is activated automati- driving style and maneuvers in line with situational
still on an upward slope when the engine is
cally. conditions.
running. The driver does not have to apply the
The increased safety that is provided should not in-
At speeds below 30 mph (50 km/h), the front brake.
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
wheels can lock up in cycles during braking to
The hillholder thus makes moving off on slopes The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
shorten the braking distance when the vehicle is
easier. overcome, even with the hillholder function.
driven off-road (the wheels dig in to the surface).
Driving at the limits should be avoided, e.g., on icy
If the driver needs to steer, this off-road driving
Warning! slopes or on slippery surfaces. In this and similar
program is automatically switched off briefly to
cases, the support of the hillholder function is not
maintain steerability. Risk of accident.
ensured.
The vehicle can roll backwards if the Hillhold-
er is switched off.
f Always apply the footbrake on slopes.

Hillholder is not active:

– In selector lever positions N and R
– In the reduced driving program and
– If not all of the wheels are touching the ground
(on difficult terrain, for example).
f Please observe the chapter “STOPPING” on
Page 209.

224 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Porsche Drive-Off Assistant – Moving off with Porsche Drive-Off Assistant Note on operation
Moving-off assistant on vehicles with 1. Hold the vehicle securely with footbrake or The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant ceases to
manual transmission parking brake on the slope. function:
The engine must be running.
The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant enables the driver – by shifting to neutral.
to move off on upward slopes. The vehicle must 2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
– when changing gears.
have sufficient road contact to use this feature.
3. Engage one of the gears used to ascend in the
– by stopping or “stalling” the engine.
The Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is available for direction of travel (1st gear or reverse).
slopes starting at approximately 5%.
4. While keeping the clutch pedal depressed, Danger!
f Please observe the chapter “TRAILER release the footbrake or foot-operated parking
brake. Risk of accident.
COUPLING” on Page 194.
The vehicle is held on the slope. If the Porsche Drive-Off Assistant ceases to
function, the vehicle will no longer be held on
Danger! 5. Move off as usual. a slope.
Risk of accident.
f Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
When moving off on a slippery surface (e.g.,
on icy or loose surfaces), assistance by the
Porsche Drive-Off Assistant is no longer
assured. In this case, the vehicle could slip.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot
be overcome, even with the Porsche Drive-
Off Assistant. The responsibility for moving
off on upward slopes is still the driver's,
despite the Porsche Drive-Off Assistant.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
conditions and vehicle load, use the footbrake
if necessary.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 225

Engine Braking Support Warning! Checks on test stands
(Assistance when heading downhill) Risk of accident. Reduced braking ability on
Power measurement
a slippery surface.
The Porsche Down-Hill Assistant is an assistance
Power measurements on roller test stands are not
system which helps the driver at slower downhill f Always adjust your driving style to the driving approved by Porsche.
driving up to approx. 12 mph (20 km/h), e.g., on situation.
steep slopes or on wintry mountain roads. Brake tests
As long as the gas pedal is not used when trav- Tip on driving Brake tests must be carried out only in High Range
eling downhill, the Porsche Down-Hill Assistant is The Porsche Down-Hill Assistant is active when and on plate-type test stands or roller test stands.
active and brakes the vehicle. driving downhill either forwards or backwards. The following limit values must not be exceeded
The braking ability of the Engine Braking Support on roller test stands:
is affected by slippery surfaces (e.g., on icy or
loose surfaces), like all brakes. – Testing speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)

If road grip is lost on one or more wheels, the – Test duration 20 seconds
system brakes the wheels which have good road
Parking brake test
contact.
Parking brake tests on the brake tester must be
Conditions:
performed only with the ignition switched off and
– The gas pedal must not be used when the selector lever in position N.
travelling downhill.
Balancing wheels on the vehicle
– The speed must not exceed 12 mph
(20 km/h). During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire ve-
hicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free to
– The selector lever position D or M must be turn.
engaged.

226 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Off-Road Driving Maintenance note f Always make sure that the wheels touch the
ground.
Please bear in mind that off-road driving subjects
Please read this chapter carefully before driving
all vehicle components to considerably more wear f Before driving through water, check the water
off road with your Porsche.
than normal use, making professional inspection depth, the condition of the surface beneath it
The information provided will familiarise you with and maintenance after each use a vital precondi- and the speed of the water.
the special advantages of your vehicle, allowing tion for functioning and safety.
f Look out for obstacles such as boulders,
you to arrive at your destination safely every time.
Grains of sand, dirt particles and other abrasive holes, tree stumps or ruts.
We recommend practicing on less rugged terrain. materials entering the brakes can cause exces-
f Always keep the sliding/lifting roof or
sive wear or unpredictable braking action.
Vehicles with SportDesign package Panorama roof system and the side windows
closed while driving.
Rules for off-road driving
Warning! f Do not depart from marked routes or paths.
Risk of damage. On vehicles with Sport- f Ensure vehicle is equipped with approved all- f Respect Nature.
Design package, front, rear, and side terrain tires. Always obey off-limits signs.
member trim are painted and pulled down f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
lower. Off-road driving can seriously damage RANCE” on Page 366.
these trim parts.
f Activate Low Range.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged. f Stow or fasten luggage and loads securely.
Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance MATION” on Page 195.
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle. f If unknown terrain is obscured from view, ex-
amine it on foot first and traverse it with ex-
f Avoid driving through water. treme caution.
f Do not use side member trim as a running This way, obstacles are easier to recognise
board. and damage to the vehicle is avoided.
f Always drive with the engine running.
Steering assistance is provided only with the
engine running.
f Drive slowly and uniformly.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 227

Driving systems for off-road driving Before driving off After driving off road
Specially adapted driving programs or power- Tires Off-road driving places a greater burden on the ve-
transmission and running-gear control systems hicle than does normal driving on roads.
f Check tread depth and tire pressure.
are available for off-road driving:
We recommend inspecting the vehicle after off-
f Check for damage and remove any foreign ob-
– Off-road program Low Range road driving. Potential damage poses an accident
jects (e.g. stones) from the tread.
risk and impairs driving comfort. Damage on the
– Off-road PSM
f Replace missing valve caps. car is recognised in good time if the car is
– Off-road ABS checked.
Rims
– Center differential lock
f Replace dented or damaged rims before Warning!
– Rear differential lock driving off road. Car damage poses an accident risk for the
f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS- vehicle occupants and other road users.
MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS-
TEMS” on Page 217. f In cases of doubt, have your vehicle checked
by your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Examine tires for signs of damage such as
cuts, tears, bulges or foreign objects stuck in
the tread. Replace a damaged tire if neces-
sary.
f Have any damage to your vehicle repaired by
an authorized Porsche dealer without delay.

228 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Recommended procedure f After driving for an extended period through
mud, sand, water or substances with a similar
f Deactivate Low Range.
soiling effect, check the brake discs, brake
f Clean headlights and tail lights and check them pads, wheels and axle joints and have them
for signs of damage. cleaned.
f Clean the front and rear lincence plates. f If you experience severe vibrations after
driving off road, check the wheels for foreign
f Clean the tire tread with a jet of water and re-
substances.
move any foreign objects.
These substances can produce an imbalance
f Clean wheels, wheel housings and the under- which might be responsible for the vibrations.
body with a jet of water. Removing these deposits may remedy the
f Check whether the car has picked up plant
problem.
parts or branches.
These materials increase the risk of fire and
can damage fuel lines, brake hoses, boots of
the axle joints and drive shafts.
f After off-road driving, always check the entire
floor assembly, tires, body structure, steering
system, running gear and exhaust system for
signs of damage.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 229

Uphill driving Note on operation Traction on uphill slopes
f Activate Low Range before taking extreme up-
Danger! Note on operation
ward or downward gradients.
Danger of serious personal injury or death f Activate Low Range and engage differential
and risk of damage if the vehicle should Tips on driving locks if necessary.
overturn. f Do not perform manual gear changes when
Tips on driving
f Do not turn around when driving uphill. driving, and try to avoid stopping.
f When driving uphill, go easy on the accelerator
f If it is not possible to climb a gradient, the car f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
and make sure that wheels have sufficient trac-
must be backed down in reverse gear. tion (don't spin).
f Do not drive over embankments or slopes at f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
an angle to the line of maximum gradient.
f Drive slowly.
f If the vehicle starts to tilt, immediately steer in
the direction of the tilt (line of slope).
f When driving uphill, never let the vehicle roll
backward when in idle or not in gear.
Exclusive use of the footbrake is too risky in
such situations.

230 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Driving downhill Note on operation
f Activate Low Range. The off-road ABS is
Danger! switched on automatically.
There is a danger of serious personal injury
or death and risk of damage if the vehicle Tips on driving
should overturn. The same general principle as for uphill driving ap-
f Do not drive over slopes at an angle to the line plies to downhill driving.
of maximum gradient. f Do not perform manual gear changes when
f Drive downhill slowly, with the wheels pointing driving, and try to avoid stopping.
straight ahead. f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f If the vehicle starts to tilt, immediately steer in A special circuit of the off-road ABS permits con-
the direction of the tilt (line of slope). trolled brief lock-up of the front wheels so that they
f When driving downhill, never let the vehicle roll can dig into the loose surface more effectively.
when in idle. Locked wheels slip and can no longer be steered.

f Use engine braking effect. f When driving down steep hills on unpaved sur-
If the engine braking effect is not adequate, faces, brake carefully and do not start to slide.
gently apply the foot brake.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 231

 Danger! Soiling can impair the braking action.
Danger of drowning if water enters the vehi- f Check and clean the brakes if they have been
cle. Risk of damage to the engine and acces- soiled.
sories if water penetrates.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
f Before driving through water, check the water a long journey in the water if the drive belt
depth A, water speed and the condition of the slips.
surface beneath it.
f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
The water must not be deeper than 20 in./
be required to steer.
50 cm (22 in./55.5 cm for vehicles with level
control and height adjustment). Danger of damaging electrical systems
f Check the door sills and rubber seals before f Avoid driving through salt water.
starting to drive.
f Do not drive through deep or rapidly flowing Notes on operation
water. f Activate Low Range.
Deep or rapidly flowing water, e.g. mountain
streams, can cause the car to deviate from the f Switch the air conditioner off.
Water crossing desired path. f Switch the headlights off.
f Avoid a "bow wave" by driving at an appropriate
f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA- speed.
RANCE” on Page 366.
f Never open the doors when driving through wa-
ter.

232 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Tips on driving Maintenance note Humps
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm). The car requires a special check after the water
f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
crossing.
f Do not perform manual gear changes when RANCE” on Page 366.
driving, and try to avoid stopping. f Remove mud from the tire tread.
Moving off in the water can be difficult due to Note on operation
f Briefly brake the brakes dry after driving
the high resistance and the loose surface in-
through the water. f Activate Low Range and engage differential
volved. locks if necessary.
f Start the water crossing at a shallow place at
walking speed. Tips on driving

f After checking the body of water, take the f Just before reaching the hump, ease off the ac-
shortest path through it. celerator slightly and use the car's momentum
to cross the hump. This will prevent the car
f Never drive into the water at high speed. The from jumping over the hump and landing on the
resulting “bow wave” could damage the engine following downward slope at an excessive
and its accessories. speed.
f Adjust your driving style to the unfamiliar sur- f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
roundings.
f Cross the body of water slowly and at a con-
stant speed.
f Never turn around when crossing a body of wa-
ter.
f If it is not possible to cross the body of water,
the car must be backed out of it in reverse
gear.
The servo pump and alternator can fail if the car is
driven through water for an extended period.
f If the servo pump fails, substantially more
force will have to be exerted in order to steer.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 233

Crossing obstacles Driving on sand
Caution! Note on operation

Risk of damage to the underbody and chas- f Activate Low Range and engage differential
sis components if obstacles are traversed locks if necessary.
improperly.
Tips on driving
f Always bear in mind the ground clearance of
Loose sand is an especially tricky surface for off-
your vehicle.
road driving.
f Slowly drive over the middle of tree trunks,
You can often become stuck in sand within
boulders or other obstacles with one of the
minutes if you do not drive correctly in such
front wheels.
situations.
f Cross the obstacle with the rear wheel in the
f Drive at brisk pace and do not stop under any
same way.
circumstances. This will reduce the chance of
the car becoming bogged down.
Note on operation
f Follow existing tracks – provided that they
f Activate Low Range. Tips on driving have not been covered by blown sand, are not
f Have your passenger direct you if necessary. too deep and the car's ground clearance is
sufficient.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm). Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
f Drive slowly. RANCE” on Page 366.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).

234 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

When driving on slopes with soft sand on vehicles Track ruts
with Tiptronic S:
Other vehicles leave ruts in many off-road courses
f Use the manual select mode M in addition to
or gravel roads.
the Low Range program.
f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
If your vehicle becomes stuck nevertheless:
RANCE” on Page 366.
Do not spin the wheels. Instead, use branches,
mats or similar items to provide adequate traction Caution!
so that you can drive out of the critical area.
Risk of damage to the vehicle floor when
driving through ruts that are too deep.
f Always bear in mind the car's ground clear-
ance.
f Do not drive over ruts that are too deep.

Note on operation
f Activate Low Range and engage differential
locks if necessary.

Tips on driving
f In cases of doubt, drive with one wheel on the
strip of grass.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 235

 Note on operation Special terrain level
Frequent level changes can cause the compressor
This setting is intended only for extremely chal-
to overheat. In this case, the compressor must
lenging terrain requiring maximum ground clear-
cool for several minutes before the level adjust-
ance. The vehicle is raised by 2.2 in. (56 mm)
ment is fully functional again.
compared to normal level.

Normal level Special terrain level can be selected only at

speeds below around 19 mph (30 km/h).
The ground clearance at normal level is around The car is automatically lowered to terrain level at
8.5 in. (217 mm). speeds exeeding around 9 mph (30 km/h).

Terrain level Low level

This setting is intended for off-road driving, field This level is intended for high-speed driving. Above
paths and forest paths, etc. speeds of around 78 mph (125 km/h), the car is
The vehicle is raised by around 1 in. (26 mm) com- lowered by around 1 in. (27 mm) compared to nor-
pared to normal level. mal level.
Air Suspension with Level Control Terrain level can be selected only manually at When the speed drops to below around 25 mph
speeds below around 50 mph (80 km/h).
and Height Adjustment The car is automatically lowered to normal level at
(40 km/h), the car is automatically raised to nor-
mal level.
On vehicles with air suspension, the driver can set speeds exeeding around 50 mph (80 km/h).
five different level steps manually. The car is automatically raised to terrain level
when Low Range is activated. Special low level
The preselected level is automatically adjusted to
suit the vehicle speed. At extremely high speeds, for example when oper-
The height of the car is automatically kept ated on a race track, the car is lowered 0.4 in.
constant when the car is loaded. (11 mm) compared to the low level.

Tip on driving
It is not permissible to drive on public roads with
the car in the terrain or special terrain setting.

236 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Loading level Setting level manually Raising the vehicle

Caution! Preconditions 1st actuation: Terrain level

Risk of damage to running-gear parts, units – Ignition on.

and the vehicle underbody. – Doors are closed.
If the car is driven off a curb when at loading level,
for example, insufficent ground clearance can Setting
cause it to bottom out. f Move rocker switch in the appropriate direc-
tion.
f Always switch to normal level before moving
This sets the next possible height.
off.
Indication of selected level
This setting makes it easier for you to load the lug-
gage compartment. The corresponding light-emitting diode beside the 2nd actuation: Special terrain level
The vehicle is lowered by around 2.4 in. (60 mm) rocker switch flashes during the control process.
compared to normal level. The light-emitting diode is continuously lit after the
The car is automatically raised to normal level at control process.
speeds exceeding around 3 mph (5 km/h). The level change is also indicated on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel.

Exceptions
Automatic changes from normal level to low level
and back are not indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.

Note on operation f f f

The level selected last is stored in memory after

the ignition is switched off.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 237

Lowering the vehicle f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS Raising vehicle with the jack
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108.
1st actuation: Low level Whenever it is necessary to jack up the vehicle:
f Adapt your driving style to the changed condi-
tions. f Manually set normal level and then switch off
level control.
f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer in order
to remedy a system fault. Switching off level control
f If the overload-protection function causes the 1. Switch ignition on.
compressor to switch off, wait for a time until
it has cooled down. The system will function 2. Push rocker switch forward for 5 to
again as soon as it has cooled sufficiently. 10 seconds.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose
The warning message appears when the control display of the instrument panel.
system is switched off and when the collapsible The vehicle can now be raised.
2nd actuation: Loading level spare wheel is being filled. This does not indicate
a fault. Switching level control back on
The warning message will go out once these pro-
1. Switch ignition on.
cedures have been completed.
2. Push rocker switch forward for 5 to
10 seconds or
3. Drive forward with the vehicle.
Level control switches on automatically.

Transporting the vehicles on car trains,

ferries and car transporters
Warning message
f Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels.
Various messages are indicated on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if there is a
system fault or if the compressor switches off due
to overload.

238 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems

Porsche Active Suspension Indication of the selected running-gear
Management (PASM) setup

Various messages are shown on the multi-purpose The light-emitting diode in the button of the select-
display of the instrument panel. ed running-gear setup is lit.
In addition, the selected running-gear setup is indi-
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS cated on the multi-purpose display of the instru-
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108. ment panel for around 12 seconds.
Three different running-gear setups can be select-
ed with the push of a button: Warning lights and warning
messages
– Comfort
The warning light in the instrument panel comes
– Normal on if there is a system fault. A warning message is
– Sport shown on the multi-purpose display of the instru-
ment panel.
If the running-gear setups “comfort” or “normal”
have been selected, the system automatically f Adapt your driving style to the changed condi-
changes the setup to “sport” when the car is driv- tions.
Selecting the running-gear setup
en in a sporty manner. f To remedy the fault, consult an authorized
Porsche dealer. 1. Switch ignition on.
2. Press the appropriate button.

Note on operation
The running-gear setup selected last is stored in
memory after the ignition is switched off.

Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 239

240 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
 Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle .......................................... 242
Engine Oil Level ......................................... 244
Engine Oil Recommendation........................ 247
Coolant Level............................................. 249
Brake-Fluid Level ........................................ 251
Washer Fluid .............................................. 252
Power Steering .......................................... 253
Air Cleaner ................................................ 254
Particle Filter ............................................. 254
Automatic Transmission Fluid ...................... 254
Manual Transmission Oil ............................. 254
Wiper Blades ............................................. 255
Fuel Economy ............................................ 258
Operating Your Porsche
in other Countries....................................... 258
Fuel........................................................... 259
Fuel Recommendations............................... 261
Portable Fuel Containers............................. 262
Fuel Evaporation Control............................. 262
Emission Control System ............................ 263
Car Care Instructions.................................. 265

Maintenance, Car Care 241

Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew- problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Working on your Vehicle elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get about any servicing, have it done by your au-
caught in the fan, belts or other moving parts. thorized Porsche dealer.
Danger! The radiator and radiator fans are in the front Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
Ignoring the following instructions may of the car. riod may affect your Porsche warranty cove-
cause serious personal injury or death. The fans can start or continue running as a rage.
function of temperature, even with the engine
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, washer fluid,
switched off.
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not brake fluid or coolant, are hazardous to your
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do health.
gine off and exercise extreme caution.
not attempt the adjustments described on the Keep these fluids out of children's reach and
following pages. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig- dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt- priate regulations.
age is present in all wires connected with the
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well f Some countries require additional tools and
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
ventilated area. special spare parts to be carried.
caution when working on any part of the engine
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the while the ignition is on or the engine is running.
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel f Always support your car with safety stands if it
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- is necessary to work under the car. The jack Power measurements
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- supplied with the car is not adequate for this
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. purpose. Power measurements on dynamometers are not
approved by Porsche.
f Before working on any part in the engine com- f When working under the car without safety
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool stands but with the wheels on the ground,
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment make sure the car is on level ground, the
components can burn skin on contact. wheels are blocked, and that the engine can-
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all not be started.
times while the engine is running. Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in ve-
If you have to work on the engine while it is run- hicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
ning, always put the handbrake on and put the f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
gearshift lever in neutral or the selector lever the battery or fuel.
in position P. Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.

242 Maintenance, Car Care

Radiator fans Engine Oil If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed, cli-
matic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of Engine oil consumption the oil should be checked more frequently, as driv-
the car. ing conditions will determine the rate of oil con-
It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
sumption.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
Warning!
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine – The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to lu-
Danger of injury. The fans can start running is operated, the climate, road conditions as well bricate and cool all of its moving parts. There-
as a function of temperature, even with the as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the lubri- fore, the engine oil should be checked regular-
engine switched off. cant. ly and kept at the required level.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and – Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
area of the radiator fans. consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil checked with every fuel filling.
measurement may not show any drop in the oil lev-
– The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
el at all, even after 600 miles (1000 km) or more.
indicator.
This is because the oil is gradually becoming dilut-
The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
ed with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the
engine damage may be occuring when lit, if en-
oil level has not changed.
gine rpm is above idle speed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an express-
way, making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.

Maintenance, Car Care 243

Engine Oil Level Oil-level warning
Conditions for measuring the oil level
correctly
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
If the oil level is too low, this is indicated by the oil- – Vehicle must be level.
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
level warning light lighting up on the multi-purpose
VEHICLE” on Page 242. – Engine must be switched off and at operating
display.
temperature.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
f Check the oil level using the oil dipstick as
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 108. – Before the oil-level measurement, allow the en-
soon as possible and add engine oil if neces-
gine oil to flow back into the oil pan for around
f Check the oil level regularly. It is best to do this sary.
3 minutes.
when refuelling and before extended journeys.
Note on operation
Checking oil level with the oil dipstick
Warning! f If the engine compartment lid is opened and oil
1. Withdraw oil dipstick and wipe it with a clean,
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and is not added, the warning message appears
lint-free cloth.
may be fatal if swallowed. again after approximately 100 km.
2. Push oil dipstick fully home, withdraw again
f Keep engine oil out of children's reach. and read off the oil level.
Checking the oil level
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have The oil level must never fall below or ex-
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Warning! ceed the “Min.” and “Max.” marks on the
dipstick.
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough- Danger of injury. The radiator fans can start The difference between the marks is approx.
ly with soap and water. running as a function of temperature, even 1.6 qt. (1.5 liters).
with the engine switched off.
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine com- 3. Push oil dipstick in as far as the stop.
partment.
f Exercise extreme caution when working on the
engine compartment.

244 Maintenance, Car Care

Cayenne S oil dipstick Cayenne oil dipstick
MAX - marking MAX - marking
f Do not top up engine oil. f Do not top up engine oil.
MIN - marking A - Normal marking

Top up engine oil immediately. f Engine oil can be topped up.

MIN - marking
Top up engine oil immediately.

Maintenance, Car Care 245

Cayenne S Cayenne

Topping off engine oil 1. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening
2. Add engine oil carefully.
Caution!
3. Measure oil level again after a few minutes.
Fire hazard if engine oil comes into contact Never exceed the MAX mark on the oil
with hot engine parts. dipstick.
Risk of damage if engine oil comes into con-
tact with the drive belt. 4. Push oil dipstick in as far as the stop.

f Exercise great care when adding engine oil. 5. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.

246 Maintenance, Car Care

Engine Oil Recommendation
Recommended oil viscosity ranges dependent on ambient temperatures:

Ambient temperature SAE Viscosity Range

(seasonal)

higher than 0 W-40

-13°F (-25°C) 5 W-40
5 W-50

lower than 0 W-40

-13°F (-25°C)

Use only engine oils approved by Porsche.

If in doubt ask your authorized Porsche dealer for Porsche tested and approved all-season oils.

Maintenance, Car Care 247

Oil change If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go Viscosity
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
The engine oil has to be changed at the intervals be properly warmed up. Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
listed in your Maintenance Schedule. Condensation from products of combustion may and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
accumulate in the oil. In this case, it is advisable is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
f Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
to change the oil more frequently so that your en- the SAE class is given as a number and the letter
Page 362.
gine once again has 100% efficient engine oil. “W“ (as in winter), for hot viscosity the SAE class
We recommend that you have the engine oil is given only as a number.
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re- Engine oil performance class The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
quired oils and the necessary filling equipment.
same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves
to keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt E.g.: A 5 W-40 oil and a 5 W-50 oil have the same
dealer check it out immediately.
which penetrates into the engine through combus- viscosity when cold; when hot the oil with the num-
All current engine oils are compatible with each tion and to protect the engine against corrosion. ber 40 is thinner than the oil with the number 50.
other, i.e. when making an oil change it is not nec- To perform these functions, the oil is provided with Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
essary to flush the engine if you wish to use a dif- additives which have been specially developed for oils with only one viscosity are termed single-
ferent brand or grade of oil. these functions. grade oils.
Since, however, each brand of oil has a special The efficiency of an oil is expressed, for example,
composition, you should, if possible, use the by the API, ILSAC or ACEA classifications. The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche
same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up has to be chosen according to the ambient tem-
between oil changes. perature given in the engine oil recommendation
table.
Porsche engines have long intervals between oil
changes. Only by using oils approved by Porsche
the needed engine oil performance is guaranteed.

248 Maintenance, Car Care

Coolant Level
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
VEHICLE” on Page 242.
The coolant provides year-round protection from
corrosion and freezing down to -31°F (-35°C)
(Nordic countries -40°F (-40°C)).
f Use only anti-freeze authorized by Porsche.
f Check the coolant level regularly.

Checking coolant level/adding coolant

The expansion tank for the coolant is located un-
der the engine-compartment cover in the engine
compartment.
When the engine is cold and the car is level, the Checking when engine is cold 2. Open cap of the expansion tank carefully and
coolant level must lie between the minimum and allow any overpressure to escape.
1. Remove cover.
maximum marks. Then unscrew cap completely.
3. Read the coolant level.
4. Top up with coolant if necessary.
Do not exceed the max. mark.
Only add a mixture of anti-freeze and water in
equal parts.
Antifreeze in coolant:
50% provides anti-freeze protection down to
-31°F (-35°C).
5. Screw the cap closed firmly and put on the
cover.
f f f

Maintenance, Car Care 249

Checking the coolant level when a warning 1. Remove cover. Maintenance note
messages is shown on the multi-purpose
2. If the engine is hot, cover the the expansion If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
display of the instrument panel
tank cap with a cloth. mixture ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Open cap carefully and allow any overpressure Porsche dealer.
Warning! to escape.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
Danger of serious personal injury from scald- Then unscrew cap completely.
cooling system.
ing. Coolant is hazardous to your health, and 3. Read the coolant level. The cause should be remedied at an authoized
may be fatal if swallowed. Top up with coolant if necessary. Porsche dealer immediately.
f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank Only add a mixture of anti-freeze and water in
while the engine is hot. equal parts.
Antifreeze in coolant:
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening 50% provides anti-freeze protection down to
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face -31°F (-35°C).
from any possible escape of hot coolant. Do not exceed the max. mark.
f Keep coolant out of children's reach.
Note on operation
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.They
can be attracted to it should there be a spill, or f If the coolant level exceeds the max. mark
to used coolant left in an open container. Cool- when the engine is hot, check the coolant level
ant can be deadly to pets if consumed. again when the engine is cold.
4. Screw the cap closed firmly and put on the
cover.
5. Have the cooling system checked by an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

250 Maintenance, Car Care

Brake-Fluid Level
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
VEHICLE” on Page 242.
f Use only new (unused) Original Porsche brake
fluid.

Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of children's reach.
f Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with
clean water.
f If brake fluid gets into your eye, immediately 2. Check brake-fluid level at the transparent
Checking the brake-fluid level
rinse with clean water for a few minutes. Then reservoir.
see a doctor immediately. The reservoir for the hydraulic braking system is The fluid level should always lie between the
f Please note all the information on the refill located in the engine compartment. MIN and MAX marks.
container of the brake fluid. 1. Rotate the turn-locks 90°anti-clockwise A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
(arrow) with a screwdriver and remove the automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
cover. normal.
If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the MIN mark, the braking system may have devel-
oped a leak.
f Please have the braking system checked im-
mediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 251

Changing the brake fluid Topping off washer fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over The capacity is approx. 7.9 quarts (7.5 liters).
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boil-
Clean water is generally not enough to clean the
ing point and, under certain operating conditions,
windows and headlights.
can affect the braking action.
It is advantageous to add a winter cleaner giving
f Therefore, have the brake fluid changed in ac- antifreeze protection or a suitable summer clean-
cordance with the change intervals stated in er, depending on the season. Follow the instruc-
the booklet “Guarantee and Maintenance”. tions for the mixture ratio.
f Use only cleaner authorised by Porsche.
Brake fluid warning light
USA 1. Please note all the information on the refill
container of the cleaning agent.
Brake fluid warning light
Canada 2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir.

The warning light in the instrument panel and the 3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
warning message on the multi-purpose display of f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
the instrument panel indicate
Washer Fluid other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
– indicate the brake level fluid is too low or, in the washer reservoir.
The washer-fluid reservoir for windshield, rear win-
– in conjunction with large pedal travel could in- dow and headlights is located in the engine com-
dicate a braking-circuit failure. partment.

Note on operation
Warning message on the multi-purpose
If the warning lights should light up while driving: display
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose display
f Do not continue driving. of the instrument panel if the washer-fluid level is
Please have the fault remedied at your nearest too low.
authorized Porsche dealer. In this case, the residual quantity is only around
0.85 quarts (0.8 liter).
f Add washer fluid at the next opportunity.

252 Maintenance, Car Care

 Checking hydraulic fluid
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
VEHICLE” on Page 242.
f Use only hydraulic fluid authorized by
Porsche.
f Check the fluid level with the engine stopped
and cold (engine temperature approx. 68° F or
20°C).
1. Remove cover A.
2. Open the reservoir cap.
3. The fluid level should lie between the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick.
Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
Power Steering The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design- 4. Close cap carefully.
related and does not indicate a defect in the steer-
ing system. 5. Put on cover A.
Warning!
6. Close engine compartment lid.
Risk of accident. When the engine is station-
ary (e.g. when on tow) or the hydraulic sys- f If the fluid level drops significantly, please have
tem fails, there is no assistance for steering. the cause remedied immediately by an autho-
Therefore, substantially more force will have rized Porsche dealer.
to be exerted.
f Exercise great care when on tow.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 253

Air Cleaner Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Oil
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE The torque converter and the transmission are lu- The transmission oil has to be checked and
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR bricated with Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). changed at the intervals listed in your Maintenance
VEHICLE” on Page 242. Schedule.
f Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Regular replacement of the filter element is part of Page 362. f Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
servicing. Page 362.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without ATF
f In dusty conditions, clean the filter element in the transmission. The automatic transmission We recommend that you have the transmission oil
more frequently and replace if necessary. may be damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
a clean funnel or spout must be used when adding quired lubricants and the necessary filling equip-
Particle Filter ATF. ment.
The fresh air passing through the particle filter into The ATF and transmission oil has to be checked If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission, have
the passenger compartment is virtually free of and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte- your authorized Porsche dealer check it out imme-
dust and pollen. nance Schedule. diately.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes, We recommend that you have the ATF and trans-
press the circulating-air button. mission oil changed at your Porsche dealer, who
has the required lubricants and the necessary fill-
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air
ing equipment.
throughput.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission, have
f Have filter replaced by your authorized
your authorized Porsche dealer check it out imme-
Porsche dealer.
diately.
Regular replacement of the filter is part of servic-
ing.

254 Maintenance, Car Care

Wiper Blades Replacing windshield wiper blades
f When wiper performance deteriorates, replace Caution!
the wiper blades in good time.
Risk of damage.
f Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE IN- If the wiper blades are not changed properly,
STRUCTIONS” on Page 265. they can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check whether the wiper blades are seated se-
Caution!
curely.
Risk of damage if wiper arm accidentally The wiper blade must be pushed onto the wip-
falls back onto the windshield. er arm up to the stop.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re-
placing the wiper blade.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are
frozen in place are loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
1. Apply the parking brake.
Maintenance note 2. Switch the windshield wipers off (position 0).
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a 3. Switch ignition off.
result of the following:
4. Fold windshield wiper arm away from the wind-
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car shield.
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
These residues can only be removed using a 5. Lift up wiper blade completely (arrow).
special cleaning solution. f f f
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
f Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
possible.

Maintenance, Car Care 255

 Note on operation
f Make sure that the wiper blade is pushed onto
the wiper arm up to the stop.
9.Fit cap A again.
10.Fold wiper blade back to its original position.
11.Carefully fold wiper arm back on to the wind-
shield.

6.Unclip cap A. 7.Pull off wiper blade toward the windscreen (ar-
row).
8.Fold wiper blade back to its original position.

256 Maintenance, Car Care

 1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch ignition off.
3. Carefully fold the wiper arm away from the rear
window until it reaches its locking position
(approx. 60°).
4. Carefully unclip the wiper blade from the wiper
arm (arrow). Hold the wiper arm with your
other hand when doing this.
5. Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm
and snap it into place.
6. Carefully fold wiper arm back on to the rear
window.

Changing rear window wiper blade

Caution!
Risk of damage if the rear wiper is frozen in
place and is loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blade before loosening them.
f Grasp the wiper arm with both hands and
separate it from the window.

Maintenance, Car Care 257

Fuel Economy f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer Operating Your Porsche in other
periods.
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
Countries
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle re-
when and how you drive, optional equipment Government regulations in the United States and
duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
installed, and the general condition of your Canada require that automobiles meet specific
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
car. emission regulations and safety standards. There-
A car tuned to specifications and correctly f Organize your trips to take in several errands fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal in one trip. vehicles sold in other countries.
fuel economy.
f All electrical accessories contribute to in- If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. Air creased fuel consumption. nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper en-
f Only switch on the air conditioning when neces- is the possibility that
gine “breathing“.
sary. – unleaded fuel may not be available;
Battery should be fully charged.
Wheels should be properly aligned. f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System – unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure. mounted unless you need it. octane rating. Excessive engine knock and se-
f Always monitor your fuel consumption. The EPA estimated m.p.g. is to be used for rious damage to both engine and catalytic con-
comparison purposes, actual mileage may verters could result;
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
be different from the estimated m.p.g., de- – service may be inadequate due to lack of prop-
as much as possible.
pending on your driving speed, weather con- er service facilities, tools or diagnostic equip-
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. ditions and trip length. Your actual highway ment;
mileage will probably be less than the esti-
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower – replacement parts may not be available or very
mated m.p.g.
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without difficult to get.
lugging the engine will help save fuel. f Please observe all local and national speed lim-
its. Porsche cannot be responsible for the me-
f Prolonged “warm up“ idling wastes gas. Start chanical damage that could result because
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive. of inadequate fuel, service or parts availabil-
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. ity.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
ping and forwarding requirements, as well as cur-
rent import and customs regulations.

258 Maintenance, Car Care

Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapours.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
Filler flap Fuel quality label
f Please observe the chapter “HOW EMISSION
CONTROL WORKS” on Page 264. The filler flap is located in the rear right wing and Opening
is electrically opened with pull-button A in the driv-
f Please observe the chapter “LEVEL GAUGE” f Operate pull-button A in the driver's door.
er's door.
on Page 76. The filler flap pops open.
The pull-button is also ready for operation when
To avoid permanent damage to the functionality of the ignition is switched off. Closing
the catalytic converters and oxygen sensors, use
only unleaded fuel. f Close the filler flap until it clicks shut.

The engine is designed to provide optimum f f f

performance and fuel consumption if unleaded
premium fuel with 98 RON/88 MON is used.
If unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of
at least 95 RON/85 MON are used, the en-
gine's knock control automatically adapts the igni-
tion timing.

Maintenance, Car Care 259

 Total capacity approx. 26.4 gallons
(100 liters), including approx. 3 gallons
(12 liters) reserve
1. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
2. Slowly unscw the tank cap.
Hang the tank cap on plastic strap A of the fill-
er flap.
3. Insert pump nozzle fully into the filler neck with
the handle of the pump nozzle facing down.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly op-
erated automatic pump nozzle has switched
off.
Fuel could spray or could run over when heat-
ed.
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after refuel-
ling and turn it until you hear it and feel it en-
Emergency unlocking Refuelling gage.
If the electrical release is faulty:
Danger! Maintenance note
1. Open rear lid.
The RF energy from a cellphone can cause a If you lose the tank filler cap, you must replace it
2. Remove lid of the right storage compartment. sparking on bare metal, much like aluminium only with an original part.
foil in a microwave oven. The spark could ig-
3. Pull emergency release A in the direction of
nite gasoline fumes present while refuling.
the arrow.
Static discharge from your body can ignite
The filler flap pops open.
gasoline fumes present when you get back
out of the vehicle and touch the fuel nozzle.
In either case, resulting fire can cause seri-
ous damage to the vehicle, serious injury or
death to persons in immediate vicinity.
f Do not use a cellphone while pumping gas.
f Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping gas.

260 Maintenance, Car Care

Fuel Recommendations Octane ratings Fuels containing alcohol and ether
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic convert- Octane rating indicates a fuel's ability to resist det- Some areas of the U.S. require oxygenated fuels
ers and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY. onation. Therefore, buying the correct octane gas during certain portions of the year. Oxygenated fu-
is important to prevent engine “damage“. els are fuels which contain alcohols (such as meth-
Your engine is designed to provide optimum per-
anol or ethanol) or ether (such as MTBE).
formance and fuel economy using unleaded premi- The RON octane rating is based on the research
um fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council oc- Under normal conditions, the amount of these
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recom- tane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane rating compounds in the fuel will not affect driveability.
mends the use of these fuels in your vehicle. usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is calculated
You may use oxygenated fuels in your Porsche,
as research octane number plus motor octane
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not provided the octane requirements for your vehicle
number, divided by 2, that is written as:
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle are met. We recommend, however, to change to a
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels different fuel or station if any of the following prob-
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON RON + MON R+M lems occur with your vehicle:
---------------------------------- or ---------------
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine's “Electronic 2 2 – Deterioration of driveability and performance.
Oktane™ knock control“ will adapt the ignition tim-
ing, if necessary. The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
the RON rating:
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically – Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
important to the life of the catalytic convert- For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI at high altitude or at high temperature.
ers. Deposits from leaded fuels will ruin the
– Engine malfunction or stalling.
converters and make it ineffective as an
emission control device.
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we rec-
ommend you do not take your car to areas or
countries where unleaded fuel may not be avail-
able.

Maintenance, Car Care 261

Fuels containing MMT Portable Fuel Containers Fuel Evaporation Control
Some North American fuels contain an octane en-
Danger! Fuel tank venting
hancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Portable fuel containers, full or partially
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or re-
If such fuels are used, your emission control sys- prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
sult in fire in case of an accident.
tem performance may be negatively affected. extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain- abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
The check engine warning light on your instrument
ers in your vehicle. at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
panel may turn on.
If this occurs, Porsche recommends you stop us-
ing fuels containing MMT. Vapor control system and storage
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.

Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be di-
rected to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.

262 Maintenance, Car Care

Emission Control System To assure efficient operation of the Emission Parking
Control System:

In the interest of clean air f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in Warning!
accordance with the recommendations de- Danger of fire.
Pollution of our environment has become a prob- scribed in your Maintenance Booklet. Lack of
lem that is of increasing concern to all of us. We proper maintenance, as well as improper use f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in of the vehicle, will impair the function of the where the hot exhaust system may come in
controlling the pollutants emitted from the auto- emission control system and could lead to contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
mobile. damage. er flammable material.

Porsche has developed an emission control sys- f Do not alter or remove any component of the f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
tem that controls or reduces those parts of the emission control system. the fire department. Do not endanger your life
emission that can be harmful to our environment. by attempting to put out the fire.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in etc., which are designed to protect your vehi- Undercoating
your new car under the terms and conditions set cle's emission control system. In addition to
forth in the Warranty Booklet. serious engine damage, this can result in a fire Danger!
if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust system.
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the respon- Danger of fire and serious personal injuries
sibility to provide regular maintenance service for f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you or death.
the vehicle and to keep a record of all mainte- detect engine misfire or other unusual operat-
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
nance work performed. To facilitate record keep- ing conditions.
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
ing, have the service performed by authorized
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained tech-
shields. During driving the substance used for
nicians and special tools to provide fast and effi-
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
cient service.

Maintenance, Car Care 263

How Emission Control Works Oxygen sensor The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
– push or tow starting the vehicle
When an automobile engine is running, it uses en- The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
ergy generated through the combustion of a mix- continuously senses the oxygen content of the ex- – misfiring of the engine
ture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is haust and signals the information to an electronic
– turning off the ignition while the vehicle is mov-
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold control unit. The control unit corrects the air/fuel
ing or
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not ratio, so the engine always receives an accurately
be burned completely, but may be discharged into metered air/fuel mixture. – driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additon-
– by other unusual operating conditions.
al hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere Crankcase ventilation
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank. f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis- these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
air, contribute to undesirable pollution. sions from the engine crankcase are not permit- the catalytic converters. This could result in
ted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emis- overheating of the converters. Federal law pro-
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
sions are recirculated from the crankcase to the hibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion pro- air intake system. From here the emissions mix
cess and discharged into the exhaust system. with the intake air and are later burned in the en-
gine.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
Catalytic converters
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions. The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up“
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehi-
cle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.
The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critical-
ly important for the life of the catalytic con-
verters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.

264 Maintenance, Car Care

Car Care Instructions Warning! Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect bra-
king efficiency.
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
the vehicle or property. f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
VEHICLE” on Page 242. f f f
health.
Regular and correct care helps to maintain Most chemical cleaners are concentrates
the value of your car and is also a which require dilution. High concentrations
precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty might cause problems ranging from irritation
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty. to serious injury as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from chil-
developed car-care products from the dren.
Porsche program available either singly or
as complete car-care sets. They will be f Observe all caution labels.
pleased to help you select suitable products. f Always read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may con-
Whether you use Porsche products or other
tain information necessary to avoid personal
commercially available cleaning agents first
injury.
make sure of their correct application.
f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
owner is willing to give the car.
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis, fend-
ers, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
on sharp-edged metal parts.

Maintenance, Car Care 265

High-pressure cleaning units f Never use high-pressure cleaning units with a f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
round-jet nozzle. the bodywork is still hot.
A high-pressure cleaning unit with round nozzle
Warning! f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a
will damage your vehicle. The tires are particu-
High-pressure cleaning units can damage soft sponge or wash brush and Porsche car
larly susceptible to damage.
the following components: shampoo.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
– Tires f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with wa-
the aforementioned components.
ter to rinse away loose dirt.
– Logos, emblems
f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of wa-
– Painted surfaces Washing ter and then dry with a chamois leather.
– Widened fenders Do not use the same chamois leather for
The best protection for the car from the damaging drying as you use for cleaning the windshield
– Lock and latch of the removable towing attach- effects of the environment is frequent washing and and windows.
ment preservation. The underside of the car should also
be thoroughly washed for cinders, salt or sanding
– Alternator, valve covers Warning!
at winter‘s end.
– ParkAssist sensors Moisture which gets on to the brakes during
The longer salt, road dust, industrial dust, insect
a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
f Please observe the operating instructions from remains, bird excrement, and tree exudations (res-
make the brake pull unevenly which could in-
the unit manufacturer. in, pollen), etc. are allowed to remain on the body-
crease the danger of an accident, causing
f Always cover the lid over the brake fluid reser-
work, the more serious is their harmful effect.
serious personal injuries or death.
voir prior to cleaning. Never point the cleaning New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
f Always apply the brakes a few times after
jet directly at the lid. of clear water to protect the new paint work.
washing the car to test braking efficiency and
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like,
Dark paint finishes show up the smallest of sur-
dry the brake discs.
face damage (e.g. scratches) more readily than
maintain a minimum distance of 21 in. When doing this, take care not to hamper other
lighter colors.
(50 cm). road users behind you (traffic conditions per-
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch- mitting).
ing because of the composition of their pigments
and require particularly careful paint care.

266 Maintenance, Car Care

Automatic car washes Door lock
Optional add-on parts or parts which project be-
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
yond the contours of the vehicle may be damaged
the cold season, cover the lock barrel with a
by design features (e.g. brushes) of automatic car
suitable adhesive tape during washing.
washes.
f Should the locks freeze, use an ordinary de-ic-
The following parts are particularly er.
susceptible to damage: In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
– Windshield wipers (always switch them off to Never use excessive force.
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
tent or sensor operation).
– Door mirrors (always fold in).
– Roof Transport System (always remove com-
pletely).
– Spoiler.
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
height, the greater the risk of damage).
f Please consult the operator before using
automatic car washes.
f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
door sills.

Note
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.

Maintenance, Car Care 267

Paint Preservation Removing spots and stains
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
f Never rub a dusty car with a dry cloth since
weathering. It is therefore necessary to preserve insects etc. as soon as possible with Insect Re-
dust particles are abrasive and could dull and
the paint regularly. mover. They can cause discoloration if allowed
damage the surface finish.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is pre- to remain on the paintwork.
The paintwork of your car is exposed to all types vented from adhering to the paint surface and in-
f Wash the affected area immediately after treat-
of mechanical and chemical conditions, particular- dustrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
ing it.
ly climatic ones such as bright sunlight, rain, frost paint.
and snow. Ultraviolet light, rapid changes in tem- Minor paint damage
Provided it is washed and treated with preserva-
perature, rain, snow, industrial dust and chemical
deposits constantly attack the paint which is only
tive regularly, the brand new finish of your car will f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
be retained for years to come. scores or chips caused by flying stones, re-
able to withstand such exposure in the long term
if it is given regular care and attention. f Simply apply paint preservative after washing paired immediately by your authorized
the car and polish it smooth. Porsche dealer before corrosion begins.
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
Polishing
effect will be lost. they must first be removed carefully and thorough-
f Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and
becomes evident that the normal preservati- finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color
ves no longer produce the desired finish. number are found on the vehicle’s paint data plate.
f Please observe the chapter “DATA BANK” on
Page 354.

268 Maintenance, Car Care

Cleaning the engine compartment Windows Wiper blades
Caution! The road dust which settles on the windshield and Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil for a clear view.
Risk of damage, e.g. to the alternator, paint- residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
ed surfaces, and the valve covers. f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (be-
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which col-
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
f Never use high-pressure cleaning units with a lect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
wiper performance deteriorates.
round-jet nozzle. are augmented by impurities in the air which en-
ters the car through the fresh air vents. f Periodically clean wiper blades with Porsche
f Always maintain a minimum distance of 21 in. window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
(50 cm). f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
has been washed in a car wash.
with Porsche window cleaner.
f Always cover the lid over the brake fluid reser- If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
voir prior to cleaning with a high-pressure f Make sure not to damage the TV antenna in the they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
cleaner. Never point the cleaning jet directly at side window when cleaning.
the lid. f If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
the aforementioned components. pick up a certain amount of preservative or pol-
ish and could smear the windows and thus im-
pair vision.
Note on operation
f Remove dead insects with insect remover.
If the car is driven off-road frequently and after
driving on salted or gritted roads:
f Clean the engine compartment regularly.

Maintenance, Car Care 269

Undercoating Danger!
Danger of fire and serious personal injuries.
The underside of your car is durably protected
against chemical and mechanical influences. f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it
shields. During driving the substance used for
is advisable to have the underside of the car in-
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
spected at certain intervals - preferably before the
start of winter and again in spring - and the under-
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully re-
coating restored as necessary.
move deposits or dirt and grease. Once it has
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the dried, the new undercoating compound forms
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the nec- a tough protective coating which provides effi-
essary equipment for applying factory approved cient rust-proofing of the floor panels and com-
materials. We recommend that you entrust them ponents.
with such work and inspections.
f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable preser-
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and vative to unprotected areas after cleaning the
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or underside of the body, the transmission, the
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials ap- engine or carrying out repairs to under-body,
plied at the factory. engine or transmission components.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If your car is driv-
en frequently in areas where salt has been spread
on the roads, the whole engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time.

270 Maintenance, Car Care

Headlights, lights, interior and exterior Door, roof, lid and window seals Light alloy wheels
plastic parts
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt or grit) f Please observe the chapter “AUTOMATIC CAR
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing from all seals regularly using warm soapy wa- WASHES” on Page 267.
detergent to clean headlights, lights, plastic ter. Do not use any chemical cleaning agents
Pitting may occur if metallic particles which cause
parts and surfaces. or solvents.
contact corrosion (e.g. brass or copper in brake
Do not clean when dry.
When there is a frost hazard, the outer door seals dust) are allowed to remain on the aluminum too
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth.
and the lid seals can be protected against freezing long.
Gently wipe the surface without applying too
into place by a suitable care product.
much pressure. f If possible, wash the wheels with a sponge or
The Porsche inside window cleaner is also In order to prevent damage to the anti-fric- wash brush about every two weeks. In areas
suitable for cleaning plastic surfaces. tion coating, the inner door seals must not be where road salt or grit is spread on winter
Follow the cleaning instructions on the treated with care products. roads or there is a lot of airborne industrial
container. dust, it is best to clean the wheels weekly.
Never use other chemical cleaners or The Porsche Light Alloy Wheel Cleaner
solvents. (ph-value 9.5) can be used for this pur-
pose.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
If the ph-value of the detergent is in-
corect, the protective coating on the
wheels will be destroyed.

Polishes which dissolve oxides, such as those

frequently used for other metals, or abrasive
tools or agents are unsuitable because they
break down the oxide film of the protective
coating and will cause discoloration of the
wheel.
f Every three months, after cleaning, coat the
wheels with a car wax or non-corrosive grease
(e.g. vaseline).
Using a clean cloth thoroughly rub the grease
into the surface.

Maintenance, Car Care 271

Leather care Leather care and treatment Carpets and mats
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
Characteristics and special features f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
brush.
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g. cloth or a commercially available microfibre
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc- cloth. f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain
tural differences and slight variations in shade and remover.
f Remove heavy contamination with Porsche
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leath-
leather cleaner. The Porsche range of accessories includes floor-
er product.
Please always follow the instructions for use mats to protect the carpets in summer and winter.
A special mention must be made here of natural given on the containers.
leather. For natural leather, carefully selected Warning!
Caustic cleaners and hard cleaning objects
hides of the highest quality are used. It is not
must not be used. Risk of an accident.
covered completely with dye on production. “Na-
ture’s signature” is therefore easily recogniz- Perforated leather must under no circum- f Always check the movement of the pedals be-
able.This fine material is distinguished by an out- stances get wet on its reverse side. fore driving and make sure that they are not ob-
standing seating comfort, special suppleness and structed by a floor mat or any other object.
Once cleaned, leather (particularly the heavily
a typical patina.
stressed leather seats) must be treated only with f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
Porsche leather care liquid. into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle – do not lie them
loosely in the vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
floor mats of correct size including a securing
possibility.

272 Maintenance, Car Care

Airbags Alcantara Safety belts
Danger! f Do not use a leather care product to clean Al- f Use a mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
cantara.
There is a danger of serious personal injury f When drying, avoid direct sunlight.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
or death if the airbag system is impaired by f Only use suitable cleaning agents.
improper cleaning work. with a soft brush.
f Do not tint or bleach the belts.
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on Cleaning when lightly soiled The belt fabric could be weakened, thus affect-
individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, the front seats, f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap ing safety.

the roof pillars and the rooflinings. solution and wipe off the dirt.

f Let your authorized Porsche dealer clean Cleaning when heavily soiled
these components.
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
Fabric linings outside in.

Fabric linings on pillars, headliner and sun visors,

etc., must be treated only using suitable cleaning
agents or a suitable dry foam and a soft brush.

Maintenance, Car Care 273

Storing your Porsche Climate control Vehicle interior
The air conditioning system should be in good The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
working condition and fully charged. the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather inte-
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the Windshield/Headlight washer rior and in areas with high humidity. The recom-
most suitable and necessary methods.
f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution mended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and out- level as necessary. (500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
side. Clean the engine compartment. The un-
Windows, doors, lids and roof must be closed.
der carriage and chassis components should Electrical system The air vents should be opened.
be free of dirt and salt deposits.
f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
f Fill up the fuel tank. it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
system is deactivated.
for several minutes.
f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
f Increase the tire pressure to 58 psi (4 bar).It is
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to the
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
possibility of corrosion on shock absorber pis-
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
ton shafts.The vehicle should be moved slight-
Do not fast charge the battery.
ly, approximately every four weeks, to prevent
flat spot on the tires. f Please observe the chapter “CHARGE STATE”
on Page 320.

274 Maintenance, Car Care

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Exercise Extreme Caution
when Working on your Vehicle ..................... 276
Notes on Minor Repairs .............................. 276
Tires/Wheels ............................................. 277
Jack.......................................................... 291
Tool Kit ..................................................... 291
Lifting the Vehicle with a
Lifting Platform or Garage lift ...................... 292
Compressor .............................................. 293
Wheel Bolts ............................................... 293
Changing Wheels........................................ 294
Flat Tire..................................................... 295
Electrical System ....................................... 310
Battery ...................................................... 320
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ...... 331
Replacing the remote control battery ........... 334
Bulb Chart ................................................. 335
Replacing Bulbs ......................................... 336
Headlights ................................................. 337
Tail Light ................................................... 345
License Plate Lights ................................... 347
Headlight Adjustment.................................. 348
Changing Headlights from
Left to Right-Hand Traffic ............................ 349
Towing ...................................................... 350

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 275

Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew- the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Danger! f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
about any servicing, have it done by your
cause serious personal injury or death. of the car.
authorized Porsche dealer.
The fans can start or continue running as a
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle function of temperature, even with the engine
Improper maintenance during the warranty
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not period may affect your Porsche warranty cov-
switched off.
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do erage.
Carry out work in these areas only with the
not attempt the adjustments described on the engine off and exercise extreme caution. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. coolant, are hazardous to your health. Keep
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic
these fluids out of children's reach and dispose
ignition system. When the ignition is on, high
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well voltage is present in all wires connected with
of them in accordance with the appropriate
ventilated area. regulations.
the ignition system; therefore, exercise
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the extreme caution when working on any part of f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel the engine while the ignition is on or the engine special spare parts to be carried.
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- is running. Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- f Always support your car with safety stands if it
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. is necessary to work under the car. The jack Notes on Minor Repairs
f Before working on any part in the engine com- supplied with the car is not adequate for this
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool purpose. Tool kit
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment f When working under the car without safety
components can burn skin on contact. The tool kit is accommodated in the spare-wheel
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
well under the cover of the loadspace floor.
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all make sure the car is on level ground, the
times while the engine is running. wheels are blocked, and that the engine can-
If you have to work on the engine while it is run- not be started.
ning, always put the handbrake on and put the Remove the ignition key.
gearshift lever in neutral or the selector lever
in position P.

276 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Tires/Wheels Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
injury or death.
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a sud-
den vibration or ride disturbance, and/or you
For your safety remember the following: suspect that possible damage to your tires or
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
your Porsche. reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
– If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
Porsche specifications for your model. Only inspect the tires.
tires with the same make and with the same If you cannot determine the cause for the dis-
specification code (e.g. “N0“, “N1“...) can be turbance, have your vehicle towed to the near-
mounted. est Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory f Continuing to operate the vehicle without cor-
installed equipment will affect the safe opera- rection could result in a loss of control and seri-
tion of your vehicle and affect warranty cover- ous personal injury.
age.
– Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Your dealer has the technical information nec-
essary to advise you which wheel rims and
wheel bolts are compatible with the original
factory installations.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 277

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and max-
under controlled conditions on a specific govern-
imum section width.
ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and climate.

Example

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal

Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

278 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Traction AA, A, B, C Temperature A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire's ability C, representing the tire's resistance to the gener-
to stop on wet pavement as measured under con- ation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
trolled conditions on specified government test tested under controlled conditions on a specified
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C indoor laboratory test wheel.
may have poor traction performance. Sustained high temperatures can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
Warning! and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure.
The traction grade assigned to this is based The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests mance which all passenger car tires must meet
and does not include cornering (turned) trac- under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
tion, acceleration, hydroplaning or peak No. 109.
traction characteristics. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.

Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 279

Tire pressures The tire pressure must match the prescribed Overloading
value.
Danger! You can find information on the tire pressure: Danger!
Risk of accident. – In the front left door aperture. Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
Risk of serious personal injury or death. damage to vehicle parts.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure – Please observe the chapter “TIRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 361. f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
the roof load.
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pres- These values are for cold tires (68°F/20 °C).
sure increases rate of wear of the affected f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire pres-
tires and cause damage. Always use an f Check the tire pressure at least every sure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be
accurate tire pressure gauge when checking 2 weeks. Always check when tires are cold. found on the tire pressure plate and in the
inflation pressures. f On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring chapter technical data.
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure system: f Never exceed the specified axle load.
listed on the tire sidewall. (Also refer to “Tech- Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE Overloading can shorten the service life of the
nical data“). MENU” on Page 89. tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehi-
cle reactions and long braking distances.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased. Damage due to overloading is not covered by
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
the vehicle warranty.
68°F (20°C), when adjusting the inflation pres- f Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause
sure. Avoid sunlight striking the tires before the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
measuring cold pressures, since the pressures value. MATION” on Page 195.
would rise from temperature influence.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES-
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt, overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly. SURES, COLD” on Page 361.
and thus from leakage. Always screw caps Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
tightly down. Replace missing caps immedi- quently correcting the tire pressure.
ately.
f For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating bot-
tles.

280 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehi-
cle. This is the maximum weight of passengers
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle.
If a trailer is being towed, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the cargo
load. Please observe the chapter “LOADING
INFORMATION” on Page 195.
C Original tire size
Size of tires mounted at the factory.
D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
These values are for cold tires (68°F/20 °C).
E Approved tire sizes
F Size and tire pressure for the collapsible spare
wheel
Example of a tire pressure plate A Example of a tire pressure plate B

Tire Pressure plate Information on the tire pressure plate B

A Approved tire size
Depending on when your vehicle was manufac-
tured, the tire pressure plate on the driver's door B Permissible tire pressure for the front axle
will contain different data. C Tire pressure for fully loaded or partially
loaded vehicle
Information on the tire pressure plate A
D Permissible tire pressure for the rear axle
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, includ- E Size and tire pressure for the collapsible spare
ing the driver. wheel

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 281

Tire traction Tire wear Danger!
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of con-
Warning! The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
trol of the vehicle and could cause serious
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a personal injuries or death.
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
wedge of water may build up between the approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
tires and the road. This phenomenon is tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in (1.6 mm). cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden
known as “hydroplane“ and may cause par- deflation and loss of control which could cause
tial or complete loss of traction, vehicle con- When the indicators appear in two or more adja-
severe personal injury.
trol or stopping ability. cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
recommend, however, that you do not let the tires f Specialized high performance tires on high
f Reduce speed on wet surfaces to prevent this. wear down to this extent. performance sport utility vehicles exhibit more
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly wear than those on a family sedan, or even a
and are even less effective on wet roads. high performance sedan.
Tire life
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
In the United States, state laws may govern the
Tire life depends on various factors, i.e., road sur- pressure and condition at least every two
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
faces, traffic and weather conditions, driving hab- weeks.
laws.
its, type of tires and tire care.
f If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly,
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before consult your Porsche dealer.
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
should be balanced or replaced. wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted reg-
ularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.

282 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Tire care Tire damage, puncture In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain
whether there is a break in the ply with all its con-
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. f Please observe the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE sequences or tire damage caused by thermal or
CLEANING UNITS” on Page 266. mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
any other prior damage, we recommend that the
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Danger! tire be replaced for safety reasons.
f Check tires for uneven wear and damage
Risk of serious personal injury or death. If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
before driving off.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
f Remove imbedded material. increases increases risk of a tire failure and exceed 30%. Handling inconsistencies may result.
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately. resulting loss of control. Furthermore, low
f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
tire pressure increases rate of wear of the
f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. affected tires.
f Replace missing valve stem caps. f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
f Keep tires inflated correctly. foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.

f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
clean inner side of wheels. of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or for-
eign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a dam-
f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing aged tire if necessary.
the wheels.
f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
f Check wheel rims for corrosion. possible.
f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
the inner side) checked by an authorized Por-
sche dealer.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 283

Tire replacements If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice- Parking at the curb
able change in handling occurs due to the different
f Use only tire makes and types tested by tread depth of the other tires. This happens espe- Danger!
Porsche. cially if only rear tires are replaced. However, this
condition disappears as the new tires are broken Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic
Only tires with the same manufacturer and islands) are dangerous and may cause hid-
in.
with the same specification code (e.g. “N0“, den tire damage which is not noticeable until
“N1“...) should be mounted on the vehicle. f Please adjust your driving style accordingly. later. Such damage can result in accidents at
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle Installation of new tires should only be done by a high speeds causing severe personal injury.
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type qualified tire technician. Depending on the force of impact, the edge
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible and of the rim can also be damaged.
will affect vehicle performance, safety, and can Valves f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by
affect vehicle warranty. f Use only plastic valve caps. an expert, particularly if you suspect damage
on the inside.
Porsche dealers can recommend the most current f The rubber valves must be replaced whenever
replacement tire options for your vehicle. the tires are changed. f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction. f The fitting and replacement specifications Exercise care when parking along curbs.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds must be observed for metal valves.
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
f Only use Original Porsche metal valves. Maintenance note
Tire repairs are not permissible under any circum-
stances.

284 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Danger!
If, during a journey, uneven running or vibra-
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
tions occur that could be caused by damage
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and
to tires or the car, the speed must be
snow tires before winter. Unbalanced wheels may
reduced immediately, but without braking
affect car handling and tire life.
sharply. If you continue your trip without hav-
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
ing the cause of the fault remedied, you
balancing.
might lose control of your vehicle which
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
could cause severe personal injury.
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In f Stop the vehicle and check the tires.
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
authorized Porsche dealer.
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 285

Removing and storing tires Note Snow tires
Under no circumstances should tires older than
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque The installation of Porsche approved winter tires is
6 years be used on your Porsche.
wheel bolts diagonally. recommended.
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT“
Use Porsche approved winter tires for grip on
WHEELS” on Page 294. code number. If, for example, the last three num-
snow and ice. For optimum performance, stud-
bers read 1204, then the tire was produced in the
Tires must always remain on the same side of ding can be considered.
12th week of 2004.
the vehicle. Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
When wheels are removed, the direction of rota- f Store tires in a cool and dry place. possible restrictions.
tion and position of each wheel should be marked.
f Rotate periodically to avoid flat spots.
Danger!
Example
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL. vehicle as well as serious personal injury or
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with death.
their marking. The standard tires profile and rubber mixture
are optimized for wet and dry driving condi-
The perception that tire durability and perfor- tions, and may not prove favorable for snow
mance are not affected by storage and age is conditions.
unfounded.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber elas- f Install winter tires before driving in such condi-
tic, lose their effectiveness over the course of tions.
time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Before mounting winter tires, consult with your
Therefore, the tires, especially the spare tire, Porsche dealer. He has the technical information
should be inspected from time to time. necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compat-
ibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
all four wheels.
Winter tires with studs should be run at moderate
speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.

286 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 Danger! Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. Risk of accident and serious personal injury
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure or death due to excessive speed.
increases increases risk of a tire failure and
f Always check the maximum speed rating on
resulting loss of control. Furthermore, low
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
tire pressure increases rate of wear of the
affected tires and cause damage. f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tires.
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or Wheel change
death. f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
f Make sure they are replaced immediately. of rotation and position of each wheel.
Example: FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
f Do not exceed the winter tire speed rating. f Always fit the wheels in accordance with the
Snow tires do not have the same degree of trac- markings.
tion on dry, wet or snowfree roads as normal tires.
Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under these
conditions.
Winter tires do not fulfill their purpose if the tread
depth is less than 5/32 in. (4 mm).

Comply with all state and local laws govern-

ing snow tire and tread depth requirements.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 287

Snow chains f Before fitting chains, remove accumulated ice
and snow from the wheel well.
Caution! f Vehicles with snow chains must not be driven
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake com- faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).
ponents. Different states and countries have varying statu-
f Use only the fine-link snow chains recom- tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
mended and authorized by Porsche so that f Check with local authorities for possible
sufficient clearance between the wheel well restrictions.
and the chain is assured.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of of ice and snow.
the chains.

The best possible handling characteristics are

achieved when snow chains are fitted on all four
wheels of the vehicle. However, it is also possible
to fit snow chains on only one axle (preferably the
rear axle).

288 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 – second two-digit code means tire size.
– third four-digit code means tire type code.
– fourth four-digit code means date of manufac-
ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
1204, the tire was produced in the 12th week
of 2004.
C Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition.
D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
to which a tire can be inflated.
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation pres-
sure.
Example of Inscription
– 18 - Indication of rim diameter in inches E Maximum Load rating
Inscription on radial tire – 109 - Load capacity coefficient The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always
A Tire size – Y - Speed code letter
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating
Example: P 255/55R18 109 Y B TIN (Tire Identification Number) as the factory installed tire.

– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx F Term of tubeless or tube tire
This information is not included on all tires. – DOT Identification for tubeless tires.
– 255 - Indication of tire width in mm The DOT symbol indicates that the tires com-
G Radial
ply with the requirements of the US Depart-
– 55 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio ment of Transportation and provides informa- The identification indicates if the tire has radial
in percent tion about: structure.
– R - Belt type code letter for radial – first two-digit code means manufacture’s iden-
tification mark.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 289

Speed code letter Inscription on light alloy wheels
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per- Maintenance note
missible speed for the tire.
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
valve caps.
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h) of air.
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h) Note on operation
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) f The rim width in inches G and the rim offset L
are visible from the outside. This information
Tip on driving can be found near the tire valve.
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
the tire sidewall.
f Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject G- Rim width in inches
H- Rim-flange contour code letter
to speed limits and bear this identification.
I - Symbol for drop-center rim
f Please observe the chapter “SPEED LIMITS J- Rim diameter in inches
K- Double hump
FOR TIRES” on Page 91.
L- Rim offset in mm

290 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 Warning!
The jack must be used only to raise the car
for wheel changing.
The jack must never be used as a support to
work underneath the vehicle. If the jack is
accidentally dislodged, you or bystanders
could suffer severe personal injury.
f Never jack up other vehicle or other loads with
the jack.
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
have to work under the car.
When working under the vehicle, always use
safety stands specifically designed for this pur-
pose.

Jack Tool Kit

The jack is located in tool box A under the load- Tool box A and compressor B with pressure tester
space floor. on non-air suspension vehicles are located under
the cargo area.
f Please observe the chapter “OPENING LOAD-
SPACE FLOOR” on Page 186. Notes on operation
The screwdriver is located in the handle of the
wheel bolt wrench.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 291

Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting
Platform or Garage lift
f The car must be raised only at the illustrated
jacking points.
Please observe the chapter “LIFTING THE
VEHICLE WITH A JACK” on Page 298.
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK” on Page 238.
f Lifting at any other place may damage the vehi-
cle or may result in personal injury.

Caution!
Risk of serious damage to the engine or the
vehicle.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles. A - Front jacking points platform lift C - Rear jacking points platform lift
B - Front jacking point garage lift D - Rear jacking point garage lift
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
Platform lift Garage lift
f Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
it must be ensured that there is enough space jacking points.
between the lifting platform and the vehicle.
f Lifting at any other place may damage the vehi-
cle or may result in personal injury.

292 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Compressor Tightening torque
Tightening torque of the wheel bolts 118 ftlb.
On vehicles without level-control systems, there is
(160 Nm).
an additional compressor with pressure tester
under the loadspace floor.
Security wheel bolts
On vehicles with level control, you can use the
compressor of the level-control system to fill the The adapter (wrench socket) for the security
tires. wheel bolts is located in the tool box.
The filler hose required for this purpose can be
found under the left rear seat. To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, the adapter must be used between the
f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench.
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
f Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TIRES that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
ON VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR SUSPENSION” on bolt.
Page 303.
Note on operation
Wheel Bolts If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the socket for
f Always clean the wheel bolts before installing. the security wheel bolts along with the car key.
Maintenance note
f Wheel bolts must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use the original Porsche wheel bolts spe-
cially designed for this vehicle type.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 293

Changing Wheels While operating the jack Sequence of operation
f The jack is only to be used for changing a
Warning! wheel. Do not use it as a support to work under Warning!
the car. The jack must be used only to raise the car
Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injuries to you or to f The car must be jacked up only at the illus- for wheel changing.The jack must never be
bystanders. trated jacking points.Lifting at any other place used as a support to work underneath the
may damage the vehicle or may result in per- vehicle. If the jack is accidentally dislodged,
Before changing the wheel sonal injury. Never jack the car up by the body you or bystanders could suffer severe per-
sonal injury.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off or the bumpers.
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and f For safety reasons do not use tire inflating bot- f Never jack up other vehicles or other loads
use other warning devices to alert other motor- tles. Do not use commercially available sealant with the jack.
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
ists. bottles. Use only the tire inflating bottle
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact located in the luggage compartment. have to work under it. When working under the
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials. vehicle, always use safety stands specifically
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set designed for this purpose.
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
property damage and severe or fatal physical f Please use a suitable knee rest to protect your
injury. clothing against soiling.
f Passengers must not be in the vehicle when it
is jacked up.
f Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground
is level and firm. If necessary, use a board
under the jack to ensure that the jack does not
sink into the ground.
f Set the parking brake and block the wheels
opposite the flat tire on the other side of the
vehicle.

294 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Flat Tire
1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving
lane as possible.
The car must be parked on a firm and flat
surface offering adequate grip.
2. Switch on the emergency flashers.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Shift into 1st gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
5. Straighten the front wheels.
6. Withdraw the ignition key to lock the steering
and prevent the engine from being started.
7. Have any passengers leave the vehicle.
8. Set up a warning triangle at a suitable
A - Folding wedges 3.Place one wedge directly in front of and
distance.
another directly behind the diagonally opposite
Securing the vehicle against rolling wheel.

For this purpose, use the two folding wedges A

fastened on the tool box.
1. Unfold the wedges.
2. Engage the wedges.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 295

 On vehicles without level control, the tire sealant Warning!
and a compressor with pressure tester can be
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
found under the cargo floor in the luggage com-
to health.
partment.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
The tire sealant comprises:
when handling tire sealant.
– A filler bottle
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
– A filler hose
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
– A valve turner and
f Do not inhale vapours.
– A spare valve insert.
In case of contact with the sealant:
Danger!
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
Risk of accident. thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or off without delay.
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm). f Change soiled clothing immediately.
A - Filler bottle f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is dam- f Visit a doctor immediately in the event of an
B - Filler hose aged. allergic reaction.

Tire sealant f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out

the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts, water.
especially in the tire tread. Do not induce vomiting.
See a doctor immediately.
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be
used only for short journeys in an emergency.

296 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. 16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
The filler bottle is now open. dealer.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F. Care Instructions
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
valve turner D. peeled off like a film.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place.
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B. Warning!
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve. Risk of accident.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire f Have the tire replaced by a specialist work-
valve and press it together forcefully until the shop as soon as possible.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
bottle is completely emptied into the tire.
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve. speeds.
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
using the valve turner. (80 km/h).

A- Filler bottle 13.Inflate the tire. f Please always observe the safety and operat-
B- Filler hose Set the prescribed tire pressure. ing instructions, which can be found in the sep-
C- Plug of the filler hose Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES- arate operating instructions for the sealant and
D- Valve turner
SURES, COLD” on Page 361. on the compressor.
E- Valve insert
F- Tire valve Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT/
SEALING SET” on Page 92.
Inserting sealant 14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve.
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around
the tire.
10 minutes.
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar),
the luggage compartment. do not continue driving.
If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is indi-
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
cated, correct the pressure to the prescribed
4.Shake filler bottle A. value.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 297

Lifting the vehicle with a jack Maintenance note
The jacking point on the vehicle must be free of
Warning! dirt.
Danger of injury. The car may slip off the 1. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts of the wheel to
jack. be changed.
f Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when 2. Only set up the jack at the rear jacking point
jacking up and changing a wheel. designed for the purpose. The jack foot must
f Never jack up the vehicle when it is parked on be in contact over its whole area and must be
a surface that slopes up, down or to the side. positioned directly below the head piece.
Use a suitable support if necessary.
f Use the jack only to raise the car for wheel
changing. 3. Hold jack still and wind it up until its head
enters the jacking point on the vehicle.
f Always place the car on stable supports if work Only jack vehicle up until the wheel to be
has to be carried out under the car. changed is completely off the ground.
The car jack is not suitable for this.
4. After lowering the vehicle, remove the jack.
Danger of injury if the level-control system
operates during the wheel change. Front jacking point

f Set the car to jacking mode before raising the Jacking point base
car.
Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION f Set up jack only at the points provided A or B.
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUST-
MENT” on Page 236.
Risk of injury and damage if the vehicle is not
secured.
f Secure the vehicle against rolling.
f Please observe the chapter “SECURING THE
VEHICLE AGAINST ROLLING” on Page 295.

298 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Rear jacking point Front jacking point Rear jacking point

Jacking points for vehicles with a running

board
f Set up jack only at the points provided C or D.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 299

Front jacking point Rear jacking point

Jacking points for vehicles with side member 2. Set up jack only at the points provided F or H.
panels
3. Insert the cover cap E or G completely with
The jacking points are accessible after removing both centering lugs in the slots of the side
the plastic caps from the side member panels. member panel and fold back until it can be felt
to engage.
1. Open cover cap E or G to the front in the side
member panel via the internal handle recess
and pull off (arrow).

300 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aid and screw in remaining
wheel bolt.
Initially tighten bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence so that the wheel is centered.
6. Inflate the tire.
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES-
SURES, COLD” on Page 361.
In vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem:
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
MENU” on Page 89.
7. Lower car and remove jack.
8. Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.

Maintenance note
Wheel change Screwing in assembly aid
f Immediately after changing a wheel, use
1. Remove the top wheel bolt with the wheel bolt 2. Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and a torque wrench to check the prescribed
wrench from the tool kit. screw in instead of the wheel bolt. tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(118 ftlb./160 Nm).
3. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Please observe the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS”
on Page 293.
4. Change wheel.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 301

 4. Inflate the tire. f Only fit one collapsible spare wheel on the
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES- vehicle at a time.
SURES, COLD” on Page 361.
f On vehicles with air suspension, use the tire fill-
ing connection A only to inflate the collapsible
Warning! spare wheel.
Risk of accident. f To avoid damage, do not use automatic car
f The collapsible spare wheel must be used only washes when the spare wheel is installed.
over short distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tires before After using the collapsible spare wheel
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tire
grooves, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) high). f Release air by unscrewing the valve insert.

f Never deactivate the Porsche Stability Man- Notes on operation

agement (PSM) system.
The tire will revert to its original shape only after
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering several hours. Only then can it be stowed in the
speeds. spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment.
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
There is a plastic sheet in the tool box to store the
Collapsible spare wheel (80 km/h) and must not be exceeded
damaged wheel.
because of altered driving characteristics and
The collapsible spare wheel is fastened under the for reasons of wear. Maintenance note
floor in the luggage compartment. The tread depth of the spare wheel is subject
to the same laws as the original tires. The collapsible spare wheel must be repaired only
1. Take out rotary knob A and put it on bolt B.
by the manufacturer.
2. Unscrew the screw and take out the collapsible f Do not use a collapsible spare wheel from a
different vehicle type. f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
spare wheel.
if the collapsible spare wheel is defective.
3. Mount the collapsible spare wheel on the vehi- f Do not mount the collapsible spare wheel from
cle before inflating it. Leave the car jacked up. your car on a different vehicle.
Please observe the chapter “LIFTING THE
VEHICLE WITH A JACK” on Page 298.

302 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Checking tire pressure with a pressure
gauge
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.

Note on operation
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard, reposition the pressure gauge.
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
This information can be found on the tire pres-
sure plate.
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES-
SURES, COLD” on Page 361.
Inflating tires on vehicles without air 3. Remove cover A of the engine-compartment
4. Remove the pressure gauge. suspension cover.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE” Please observe the chapter “CONNECTING
on Page 87. 1. Open front lid of the compressor. JUMPER CABLES” on Page 332.
2. Screw filler hose A of the compressor onto the f f f
tire valve.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 303

 Warning!
Danger of burning. The compressor filler
hose can become hot during the inflation
process.
f Wear gloves.

5. Switch on compressor with switch D.

The required filling pressure will be reached
after a few minutes.
6. Switch off compressor with switch D.
7. Check filling pressure with pressure tester E.
Then reduce tire pressure or add more air if
necessary.
Recheck the filling pressure.
8. Unscrew filler hose of the compressor.
+ = Positive terminal for jump lead starting
– = Grounding point for jump lead starting Reducing filling pressure on vehicles
without air suspension
4. Connect clamps of the compressor to the
jump lead starting terminals. 1. Switch off compressor with switch D.
Always observe the following sequence: 2. Open air bleed screw F until the correct filling
– Open the cap of the positive terminal for emer- pressure is achieved.
gency starting with jumper cables (+).
– Connect positive lead (red) B to the positive
terminal for emergency starting with jumper
cables (+).
– Connect negative lead (black) C to the nega-
tive terminal for emergency starting with
jumper cables (–).

304 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Inflating tires on vehicles with air 4.Open Velcro fastening strip on the fastening 6.Remove cover A in footwell of the front passen-
suspension strap. ger seat.

1.Pull up the seat cushion at loop A on the rear 5.Take tire filling hose out of the bag. f f f
left seat.
2.Pull seat cushion forward (arrow B).
3.Raise seat cushion vertically.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 305

 Warning! Note on operation
Danger of injury and risk of damage if the The compressor features a protective function
operating unit is used improperly. against overheating and switches itself off auto-
matically if necessary. The compressor must cool
f Use this operating unit only to inflate or to
down for a few minutes after automatic deactiva-
bleed air from the tires of this vehicle.
tion.
9.Switch ignition on.
Reducing tire pressure on vehicles with
10.Press hand valve D until the correct tire pres- air suspension
sure is achieved.
Monitor the tire pressure with pressure tester f Open air bleed screw E until the correct tire
C during the inflation process. pressure is achieved.
11.Unscrew the screw coupling from the com- Monitor the tire pressure with pressure tester
pressor connection. C while correcting the tire pressure.

12.Unscrew filler connection from the tire valve.

13.Stow tire filler hose in the bag.
B- Screw coupling for compressor connection
C- Pressure tester
D- Hand valve for tire filling
E- Air bleed screw
F- Filler connection for tire valve

7.Screw screw coupling B into the compressor

connection (in footwell of the front passenger
seat).
8.Screw filler connection F onto the tire valve.

306 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Spare wheel Removing spare wheel

Warning! Warning!
Risk of accident. The wheel and tire size and Danger of injury if the spare wheel is
the tire quality of the spare wheel and normal removed improperly.
wheel may differ.
f Remove the spare wheel only when the spare
If a spare wheel that differs from the normal
wheel bracket is locked.
tires is used, this may impair the driving
behavior. f Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel
bracket with care. The wheel is very heavy
f The spare wheel must be used only over short
(approx. 77 lbs. (35 kg)).
distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
1. Unscrew all five wheel bolts.
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tire
grooves, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) high). 2. Remove the top wheel bolt.
Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and
f Never deactivate the Porsche Stability
screw in instead of the wheel bolt.
Management (PSM) system.
Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
f If the tire on the spare wheel is older than Fitting spare wheel
4 years, the spare wheel should be used only
in the event of a flat. f Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
Remove assembly aid and screw in remaining
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering wheel bolt.
speeds. Initially tighten bolts in diagonally opposite
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph sequence so that the wheel is centerd.
(80 km/h) if the mounted spare wheel differs
from the other three wheels on the car. This f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRES-
maximum speed must not be exceeded SURES, COLD” on Page 361.
because of altered driving characteristics and f After mounting the wheel, tighten all five wheel
for reasons of wear. bolts to 111 ftlb. (150 Nm).
f Do not use a spare wheel from a different vehi-
cle type.
f Do not mount the spare wheel from your car on
a different vehicle.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 307

 Precondition
The central locking system must be unlocked.
f Press button B and swing the spare wheel
bracket open.

Notes on operation
– If the opening angle exceeds 30°, the spare
wheel bracket automatically moves to final
position.
The rear lid can be opened only when the spare
wheel bracket is in final position.
– If the opening angle is less than 30°, the
spare wheel bracket automatically moves back
to its initial position.
However, the spare wheel bracket is not
completely engaged yet and must be closed
B-Button for unlocking the spare wheel bracket by hand. C - Additional lock

Opening spare wheel bracket Operating the additional lock of the spare
wheel bracket if the vehicle is tilted to the
Warning!
side
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly. 1. Open spare wheel bracket.

f Make sure that no persons or animals are 2. Slide additional lock C to the left.
within the range of movement of the spare The spare wheel bracket is mechanically
wheel bracket. Operate the spare wheel locked.
bracket only using button B. The warning light “rear lid” and a message on
the multi-purpose display of the instrument
f If the vehicle is inclined to the side, the addi- panel warn the driver that the spare wheel
tional lock C on the spare wheel bracket must bracket is open.
be operated.

308 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Closing spare wheel bracket Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
Warning! spare wheel bracket is operated improperly.
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the f Perform emergency unlocking of the spare
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly. wheel bracket only when the vehicle is on a
f Operate the spare wheel bracket only using level surface.
button B.
1. Remove cover of left towing lug D.
f If the vehicle is tilted to the side, more effort
will be required to swing the spare wheel 2. Pull emergency release cable E in the direction
bracket. of the arrow.
The spare wheel bracket is now unlocked and
f Make sure that no persons or animals are can be operated.
within the range of movement of the spare
wheel bracket.

1. Check whether additional lock C is engaged. If

necessary, slide additional lock C to the right.
D - Towing lug cover (left)
2. Swing spare wheel bracket closed with force. E - Emergency release cable
3. Check lock and observe indication on the multi-
purpose display of the instrument panel. Emergency release for the spare wheel
The indicator light must go out when the spare bracket
wheel bracket is locked.
If the battery is flat, the only way to open the spare
Automatic locking wheel bracket is by using the mechanical emer-
gency release.
f Please observe the chapter “TAILGATE” on
Page 104.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 309

Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Use only accessories authorized by Porsche.

Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
Replacing fuses or relays with engine running
or the ignition on could cause electrical
shock.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.

Relays
Sockets Note on operation
Relays should be checked or changed only by an The sockets and thus the connected electrical ac-
authorized workshop. Electrical accessories can be connected to the
12 V sockets. cessories function even if the ignition is swi tched
off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
Alarm system, central locking If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
The status of the central locking and alarm system discharged.
is not changed by disconnecting the battery.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.

310 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Changing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical
system due to short circuits and overloads, the in-
dividual circuits are protected by fuses.
One fuse box is in the engine compartment. Two
additional fuse boxes are located in the outer ends
of the dashboard.
1. Switch off the consumer with the defective
fuse. Before replacing a fuse, switch off all
electrical consumers and remove the ignition
key.
2. Open the fuse-box lid.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot to
check it using the plastic gripper.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip. Cover of engine-compartment fuse box Fuse box in engine compartment

4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.

Opening fuse-box lid in engine compartment 2. Rotate the turn-locks of the fuse-box lid
Note 90° anti-clockwise with a screwdriver and re-
1. Rotate the turn-locks 90° anti-clockwise with a
move the lid.
If a fuse blows repeatedly, please consult an au- screwdriver and remove the cover.
thorized Porsche dealer immediately, so that the f f f
short circuit can be located and corrected.
Never try to “repair“ fuses: you may cause serious
damage to other parts of the electrical system.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 311

Opening fuse-box lid in the dashboard A - Fuse puller

1. Carefully lever off the plastic cover with a

2. Remove the fuses carefully with the fuse puller.
screwdriver (arrow) and remove.
The fuse plan is located on the inside of the
cover.

312 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Fuse assignment – fuse box in left side of dashboard
No. Designation Rating in A

1 Sockets 20
2 Parking heater radio receiver 5
3 Sockets 20
4 Parking heater 15
5 Sockets 20
6 Porsche Entry & Drive 15
7 Diagnosis, rain/light sensor, antenna control 5
8 Windshield wipers 30
9 Washer fluid pump 15
10 Power window, rear left 25
11 Central locking system 15
12 Interior light 20
13
14 Power window, front left 25
15 Tail light, right 15
16 Horn 20
17 Turn signal, side light, left 10
18 Headlight washer system 20
19 Fog lights 15
20
21 Cornering light 15

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 313

 No. Designation Rating in A

22 Rear differential lock 30

23 Rear differential lock, disengageable anti-roll bars 10
24 Tire pressure monitoring system 5
25
Porsche Stability Management, passenger airbag deactivation, brake pedal switch, instrument panel, engine control unit,
26 10
airbag control unit, steering column module
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 Steering wheel heating, steering column module 15
34 Passenger compartment monitoring, seat heating 5
35 Low beam, high beam 15
36 Vehicle electrical system control unit 10
37
38 Brake lights 10
39 Relay activation, heated rear window, seat heating 5
40 Instrument panel 5
41 Porsche Entry & Drive 15
42 Panorama roof 30
43 Subwoofer 30

314 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

No. Designation Rating in A

44 Electrical seat adjustment, left; electrical steering column adjustment 30

45 Electrical seat adjustment, left; seat heating, rear 30
46
47 Rear differential lock 10
48 Parking heater clock 5
49 Servotronic, disengageable anti-roll bars 5
50 Heating pipe ventilation 10
51 Diagnosis, parking brake switch 5
52 Rear wiper 30
53 Heated rear window control unit, passenger compartment monitoring, light switch, steering column module 5
54 Headlight beam adjustment 10
55
56 Fan, front air-conditioning system 40
57 Fan, rear air-conditioning system 40
RES 1 Spare fuse 1 5
RES 2 Spare fuse 2 20

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 315

Fuse assignment – fuse box in left side of dashboard
No. Designation Rating in A

1 Socket for towing attachment 15

2 ParkAssist 5
3 Towing attachment control unit 15
4 Telephone/telematics control unit 5
5 Towing attachment control unit 15
6 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) 30
7 Center differential lock 5
8 Additional high beam 20
9 CD changer, DVD navigation 5
10 TV tuner, satellite receiver 5
11 Radio 10
12 Radio booster 30
13 Seat heating 5
14 Tail light, left 15
15 Power window, rear right 25
16 Rear lid guard light, luggage compartment light, door guard light Rear guard lights 10
17 Low beam, right; high beam, right 15
18 Heated rear window 30
19 Towing attachment motor 30/25
20 Electric seat height adjustment 30
21 Alarm system, spare wheel release 10

316 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

No. Designation Rating in A

22 Electrical seat adjustment, front right; seat heating, front right 30

23 Air conditioning 10
24 Electrical seat adjustment, front right 30
25 Air-conditioning system, rear 5
26
27 Level control, Porsche Active Suspension Management 15
28
29 Tiptronic conrol unit 10
30 Rear lid power closing mechanism 20
31 Comfort systems, rear 15
32 Central locking, right 10
33
34 Power window, front right 25
35 Turn signal, side light, right 10
36 Roof module, telephone, compass 5
37
38 Porsche Stability Management 10
39
40 Center differential lock 10
41 Towing attachment 10
42 Roof module, garage door opener 5
43 Back up light 5
44 Heated washer nozzles, level control 5

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 317

 No. Designation Rating in A

45
46
47 Telephone preparation 10
48 Level control, Porsche Active Suspension Management 10
49 Telephone, automatic anti-dazzle mirror 5
50 ParkAssist 5
51 Tiptronic 20
52 Tiptronic 5
53 Windscreen relay 30
54 Windscreen relay 30
55
56 Porsche Stability Management 40
57 Center differential lock, Low Range 40
RES 1 Spare fuse 1 10
RES 2 Spare fuse 2 30

318 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Fuse assignment – fuse box in engine compartment
No. Designation Rating in A

1 Fan 60
2 Fan 30
3 Secondary air pump 40
4 Secondary air pump 40
5
6
7 Fuel injectors, ignition coils 20
8 Fuel injectors, ignition coils 20
9 Engine control units 30
10 Engine components: radiator fans, afterrun pump, carbon canister valve, AC pressure sensor, tank leakage diagnosis 10
11 Engine components 15
12 E-box relay, secondary air pumps, afterrun pump relay 5
13 Fuel pump 15
14 Fuel pump 15
15 Engine control unit, fuel pump 10

17 Oxygen sensors 15
18 Oxygen sensors 7,5

Note
Use the plastic grippers from the fuse boxes in the dashboard to replace the fuses.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 319

Battery f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your Battery care
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doc- f Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
Danger!
tor.
f Keep terminals and connections clean and
Risk of short circuit and fire.
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once properly tightened. Corrosion can be prevent-
f Observe all warning notes on the battery. with a solution of baking soda and water to ed by coating the terminals and connections
with petroleum jelly or silicone spray.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the neutralize the acid.
electrical system. Battery posts, terminals and related acces- f Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to
prevent spillage.
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the sories contain lead and lead compounds,
battery as they could cause a short circuit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Checking the electrolyte fluid level
across the battery terminal.
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery f Always protect your skin by washing thorough- (only on low-maintenance batteries)

could cause an explosion, resulting in severe ly with soap and water. Generally, the electrolyte level must be checked
personal injuries. more often in summer than in the winter, and more
often when driving long distances.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame, Charge state
electrical spark or a lit cigarette. f When adding water, use only clean containers.
A well charged battery will not only prevent start- In no case may alcohol (e.g. window cleaner
Risk of explosion ing problems but will also last longer. residues) be permitted to enter the battery.
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth. f Unscrew and open the filler vent caps of each
In order to avoid unintended battery
f Before touching the battery, discharge any discharge cell.
static electricity by touching the vehicle.
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city With the car on a level surface, the fluid level
Risk of severe personal injury and damage to traffic, on short trips or in a line of traffic. should meet the indicator mark in each cell.
the fabric, metal or paint.
f Always remove the ignition key from the igni- f If necessary, top up with distilled water. Do not
f Wear eye protection. tion switch when leaving the vehicle or use acid. Only fill up to the mark, otherwise the
switch ignition off in vehicles with Porsche En- electrolyte will overflow when the battery is be-
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact ing charged and cause damage.
try & Drive.
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted surfac-
es. f Avoid using the Porsche Communication
Management system and the audio system
when the engine is not running.

320 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Winter operation Maintenance note 2. Perform a few steering movements and drive
a short distance in a straight line until the PSM
Even if you put your vehicle out of operation, the
During the winter months, battery capacity tends warning light goes out and the message is
battery still discharges.
to decrease as temperatures drop. Additionally, erased from the memory of the multi-purpose
The battery will discharge more quickly if your ve-
more power is consumed while starting, and the display of the instrument panel.
hicle is not driven on a daily basis over a distance
headlights, heater, rear window defogger, etc.,
of several miles. The more often you drive your ve- 3. If the warnings does not go out, then:
are used more frequently.
hicle, and the longer the distance driven on each Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Let your Porsche dealer test the battery's capaci- trip, the more opportunity the vehicle‘s charging Porsche dealer.
ty before winter sets in. system will have to recharge the batteries. Have the fault remedied by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
f To preserve its efficiency, charge the battery
Vehicle storage about every 6 weeks. 4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
If the car stands for long periods in the garage or f Check the battery acid level and top off with
workshop, the doors and lids should be closed. distilled water if necessary. 5. Perform adaptation of the power windows:
Please observe the chapter “STORING FINAL
f Remove the ignition key and, if necessary, dis- f Store a battery that has been removed in a
POSITION OF THE DOOR WINDOWS” on
connect the battery. dark, cool place, but not subject to freezing.
Page 31.
Notes on operation Putting vehicle into operation 6. On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys-
f When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
tem:
After the battery is connected or charged, the Please observe the chapter “SYSTEM LEAR-
system ceases to function.
PSM warning light lights up on the instrument pan- NING PHASE” on Page 89.
If the vehicle was locked before the battery
f f f
was disconnected, the alarm will be triggered el and a message appears on the multi-purpose
when the battery is reconnected. display of the instrument panel to indicate a fault.
To deactivate the alarm system: This fault can be remedied with a few simple
f Lock the vehicle and unlock it again. steps:
1. Start the engine.
To do this, turn the ignition key or the control
unit (on vehicles that have Porsche Entry &
Drive) to ignition lock position 2 twice.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 321

Replacing the battery Battery charging Slow battery charging
1. Pay attention to all warnings and follow instruc-
The service life of the battery is subject to normal Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when
tions that come with your battery charger.
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi- not in use. The charge available in your battery can
tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads). be measured with a battery hydrometer. We rec- 2. When charging, ensure adequate ventilation.
ommend that the battery voltage be tested by
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the 3. Remove battery.
your Porsche dealer who has the appropriate
correct part number, as a replacement. Only Please observe the chapter “REMOVING AND
equipment.
this battery meets the specific requirements of INSTALLING BATTERY” on Page 323.
the vehicle. If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
4. All vent caps should be open.The fluid level
battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
f Please observe the disposal instructions for should meet the indicator mark in each cell.
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sul-
batteries.
fates, leading to premature deterioration of the 5. Ensure that charger is switched off – danger of
plates. short circuit!
6. Connect charger cables.Charger cables must
Danger! be connected POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE (+)
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery and NEGATIVE (–) to NEGATIVE (–).
could cause an explosion, resulting in severe 7. Switch on charger. Normally, a battery should
personal injuries. be charged at no more than 10 percent of its
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area. rated capacity. Rated capacity of the battery in
your vehicle is listed on the battery housing.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a fro- 8. After charging, turn off charger and disconnect
zen battery to thaw out first. charger cables.

f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your 9. Tighten the vent caps and reinstall battery.
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with Please observe the chapter “REMOVING AND
cold water for several minutes and call a doc- INSTALLING BATTERY” on Page 323.
tor.

Note
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you about a suitable charger.

322 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Removing and installing battery Maintenance note
The seat mounting bolts must be replaced each
Danger! time they are loosened.
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of The bolts are micro-encapuslated and keep dust
short circuit and damage to the alternator and water out.
and electronic control units. If this is not observed, it might not be possible to
attain the prescribed tightening torque of 37 ftlb
f Have the battery removed and installed only by (50 Nm).
a qualified professional.
f Do not disconnect battery while the engine is
running.
f Disconnect and connect the battery only with
the greatest care. Danger of short circuit and
explosion.
f Do not tilt the battery when removing it.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
Removing battery
The battery is located in the battery box under the
left front seat. 1. Switch off all electrical loads and withdraw the
ignition key.
If the battery is completely discharged, the vehicle
must be provided with external power at the jump- 2. Move the left front seat all the way back and
lead starting points so that you can move the seat. up.
Move the backrest fully upright.
f Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on 3. Unclip front seat trim A.
Page 331. f f f

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 323

4. Fold sections of floor carpet forward. 5. Tilt the seat all the way back. 6. Open the 4 clamps C of the battery-box lid with
Unscrew both screws B of the seat mounting. With the seat tilted back, use the fore-and-aft a screwdriver.
adjustment to move the seat forward again.
7. Remove the battery-box cover with ventilation
duct.

Danger!
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
short circuit and damage to the alternator
and electronic control units.
f Disconnect the negative cable first, and then
the positive cable.

8. Disconnect the negative cable.

9. Disconnect the positive cable.

324 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

10.Pull off vent hose D on the battery. 12.Unscrew screw F of the bracket. Installing the battery
Remove bracket.
11.Unscrew screw E of the battery fastening 1.Danger of caustic burns!
plate. Danger! Place battery in the battery box without tipping
Remove battery fastening plate. it if possible.
Danger of caustic burns, explosion and risk
of injury. Contact with battery acid will burn 2.Push battery forwards and toward the center
your eyes and skin. of the vehicle until it is under the stops G.

f Lift battery out of the battery box using the f f f

folding handles.
Try not to tip the battery.

13.Lift battery out of the battery box using the

folding handles. Try not to tip the battery.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 325

f Always tighten all screws to the Danger! 10.With the seat tilted back, use the fore-and-aft
prescribed torque. adjustment to move the seat back.
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
Tilt the seat forward.
3.Fasten the battery fastening plate with screw short circuit and damage to the alternator
E. Tightening torque 15 ftlb. (20 Nm). and electronic control units. 11.Clean threaded holes on the seat mounting.
4.Fasten the bracket with screw F. Tightening f Connect the positive cable first, and then the 12.Use only new bolts B (the bolts are micro-en-
torque 6.5 ftlb. (9 Nm). negative cable. capsulated).
Insert bolts B and screw them in a few turns by
5.Important: Do not forget to connect vent
6.Connect the positive cable. hand.
hose D to the battery.
Tighten bolts.
Make sure that both ends of the vent hose are 7.Connect the negative cable.
Tightening torque 37 ftlb. (50 Nm).
properly connected.
8.Put on the battery-box cover carefully.
13.Clip in front seat trim.
Ensure that the ventilation duct is properly in-
serted. 14.Move seat to normal position.
9.Engage the 4 clamps C on the battery-box lid
and close them with a screwdriver.

326 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Removing and installing auxiliary battery The auxiliary battery is located in the luggage
compartment under the cargo area floor.
Danger! Any subwoofers or collapsible spare wheels that
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of may be in the vehicle must be removed before the
short circuit and damage to the alternator battery is removed.
and electronic control units.
f Have the battery removed and installed only by
a qualified professional.
f Do not disconnect battery while the engine is
running.
f Disconnect and connect the battery only with
the greatest care. Danger of short circuit and
explosion.

Note
The general information contained in the chapter Removing the collapsible spare wheel
on the battery applies to the battery under the driv- 1. Take out rotary knob A and put it on bolt B.
er’s seat and the battery in the luggage compart-
ment. 2. Unscrew the bolt and take out the collapsible
spare wheel.
f Please observe the chapter “CHARGE STATE”
on Page 320. Installing the collapsible spare wheel
1. Insert collapsible spare wheel.
2. Screw in bolt B.
3. Place rotary knob A on bolt B and tighten it.
f f f

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 327

Removing subwoofer 3. Undo the two fastening nuts D. 6. Remove subwoofer housing.
1. Withdraw the ignition key. 4. Unscrew screw E.
Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit Installing subwoofer
from the ignition lock in vehicles that contain 5. Disconnect plug connection F. 1. Insert subwoofer housing.
this feature.
2. Connect plug connection F.
Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on 3. Tighten the two fastening nuts D.
Page 59.
4. Tighten screw E.
2. Remove any existing tire sealant C.
5. Place any existing tire sealant C in recess.

328 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Removing battery 3.Open the 4 clamps of the battery-box cover. 7.Pull off vent hose G on the battery.
1.Withdraw the ignition key. 4.Remove the battery-box cover. 8.Undo fastening nut H of battery fastening
Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit plate.
from the ignition lock in vehicles that contain Danger! 9.Remove battery fastening plate.
this feature.
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of 10.Lift battery out of the battery box using the
Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
short circuit and damage to the alternator folding handles.
CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on
and electronic control units.
Page 59.
f Disconnect the negative cable first, and then
2.Undo the 4 fastening nuts of the battery box.
the positive cable.

5.Disconnect the negative cable.

6.Disconnect the positive cable.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 329

 3. Connect the positive cable.
4. Connect the negative cable.
5. Tighten battery fastening plate with fastening
nut H.
6. Put on the battery-box cover carefully.
7. Engage the 4 clamps on the battery-box cover
and close them.
8. Tighten the 4 fastening nuts of the battery box.

Installing the battery

1. Place battery in the battery box.
2. Important: Do not forget to connect vent
hose G to the battery.
Make sure that both ends of the vent hose are
properly connected.

Danger!
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
short circuit and damage to the alternator
and electronic control units.
f Connect the positive cable first, and then the
negative cable.

330 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Emergency Starting with Jumper Danger! Danger of gas explosion.
Cables Risk of damage and serious personal injury f Improper use of booster battery to start a ve-
due to short circuit. hicle may cause an explosion, resulting in se-
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after vere personal injuries.
the car has been parked for a long time, the bat- f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
tery of another car can be used for starting with cross-section and fitted with completely insu- f Keep sources of ignition away from the bat-
the help of jumper cables. lated alligator clips. tery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
same. jumper cable manufacturer. f A discharged battery can freeze even at
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster 14°F (10°C). Before connecting jumper ca-
battery must not be substantially less than that of f When connecting jumper cables, make sure
bles, a frozen battery must be thawed out.
the discharged battery.The discharged battery that they cannot get caught in any moving
must be correctly connected to the vehicle's elec- parts in the engine compartment.
trical system. The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f Please observe the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 320. f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive ter-
Note minals are connected.
Do not try to start the car by pushing or towing. f The cable clamps must not be allowed to con-
Damage to the catalytic converters and other tact each other when one end of the jumper ca-
components of the car may result. bles are connected to a battery.
f Carefully ensure that tools or conductive jewel-
ery (rings, chains, watch straps) do not come
into contact with the positive jumper cable or
the positive battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Danger of caustic burns.
f Do not lean over the battery.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 331

 8. Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the
positive terminal of the donor battery first,
then from the positive terminal for jump start-
ing (+).
9. Close the cap of the positive terminal for jump
starting (+).

Connecting jumper cables + = Positive terminal for jump starting

– = Grounding point for jump starting
Always observe the sequence below:
5. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
1. Remove cover A.
speed.
2. Open the cap of the positive terminal for jump
6. Start the engine.
starting(+).
An attempted start using jumper cables should
3. Attach the positive lead first to the positive not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
terminal for jump starting (+), then to the posi- waiting period of at least one minute.
tive terminal of the donor battery.
7. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
4. Connect the negative lead first to the negative ground point for jump starting (–) first, then
terminal of the donor battery, then to the from the negative terminal of the donor bat-
grounding point for jump starting (–). tery.

332 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Charging the battery After charging the battery 4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to After the battery is connected or the completely
5. Perform adaptation of the power windows:
advise you about a suitable charger. discharged battery is charged, the PSM warning
Please observe the chapter “STORING FINAL
light lights up on the instrument panel and a mes-
1. Always observe the instructions of the charger POSITION OF THE DOOR WINDOWS” on
sage appears on the multi-purpose display of the
manufacturer. Page 31.
instrument panel to indicate a fault.
2. When charging the battery, ensure adequate 6. On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys-
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
ventilation. tem:
steps:
Please observe the chapter “SYSTEM LEAR-
3. Check the acid level of a low-maintenance bat-
1. Start the engine. NING PHASE” on Page 89.
tery.
To do this, turn the ignition key or the control
4. Connect charger to the jump starting points. unit (on vehicles that have Porsche Entry &
Only plug into the mains and switch the charg- Drive) to ignition lock position 2 twice.
er on when it has been correctly connected up.
2. Perform a few steering movements to the left
5. After charging, disconnect the charger. and to the right when vehicle is standing and
drive a short distance in a straight line until the
6. Check the acid level of a low-maintenance bat-
PSM warning light goes out and the message
tery.
is erased from the memory of the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel.
3. If the warnings does not go out, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied by an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 333

 Changing the battery
1. Carefully pry out the lid on the back of the key
housing with a small screwdriver.
2. Replace battery (observe polarity).
A replacement battery is available from your
authorized Porsche dealer.
3. Replace cover and press together firmly.

Replacing the remote control

battery
Note
f Please dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.
If the battery in the remote control becomes too
weak, a warning will appear on the multi-purpose
display in the instrument panel.
The battery should be changed if this should be
the case.

334 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Bulb Chart
Type, rating Type, rating
Exterior lights Interior lights
Halogen low beam H7 Interior light, front W5W
Xenon low beam and high beam D1S Reading light W5W
Side marker light, rear P21/5W Engine compartment light W5W
Side marker light, front W5W Footwell light W3W
Turn signal light, rear P21W Glove compartment light W3W
Turn signal light, front PY21W Center console W3W
Brake light P21W Luggage compartment light K12V10W
Halogen high beam H7 Curb lights (doors) W3W
License plate light C5W Warning lights (doors) W3W
Fog light H11 Curb light (rear lid) W5W
Rear fog light P21/4W Guard light (rear lid) W5W
Back up light P21W
Side indicator light W5W
Additional high beam H7
Cornering light H3

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 335

Replacing Bulbs Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
Warning! sive temperatures and abrasion.
Danger of short circuit. f Attach no coverings (e.g. films, “stone
f Always switch off the relevant consumer when guards”) in the area of the headlights.
changing bulbs. f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
Danger of injury. The headlights are under plastic headlight lenses. In no case may chem-
high voltage when installed. ical cleaners or other volatile cleaning fluids be
used.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the headlights. f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the light housing.
f Only use the bulbs specified in the bulb chart.

f Bulbs must be clean and free from oil, grease

or fingerprints.
f Never touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper when replacing bulbs.
f Always carry spare bulbs with you.
In certain countries, the carrying of spare
bulbs is mandatory.

336 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion
and excessive temperatures.
f Do not affix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
or films) in the area of the headlights.

Removing headlights B - Headlight release

C - Wing
D - Socket wrench
1. Switch off ignition and withdraw the ignition
key.
3. Take socket wrench D out of the tool kit.
2. Push down cover A in the direction of the arrow
4. Push socket wrench D onto the release B and
and remove.
turn in the direction of the arrow.
The headlight holder has now been unlocked.
5. Pull headlight forward out of the fender.
f f f

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 337

B - Headlight release B - Headlight release B - Headlight release
C - Wing C - Wing C - Wing
D - Socket wrench D - Socket wrench D - Socket wrench

Installing headlight 3. Check whether the headlights are seated se-

curely.
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push 4. Fit cover A and fold it down.
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and simultaneously
turn socket wrench D in the direction of the ar-
row.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.

338 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Location of bulbs Bi-Xenon headlight
F Bulb for turn signal
Halogen headlight
G Bulb for additional high beam
A Bulb for turn signal
H Bulb for cornering light
B Bulb for high beam
I Bulb for side light
C Bulb for side light
J Xenon gas discharge lamp for low beam and
D Bulb for low beam
high beam

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 339

Opening the lid of the headlight housing Closing lid of headlight housing
1. Open both clips A. 1. Put housing lid B on and press into place.
2. Remove housing lid B. 2. Close clips A.

340 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 Changing side light bulb in Halogen headlight 2. Pull bulb out of the holder (arrow).
Halogen headlight
1. Pull the bulb holder out of lamp bracket. 3. Replace defective bulb.
Changing bulb for low beam of halogen
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
headlight
1. Pull off plug C.
2. Unclip securing clip D.
3. Replace defective bulb.

Note on operation
f Make sure the bulb is installed in the correct
position.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 341

Bi-Xenon headlight Changing cornering light in Bi-Xenon Changing side light bulb in Bi-Xenon
headlight headlight
Changing Xenon gas discharge lamp for low
beam and high beam 1. Pull plug I off the bulb. 1. Pull out the lamp for low beam and high beam
out of lamp bracket.
1. Pull off holder J. 2. Unclip securing clip (arrow).

2. Unclip securing clip G. 3. Replace defective bulb.

3. Replace defective bulb H. Note on operation

Note on operation f Make sure the bulb is installed in the correct

position.
f Make sure the bulb is installed in the correct
position. 4. Reassemble in reverse order.

4. Reassemble in reverse order.

342 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

2. Pull bulb out of the holder (arrow). 2. Pull plug J off the bulb.
Changing additional high beam light
3. Replace defective bulb. (halogen and Bi-Xenon headlights) 3. Unclip securing clip H.

4. Reassemble in reverse order. 1. Remove cover G. 4. Pull bulb I out.

5. Replace defective bulb.

Note on operation
f Make sure the bulb is installed in the correct
position.
6. Reassemble in reverse order.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 343

Changing turn signal bulb 2. Remove bulb from the holder (bayonet mount).
(halogen and Bi-Xenon headlights) To do this, push bulb into the holder and twist
in the direction of the arrow.
1. Turn bulb holder in the headlight housing anti-
3. Replace defective bulb.
clockwise and pull it out.
4. Insert bulb holder into the headlight housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.

344 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Tail Light 4. Pull out the light unit to the side in the direc- Installing tail light
tion of the arrow and additionally pull it out in
Removing tail light the area of the ball head C. 1. Insert connecting plug D.
5. Remove connecting plug D. 2. Insert ball pin of tail light C into clip nut E and
Maintenance note
fit the tail light into the body (arrow).
f The ignition key must be withdrawn before the
f f f
tail light is removed.
1. Open rear lid.
2. Remove the two caps A with a tool such as a
screwdriver.
3. Unscrew the two screws B.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 345

3. Screw in the fastening screws B. Replacing bulbs E- Rear fog light and tail light
F- Reversing light
4. Press in caps A. G- Turn signal light
1. Undo fastening screws C of the housing cover.
H- Brake light
2. Remove housing cover D. I - Tail light

3. Replace defective bulb.

4. Insert lamp bracket.
5. Install tail light.

346 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

License Plate Lights
Changing bulb for license plate light
1. Unscrew both screws A and remove the light.
2. Push the bulb holder apart and pull the bulb
out.
3. Replace defective bulb.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 347

 Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
adjustment unit.

Distance
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
7.5 m (this value is a rounded down conversion
from the 25-foot distance typical of field aim using
a screen). The 7.5 m (24.6 ft.) distance is mea-
sured from the headlamp lens to the viewing
screen.

Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.

Screen
Headlight Adjustment Adjustment The screen upon which headlamp beams are pro-
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to jected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehi-
f Check tire pressure and adjust if necessary. cle's longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU- unobstructed, and wide and high enough to ac-
The driver's seat must be loaded by a person or a
RES, COLD” on Page 361. commodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
165lbs. (75kg) weight and the tire pressures must
aimed.
f Please observe the chapter “REPLACING BUL- meet the prescribed values. After being loaded,
BS” on Page 336. the car must be rolled a few meters so that the The screen should be wide enough to provide at
suspension can settle. least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the vehi-
cle's headlamp spacing.
For checking the headlight adjustment, the verti-
cal position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 7.5 m (24.6 ft.) from the front lens of
the headlamp.The correct position of the cutoff is
7.5 cm (3.0 in.) at 7.5 m or 24.6 ft. (0.4°) below
a horizontal line, x cm from ground to the center
of the headlamp lens.

348 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

 Changing Headlights from Left to
Right-Hand Traffic
If you travel to a corresponding country where traf-
fic uses the other side of the road, the headlights
must be partially masked with films when you
cross the border.
f You can obtain the films and a set of instruc-
tions from an authorized Porsche dealer.

Height adjustment for low beam/

high beam and additional high beam
1. Push down cover in the engine compartment
and remove.
2. Switch ignition on.
3. Switch on low beam and/or high beam.
4. Adjust low beam in direction of the arrow.

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 349

Towing Caution!
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohib-
it towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar. In f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
addition, damage to your vehicle may result from remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
improper procedures. Consult your authorized hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
Porsche dealer for details. the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
Vehicle towing is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
hook.
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
be used on Porsche vehicles. Under certain cir- other vehicle.
cumstances, wheel lifts may be used when the ve-
hicle will not roll.
The vehicle must be towed with all four Vehicles with Tiptronic
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to f Do not tow-start vehicles with a Tiptronic
the vehicle may result. transmission.
The vehicle cannot be tow-started, nor should
Towing hook this be attempted due to the risk of serious Front and rear mounting
transmission damage.
1. Carefully lever out the appropriate plastic cov-
The towing hook is contained in the tool kit.
Vehicles with manual transmission er A in the bumper with the screwdriver.
The cover is captive and need not be removed
Only tow-start vehicles fitted with a catalytic con- completely.
verter when the engine is cold.
If the engine is warm, unburned fuel could damage
the catalytic converter.

350 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

2. Screw in towing hook B as far as the stop (left- Pulling vehicle onto flat bed Tieing down vehicle on flat bed
hand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat 1. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
bed to reduce the angle of the pull. ing in the rear wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
age rim. Make sure the strap is flat over the
of the vehicle for any interference.
rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
f f f

Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 351

4. Carefully feed towing straps through the open- Recovering the vehicle
ing in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the spare-
age rim. wheel well contains one or two towing lugs.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
f When recovering the vehicle, always use two
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
towing lugs if possible.
aged.
Screw in the towing lugs only at the front or
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed. rear.
Never screw them in so that one towing lug is
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not dis-
at the front and one is at the back.
connect. Use hoist cable as a safety cable.

352 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification ................................... 354
Engine Data ............................................... 356
Transmission ............................................. 357
Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................... 358
Tire Pressures, Cold................................... 361
Capacities ................................................. 362
Weights ..................................................... 363
Driving Performance................................... 364
Dimensions................................................ 365
Ground Clearance ...................................... 366

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 353

 This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
2. Type/Type description
3. Engine code/Transmission code
4. Paint No./Interior
5. Optional equipment
A duplicate of this label is in your Maintenance
Booklet.

Note
The data bank can not be reordered when lost or
damaged.

Vehicle Identification Vehicle identification number

When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations,
please always quote the vehicle identification num-
the vehicle identification number of your car is lo-
ber.
cated at the bottom left of the windshield frame
and can be seen from the outside and in the lug-
Data bank gage compartment on the right in front of the tool
box.
The data bank is located in the passenger com-
partment below the steering wheel. It contains all
important data about your car.

354 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Safety compliance sticker Tire pressure plate
The safety compliance sticker is your assurance The tire pressure plate is fitted to the driver's
that your new Porsche complies with all applicable door.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufac-
tured.
The sticker also shows the month and year of pro-
duction and the vehicle identification number of
your car (perforations) as well as the Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 355

Engine Data
Cayenne Cayenne Cayenne S Cayenne S
manual transmission Tiptronic S manual transmission Tiptronic S

Type 6-cylinder V-engine 6-cylinder V-engine 8-cylinder V-engine 8-cylinder V-engine

Number of cylinders 6 6 8 8
Bore 33.09 in. (84 mm) 33.09 in. (84 mm) 3.66 in. (93 mm) 3.66 in. (93 mm)
Stroke 37.78 in. (95.9 mm) 37.78 in. (95.9 mm) 3.27 in. (83 mm) 3.27 in. (83 mm)
Displacement 195 cu. in. (3189 cm3) 195 cu. in. (3189 cm3) 275 cu. in. (4511 cm3) 275 cu. in. (4511 cm3)
Compression ratio 11.5 : 1 11.5 : 1 11.5 : 1 11.5 : 1
Net-horsepower, SAE J 1349 184 kW (250 HP) 184 kW (250 HP) 250 kW (340 HP) 250 kW (340 HP)
at engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Net. torque, SAE J 1349 229 ftlb. (310 Nm) 229 ftlb. (310 Nm) 310 ftlb. (420 Nm) 310 ftlb. (420 Nm)
at engine speed 2500 - 5500 rpm 2500 - 5500 rpm 2500 - 5500 rpm 2500 - 5500 rpm
Maximum permitted engine speed 6700 rpm 6700 rpm 6700 rpm 6500 rpm

356 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Transmission
Transmission ratio Cayenne Cayenne Cayenne S Cayenne S
manual transmission Tiptronic S manual transmission Tiptronic S

1st gear 4.68: 1 4.15 : 1 4.68 : 1 4.15 : 1

2nd gear 2.53 : 1 2.37 : 1 2.53 : 1 2.37 : 1
3rd gear 1.69 : 1 1.56 : 1 1.69 : 1 1.56 : 1
4th gear 1.22 : 1 1.16 : 1 1.22 : 1 1.16 : 1
5th gear 1.00 : 1 0.86 : 1 1.00 : 1 0.86 : 1
6th gear 0.84 : 1 0.69 : 1 0.84 : 1 0.69 : 1
Reduction gear 2.70 : 1 2.70 : 1 2.70 : 1 2.70 : 1
Reverse gear 4.27 : 1 3.39 : 1 4.27 : 1 3.39 : 1
Final drive ratio 4.10 : 1 4.56 : 1 4.10 : 1 4.10 : 1

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 357

Tires, Rims, Tracks
Cayenne Tires Wheel Rim offset Track
front/rear front/rear front rear

Summer tires 235/65 R 17 108 V XL1) 7.5 J x 17 2.09 in. (53 mm) 65.2 in. (1655 mm) 65.8 in. (1670 mm)
1)
255/55 R 18 109 Y XL 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
275/45 R 19 108 Y XL 9 J x 19 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL 9 J x 20 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
9 J x 20/ 2.36 in. (60 mm)/
275/40 R 20 106 XL 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.6 in. (1666 mm)
10 J x 20 2,17 in. (55 mm)

Winter tires 235/60 R 18 107 H XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
235/65 R 17 108 H XL1) 7.5 J x 17 2.09 in. (53 mm) 65.2 in. (1655 mm) 65.8 in. (1670 mm)
255/55 R 18 109 V XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
255/50 R 19 107 V XL1) 9 J x 19 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
All-Season 255/55 R 18 109 V XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
1)
235/65 R 17 108 H XL 7.5 J x 17 2.09 in. (53 mm) 65.2 in. (1655 mm) 65.8 in. (1670 mm)
All-Terrain 235/60 R 18 107 T XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
235/65 R 17 108 T XL1) 7.5 J x 17 2.09 in. (53 mm) 65.2 in. (1655 mm) 65.8 in. (1670 mm)
Collapsible spare wheel 195/75 17 6.5 J x 17

358 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Cayenne S Tires Wheel Rim offset Track
front/rear front/rear front rear

Summer tires 255/55 R 18 109 Y XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
275/45 R 19 108 Y XL 9 J x 19 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL 9 J x 20 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
9 J x 20/ 2.36 in. (60 mm)/
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.6 in. (1666 mm)
10 J x 20 2,17 in. (55 mm)

Winter tires 235/60 R 18 107 H XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
1)
255/55 R 18 109 V XL 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
255/50 R 19 107 V XL1) 9 J x 19 2.36 in. (60 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)

All-Season 255/55 R 18 109 V XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)

All-Terrain 235/60 R 18 107 T XL1) 8 J x 18 2.24 in. (57 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)

Collapsible spare wheel 195/75 18 6.5 J x 18

The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “T”) for permitted top
Cayenne and Cayenne S speed are minimum requirements.
When fitting new tires or changing tires: Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 277.

The authorisation of tire and rim sizes is determined on the basis of extensive testing.
Tire and rim sizes Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about the current authorisation status.
Refitting with sizes not authorized by Porsche may have a dangerous effect on driving stability.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 359

Cayenne S Tires Wheel Rim offset Track
front/rear front/rear front rear

Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only with the tire + rim combination marked 1).
The best possible handling characteristics are achieved when snow chains are fitted on all four wheels
of the vehicle. However, it is also possible to fit snow chains on only one axle (preferably the rear axle).
Snow chains 1) For safety reasons, vehicles with snow chains must not be driven faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).
f Observe the respective road traffic regulations.
f Use only Porsche-authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.

360 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Tire Pressures, Cold
Partially loaded Cayenne S Cayenne
Tire size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
235/65 R 17
235/60 R 18
255/55 R 18 38 psi (2.6 bar) 43 psi (2.9 bar) 38 psi (2.6 bar) 43 psi (2.9 bar)
275/45 R 19
275/40 R 20
Collapsible spare wheel 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)

Fully loaded Cayenne S Cayenne

Tire size Front axle Rear axle Front axle Rear axle
235/65 R 17
235/60 R 18
255/55 R 18 38 psi (2.6 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar) 38 psi (2.6 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar)
275/45 R 19
275/40 R 20
Collapsible spare wheel 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)

These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 277.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 361

Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.

Cayenne S Cayenne

Engine oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters) approx. 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters)
Engine oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 9.0 quarts (8.5 liters) approx. 6.7 quarts (6.3 liters)
Reference indication is the level on the oil dipstick.
Please observe the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL” on Page 244.
Coolant 1) approx. 4.8 – 5.5 U.S. gallons (18 – 21 liters) approx. 3.4 – 4.8 U.S. gallons (13 – 18 liters)
Manual transmission with compensation approx.1.9 quarts (1.8 litres) approx.1.9 quarts (1.8 litres)
Automatic transmission with torque converter approx. 10.6 quarts (10.0 liters) approx. 10.6 quarts (10.0 liters)
Transfer box approx. 0.9 quarts (0.85 liter) approx. 0.9 quarts (0.85 liter)
Front-axle differential approx. 1.1 quarts (1.0 liter) approx. 1.1 quarts (1.0 liter)
Rear-axle differential approx. 1.5 quarts (1.4 liters) approx. 1.2 quarts (1.25 liters)
Locking rear differential approx. 1.7 quarts (1.6 liters) approx. 1.7 quarts (1.6 liters)
approx. 26.4 U.S. gallons (100 liters), approx. 26.4 U.S. gallons (100 liters),
Fuel tank
including approx. 3 U.S. gallons (12 liters) reserve including approx. 3 U.S. gallons (12 liters) reserve
The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premium fuel with
98 RON/88 MON is used.
Fuel quality
If unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON/85 MON are used, the engine's “Electronic
Oktane™ knock control“ automatically adapts the ignition timing.
Power steering approx. 1.6 quarts (1.5 liters) Pentosin CHF 11 S® approx. 1.6 quarts (1.5 liters) Pentosin CHF 11 S®
Brake fluid approx. 1.0 quart (0.95 liter) approx. 1.0 quart (0.95 liter)
Use only Original Porsche brake fluid. Use only Original Porsche brake fluid.
Window/headlight washer system approx. 7.9 quarts (7.5 liters) approx. 7.9 quarts (7.5 liters)
1 Depending on equipment level

362 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Weights
Cayenne Cayenne Cayenne S Cayenne S
manual transmission Tiptronic S manual transmission Tiptronic S

Empty weight
Empty weight (depending on equipment)
4860 - 5670 lbs. 4784 -5578 lbs. 5006 - 5850 lbs. 4949 - 5776 lbs.
per DIN 70020
(2160 - 2520 Kg) (2170 - 2530 kg) (2225-2600 kg) (2245 - 2620 kg)
5029 - 5839 lbs. 5051 - 5861 lbs. 5175 - 6019 lbs. 5220 - 6064 lbs.
per 70/156/EEC1)
(2235 - 2595 kg) (2245 - 2605 kg) (2300 - 2675 kg) (2320 - 2695 kg)
Maximum axle load, front 2) 3053 lbs. (1385 kg) 3053 lbs. (1385 kg) 3208 lbs. (1455 kg) 3208 lbs. (1455 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear 2) 3637 lbs. (1650 kg) 3637 lbs. (1650 kg) 3704 lbs. (1680 kg) 3704 lbs. (1680 kg)
Maximum gross weight 6492 lbs. (2945 kg) 6492 lbs. (2945 kg) 6790 lbs. (3080 kg) 6790 lbs. (3080 kg)
Trailer operation Canada/USA
Maximum gross weight 6713 lbs. (3045 kg) 6713 lbs. (3045 kg) 7155 lbs. (3180 kg) 6790 lbs. (3080 kg)
3053/3858 lbs. 3053/3858 lbs. 3208/3913 lbs. 3208/3913 lbs.
Maximum axle load, front/rear axle
(1385/1750 kg) (1385/1750 kg) (1455/1775 kg) (1455/1775 kg)
Roof load
Maximum roof load 3) 225 lbs. (100 kg) 225 lbs. (100 kg) 225 lbs. (100 kg) 225 lbs. (100 kg)
when roof rail is fitted3) 165 lbs. (75kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg)
Towing capacity/vehicle + trailer weight
Maximum towing capacity, braked
7716 lbs. (3500 kg) 7716 lbs. (3500 kg) 7716 lbs. (3500 kg) 7716 lbs. (3500 kg)
(up to a max. 12% slope)
Maximum towing capacity, unbraked 1654 lbs. (750 kg) 1654 lbs. (750 kg) 1654 lbs. (750 kg) 1654 lbs. (750 kg)
Maximum vehicle + trailer weight 14209 lbs. (6445 kg) 14209 lbs. (6445 kg) 14209 lbs. (6580 kg) 14506 lbs. (6580 kg)
Maximum trailer hich load 308 lbs. (140 kg) 308 lbs. (140 kg) 308 lbs. (140 kg) 308 lbs. (140 kg)

1)
Empty weight includes 165 lbs. (75 kg) driver and baggage share.
2)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional equipment is installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
3) Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 363

Driving Performance
The specifications refer to a vehicle at DIN empty weight and max. 441 lbs. (200 kg) load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment (e.g. special tires)
Cayenne Cayenne Cayenne S Cayenne S
manual transmission Tiptronic S manual transmission Tiptronic S

Top speed 133 mph (214 km/h) 133 mph (214 km/h ) 150 mph (242 km/h) 150 mph (242 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 62 mph (100 km/h) 9.1 seconds 9.7 seconds 6.8 seconds 7.2 seconds
Maximum speed when driving with a trailer 50 mph (80 km/h)

364 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Dimensions
Cayenne S Cayenne
Length 188.3 in. (4782 mm) 188.3 in. (4782 mm)
Length with external spare wheel 197.6 in. (5018 mm) 197.6 in. (5018 mm)
Width 75.9 in. (1928 mm) 75.9 in. (1928 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight 66.9 in. (1699 mm) 66.9 in. (1699 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight (rail) 68.5 in. (1741 mm) 68.5 in. (1741 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight (basic carrier of Roof Transport System) 70.4 in. (1789 mm) 70.4 in. (1789 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight with rear lid open 87.4 in. (2219 mm) 87.4 in. (2219 mm)
Max. wading depth 19.7 in. (500 mm)1) 19.7 in. (500 mm)1)
Track
17" front 65.2 in. (1655 mm)
17" rear 65.8 in. (1670 mm)
18" front 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 64.8 in. (1647 mm)
18" rear 65.4 in. (1662 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
19" front 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm)
19" rear 65.2 in. (1656 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
20" front 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 64.6 in. (1641 mm)
20" rear 65.2 in. (1656 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in. (2855 mm) 112.4 in. (2855 mm)
Overhang, front 36.4 in. (924 mm) 36.4 in. (924 mm)
rear 39.5 in. (1003 mm) 39.5 in. (1003 mm)
Turning circle 461 in. (11.7 m) 461 in. (11.7 m)
1) Up to 21.9 in. (555 mm) for vehicles with air suspension at special terrain level.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 365

Ground Clearance
Cayenne S Cayenne

Steel suspension
Ramp angle 20.4° 20.4°
Overhang angle, front 29.1° 29.1°
Overhang angle, rear 25.7° 25.7°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 8.5 in. (217 mm) 8.5 in. (217 mm)
Air suspension – normal level
Ramp angle 20.4° 20.4°
Overhang angle, front 29.1° 29.1°
Overhang angle, rear 25.7° 25.7°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 8.5 in. (217 mm) 8.5 in. (217 mm)
Air suspension – low level
Ramp angle 17.7° 17.7°
Overhang angle, front 27.3° 27.3°
Overhang angle, rear 23.7° 23.7°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 7.5 in. (190 mm) 7.5 in. (190 mm)
Air suspension – loading level
Ramp angle 14.9° 14.9°
Overhang angle, front 24° 24°
Overhang angle, rear 21.7° 21.7°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 6.2 in. (157 mm) 6.2 in. (157 mm)
Air suspension – terrain level
Ramp angle 22.2° 22.2°
Overhang angle, front 30.7° 30.7°
Overhang angle, rear 26.6° 26.6°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 9.6 in. (243 mm) 9.6 in. (243 mm)

366 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

 Cayenne S Cayenne

Air suspension – special terrain level

Ramp angle 24.7° 24.7°
Overhang angle, front 32.4° 32.4°
Overhang angle, rear 28.3° 28.3°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 10.7 in. (273 mm) 10.7 in. (273 mm)

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 367

Index
A Function ...............................................49 B
ABD ......................................... 217, 219, 221 Battery.........................59, 62, 78, 174, 320
Unit......................................................52
ABS ......................................... 217, 220, 223 Warning light.........................................50 After charging.....................................333
Off road .............................................224 Air-conditioned areas Car key ..............................................334
Warning light ...................................... 223 Rear...................................................141
Care...................................................320
After driving off road ................................... 228 Air-conditioning compressor.......129, 135, 140
Charge state.......................................320
Aftermarket Alarms ..................................... 173 Alarm button.................................................17
Charging ............................................333
Air cleaner.................................................. 254 Alarm system .21, 23, 27, 28, 30, 194, 310
Installing.............................................330
Air conditioning Alcantara....................................................273
Putting vehicle into operation ...............321
Central vents ............................. 134, 140 All-Season tires ..................................358, 359
Removing ...........................................328
All-Terrain tires ...................................358, 359
Cover flap .......................................... 128 Removing/installing ....................323, 327
All-wheel drive...........................113, 217, 219
Disabling control panel (rear) ............... 137 Replacing ...........................................322
Anti-freeze content ......................................249
Display............................. 129, 132, 136 Warning light.......................................111
Anti-lock brake system ..............217, 220, 223
Footwell ....................................134, 140 Winter driving......................................321
Anti-roll bars
Four zone........................................... 136 Before driving off .................................12, 228
Disengageable ....................................214
Fresh-air intake ................................... 127 Belts ............................................................42
Armrest......................................................178
Mono function..................................... 133 Fastening .............................................44
Ashtray
Rear.......................................... 137, 141 Height adjustment .................................45
Front..................................................170
REST mode ............................... 135, 141 Opening ...............................................44
Rear...................................................170
Sensors .............................................128 Tensioner .............................................43
Assembly aid .....................................301, 307
Setting air quantity ............ 130, 133, 139 Warning light..................................43, 48
Assistance when driving downhill..................226
Setting temperature ................... 133, 138 Brake...........................................................65
Audio
Side vents ................................. 134, 140 Booster ................................................67
Tips ...................................................172
Two zone .................................. 129, 132 Discs ...................................................68
AUTO button....................132, 133, 136, 138
Vents ................................................. 127 Pads ....................................................68
AUTO-LOCK ..................................................23
Windshield ................................. 134, 140 Warning light.........................................66
Automatic anti-dazzle operation......................58
Air quantity Brake fluid
Automatic brake differential .......217, 219, 221
Setting ............................. 130, 133, 139 Changing............................................252
Automatic circulating-air mode ............134, 139
Air suspension ................. 163, 179, 217, 236 Brake light..................................................346
Automatic mode, air conditioning132, 133, 138
Airbag................................................. 49, 273 Brake tests.................................................226
Automatic transmission fluid ........................254
Disposal ............................................... 51 Brake wear

368 Index
 Warning light ........................................ 68 Child restraint systems ..................................47 Interrupting ........................................ 125
Brake-fluid level Child seat bracket .........................................48 Speed limit ........................................ 124
Checking ............................................ 251 Child seats ...................................................48 Storing speed .................................... 124
Brakes ................................................ 64, 226 Installing...............................................48 Switching off ...................................... 126
Fluid.......................................... 251, 362 Childproof locks Switching on ...................................... 124
Fluid warning light ...................... 112, 252 Rear doors ...........................................26 Cupholder.................................................. 180
Pads ............................................. 14, 69 Cigarette lighter..........................................171 Closing rear ....................................... 181
Test stand .......................................... 226 Circulating-air mode ...........................134, 139 Opening front ..................................... 180
Warning light ........................................ 65 Circulating-air mode, automatic ...........134, 139 opening rear ...................................... 181
Wear.................................................. 112 Cleaner Removing insert front ......................... 180
Bulbs Air......................................................254
Changing............................................ 346 Particle...............................................254
Chart ................................................. 335 Clock ..................................................77, 101 D
Closing mechanism, power ..........................183 Data bank.................................................. 354
Clutch ........................................................202 Diagnostic Socket ........................................ 15
C Collapsible spare wheel ............. 92, 110, 222, Dimensions................................................ 365
Capacities .................................................. 362 ......................................302, 327, 358, 359 Dimming.................................................... 151
Car care..................................................... 265 Comfort function Button ............................................... 149
Car key Sliding/lifting roof.......................153, 158 Door lock
Battery............................................... 334 Comfort lighting ..........................................151 Deicing .............................................. 267
Car Telephone ............................................ 173 Coming Home function .......................106, 151 Door locking, automatic....................... 23, 104
Care ................................................. 269, 271 Compass....................................................102 Door mirrors.............................. 56, 151, 198
cargo area ................................................. 186 Compressor ......................................293, 304 Automatic anti-dazzle operation ............. 58
Carpet ....................................................... 272 Coolant Driving with a trailer............................ 198
Catalytic converter...................................... 264 Checking ............................................249 Extending ............................................ 57
Center differential lock ................................ 213 Cooling system .............................................75 Folding in............................................. 57
Central locking system ......................... 21, 310 Engine coolant level warning ..................75 Heating................................................ 57
Button.................................................. 22 Temperature gauge...............................75 Setting ................................................ 57
Button (rear) .................................. 22, 31 Warning................................................75 Swivelling, automatic ............................ 57
Unlocking vehicle doors......................... 21 Cornering light ...................................117, 342 Door opening.......... 19, 20, 21, 23, 26, 104
Central vents ..................................... 134, 140 Crankcase ventilation ..................................264 Emergency operation ........................... 18
Changing wheels................................294, 301 Crossing obstacles .....................................234 Door trim panel
Check engine ............................................... 79 Cruise control Lighting ............................................. 151
Checking hydraulic fluid (power steering) ...... 253 Accelerating .......................................125 Doors.......................................................... 26
Child restraint anchorages............................. 46 Decelerating .......................................125 Door-surrounding lighting ............................ 151

Index 369
Drinks holder.............................................. 180 Emergency flasher ......................................120 Topping up .........................................246
Closing rear........................................ 181 Emergency operation Warning ..............................................244
Opening front ..................................... 180 Door lock .............................................23 Engine oil level............................................244
opening rear....................................... 181 Doors...................................................18 Checking ............................................244
Removing insert front .......................... 180 Ignition key ...........................................18 Engine residual heat ...........................135, 141
Driving Sliding/lifting roof................................154 Entry aid.......................................................35
Load .................................................. 197 Emergency starting.....................................331 Switching on and off ..............................35
Off road ............................................. 227 Emergency unlocking Exhaust gas
Sand.................................................. 234 Filler flap ............................................260 Monitoring ..............................................5
Trailer ................................................ 199 Selector lever .....................................210 Monitoring warning light ..................70, 72
Winter ................................................ 209 Spare wheel bracket ...........................309 Exit aid.........................................................35
Driving downhill .......................................... 231 Emission control .................................5, 8, 79 Switching on and off ..............................35
Driving light assistant Check engine warning light ....................79
Light switch........................................ 116 Emission Control System .............................263
Driving light assistant, automatic.................. 117 Engine F
Driving performance ................................... 364 Cooling system .....................................75 Fabric linings ..............................................273
Driving program Data...................................................356 Filler flap ....................................................259
Low Range indicator light .................... 212 Idling..................................................204 Release ................................................15
Off road ........................... 206, 208, 211 Starting and stopping ............................61 Filling pressure..............................................87
Reduced ............................................ 209 Engine compartment Plate ..................................................355
Road.................................................. 212 Cleaning .............................................269 Reducing ...................................304, 306
Driving programme Lid .....................................................184 Tables ................................................361
Off road ............................................. 216 Engine compartment lid Warning light.........................70, 72, 110
Road................................ 205, 207, 216 Warning light.......................................115 Warning message..................................95
Driving systems for off-road driving .............. 228 Engine drag torque control ..........................221 Fire extinguisher..........................................175
Driving with a trailer .................. 165, 198, 363 Engine Oil First aid kit .................................................179
Drop-center rim .......................................... 290 Performance class ..............................248 Floor mats..................................................272
DVD Player........................................ 179, 181 Viscosity.............................................248 Fluids and fuels ...........................................362
Engine oil ...................................................243 Fog lights ...................................................116
Change ..............................................247 Folding wedges...........................................295
E Dipstick..............................................245 Footbrake.....................................................65
Easy Entry function ....................................... 35 Level..................................................244 Warning light.........................................66
ECON mode ...................................... 135, 140 Recommendation ................................247 Footwell light ..............................................151
Button.............................. 129, 132, 136 Temperature gauge...............................74 Fresh-air intake ...........................................127
Electrical system ........................................ 310 Front seat with memory ..........................33, 34

370 Index
Front seats................................................... 32 Bi-Xenon ....................................339, 342 Switching on, temporarily...................... 28
Adjusting the seats................................ 32 Changing for left-hand traffic ................349 Instrument panel
Seat position ........................................ 32 Closing the housing lid.........................340 Lighting ............................................. 118
Front windshield wiper................................. 122 Halogen.....................................339, 341 Interior light, front ...................................... 149
Fuel .................................................... 76, 259 Height adjustment ...............................349 Interior lighting........................................... 149
Economy............................................ 258 Opening the housing lid .......................340 Interior mirror .............................................. 56
Evaporation control ............................. 262 Setting ...............................................348 ISOFIX system.............................................. 48
Level gauges ........................................ 76 Washer system ...................................122
Recommendations .............................. 261 Headrest ......................................................36
Fuel containers, portable ........................ 6, 262 Installing...............................................36 J
Fuel gauge ................................................... 76 Removing .............................................36 Jack................................................. 238, 291
Fuel quality ..................................................... 8 Setting .................................................36 Jacking point ............................................. 298
Function keys ............................................... 54 Heated rear window .........127, 128, 132, 136 Jump lead starting
Lighting................................................ 55 Height adjustment ..............................217, 236 Leads................................................ 332
Fuse assignment.........................................313 High beam.........................................116, 119 Jumper cables ........................................... 331
Fuses......................................................... 311 Indicator light.................................70, 72
Switch................................................119
High Range...............86, 205, 207, 212, 216
K
G On-road driving program ......................211
Keys............................................................ 17
Garage door opener.................................... 167 Changing the battery .......................... 334
High-pressure cleaning units.........................266
Allocating ........................................... 168 Emergency operation ........................... 18
Hillholder ....................................................224
Changeable code system ....................168 Kickdown................................................... 206
Horn ............................................................52
Deleting .............................................169
Fixed code system .............................. 168
Gas discharge lamp .................................... 342 I L
Leather care .............................................. 272
Glasses case.............................................. 176 Identification number ...................................354
Left-hand traffic.......................................... 349
Glove compartment .................................... 177 Idling..........................................................204
Level control... 85, 163, 179, 217, 236, 293
Gross weight .............................................. 195 Ignition lock ..................................................59
Loading level.................... 237, 238, 366
Ground clearance ....................................... 365 Immobilizer...................................................19
Low level ........................................... 236
Inclination sensor .....................21, 23, 27, 30
Normal level....................................... 236
Function indication ................................27
H Monitored areas....................................28
Special low level................................. 236
Hand-held transmitter .................................. 167 Special terrain level ............................ 236
Switching off.........................................27
Headlight beam adjustment ....... 109, 118, 198 Switching off, temporarily ......................28
Switching on and off ........................... 238
Headlights................................ 198, 271, 337 Switching on .........................................27
Warning light...................................... 238

Index 371
Licence plate light....................................... 151 Loadspace ........................................186, 197 Maximum permitted engine speeds ..............202
License plate light....................................... 347 Loadspace floor..........................................186 Memory.................................................33, 34
Lid Locking conditions ........................................22 Minor paint damage.....................................268
Engine compartment ........................... 184 Locking the steering column Minor repairs ..............................................276
Engine compartment warning light........ 115 With Porsche Entry & Drive ....................60 Mirrors .......................................................198
Luggage compartment ........................ 182 Locking, keyless ...........................................24 Door mirrors.........................................56
Seal ................................................... 271 Immobilizer...........................................25 Interior mirror .......................................56
Lifting Switching off readiness for operation......25 Moving off .........................................203, 205
Garage lift .......................................... 292 Unlocking vehicle doors .........................24 Moving-off assistant ....................................225
Jack................................................... 298 Locks ..........................................................86 MSR...........................................................221
Platform ............................................. 292 Low beam ................................116, 151, 342 Multi-functional steering wheel ........................54
Light Switch................................................116 Function keys.................................54, 55
Flasher............................................... 119 Low level....................................................236 Multi-purpose display .....................80, 92, 185
Switch......................................... 99, 116 Low Range ...............86, 206, 208, 212, 216 Basic screens .......................................81
Light alloy wheels ....................................... 271 Indicator light......................................212 Clock .................................................101
Inscription .......................................... 290 Off-road driving program......................211 Collapsible spare wheel .........................92
Light segments........................................... 164 Luggage Comfort..............................................103
Lighter Compartment cover ............................176 Compass ............................................102
front .................................................. 171 Safety net...........................................176 Factory settings ..................................107
rear ................................................... 171 Luggage compartment ................................186 Language ...........................................107
Lights ............................................... 198, 271 Luggage compartment cover.......................187 Level ....................................................85
Changing............................................ 336 Luggage compartment lid...................182, 183 Lighting ..............................................106
Chart ................................................. 335 Locking ................................................24 Load ....................................................93
Limit speed Opening ...............................................24 Locks/reduction....................................86
Off-road shifting ......................... 213, 216 Luggage net ...............................................186 Main menu ............................................82
Load.......................................................... 197 Luggage safety net .....................................189 MPH limit ..............................................83
Compartment cover ............................ 176 Bracket ..............................................189 Operation, controls................................80
Full ...................................................... 93 Settings..............................................101
Partial .................................................. 93 Spare wheel..........................................91
Safety net .......................................... 176 M System.................................................94
Securing (ski bag) ............................... 192 Main menu....................................................82 Tire pressure .................................87, 89
Stowing..................................... 197, 198 Make-up mirror ...........................................147 Tire sealant/sealing set .........................92
Load fastening points.................................. 186 Manual headlight beam adjustment......109, 198 Tire type...............................................90
Loading level ..................................... 237, 366 Manual Transmission Units ..................................................106
Clutch ................................................202

372 Index
 Vehicle info........................................... 84 Factory settings ..................................107 Programming ............................ 143, 144
Warnings .............................................. 85 Language ...........................................107 Switching on and off ........................... 143
Level....................................................85 Parking light .............................................. 119
Lighting ..............................................106 Particle filter .............................................. 254
N Load ....................................................93 PASM ............................................... 217, 239
Navigation system ...................................... 174 Locks/reduction....................................86 Display .............................................. 239
Normal level ............................................... 236 Main menu............................................82 Indicator light ..................................... 113
MPH limit..............................................83 Warning light...................................... 239
Operation, controls ...............................80 Passenger compartment ............................ 197
O Settings .............................................101 Passenger compartment
Octane ratings............................................ 261
Spare wheel..........................................91 monitoring system............ 21, 23, 27, 28, 30
Odometer .................................................... 76 Passenger-seat drawer ............................... 179
System.................................................94
Off delay ........................................... 106, 151
Tire pressure .................................87, 89 PCM.......................................................... 174
Off-road ABS ..................................... 224, 231 Person buttons ............................................ 33
Tire sealant/sealing set .........................92
Off-road driving ........................................... 227 Plastic parts .............................................. 271
Tire type...............................................90
Recommendation ................................ 228 Polishing.................................................... 268
Units ..................................................106
Off-road shifting
Vehicle info ...........................................84 Porsche Active Suspension Management .... 217,
Limit speed ............................... 213, 216 239
Warnings ..............................................85
Oil ............................................................. 243 Display .............................................. 239
Operating in other countries.........................258
Change .............................................. 248 Indicator light ..................................... 113
Oxygen sensor ...........................................264
Consumption ........................................ 14 Warning light...................................... 239
Dipstick.............................................. 245 Porsche Communication Management ......... 174
Filler opening ...................................... 246 P Porsche Down-Hill Assistant ........................ 226
Performance class .............................. 248 Paint ..........................................................268 Porsche Drive-Off Assistant ......................... 225
Temperature gauge .............................. 74 Panic button .................................................17 Porsche Entry & Drive ......................... 24, 182
Topping up .........................................246 Panorama roof system ................................156 Immobilizer .......................................... 25
Viscosity ............................................ 248 ParkAssist ................................162, 164, 199 Opening/locking rear window ................ 24
Warnings ............................................ 244 Parking ......................................................209 Opening/locking spare wheel bracket .... 24
Oil level Parking aid ..........................................34, 162 Porsche Stability Management .. 217, 220, 302
Checking ............................................ 244 Parking brake ...............................................64 Deactivating....................................... 222
On-board computer .............................. 80, 185 Test stand ..........................................226 Indicator light ..................................... 112
Basic Screens ...................................... 81 Warning light................................65, 112 Information light ................................. 222
Clock ................................................. 101 Parking heater ............................................142 Off road............................................. 221
Collapsible spare wheel ......................... 92 Activating the memory.........................145 Switching on ...................................... 222
Comfort .............................................103 Faults.................................................146

Index 373
 Warning light ............... 70, 72, 112, 222 Rear differential lock ...................................214 Roof Transport System ..............193, 363, 365
Porsche Traction Management............ 217, 218 Rear fog light.....................................116, 346 Running in
Power measurement ................................... 242 Rear lid ......................................................182 Tires ....................................................14
Power steering ........................................... 253 Locking ................................................24 Running-gear control systems ......................217
Power windows ..................................... 29, 30 Opening ...............................................24 Running-gear setup......................................239
Comfort function (windows).................... 30 Unlocking .............................................20 Indicator light ......................................113
One-touch operation .............................. 30 Rear light ...................................................345 Warning light.......................................239
Opening/closing windows ...................... 29 Rear seats....................................................37
Readiness for operation......................... 29 Folding forward.....................................37
Storing end position .............................. 31 Positioning............................................39 S
Switching off (rear)......................... 22, 31 Rear window...............................................184 Safety belts .........................................42, 273
Power-transmission..................................... 217 Locking ................................................24 Belt tensioner .......................................43
Preservation ............................................... 268 Opening ........................................20, 24 Fastening..............................................44
Pressure tester........................................... 306 Unlocking .............................................20 Height adjustment .................................45
PSM ........................................ 217, 220, 302 Rear window wiper ......................................123 Opening................................................44
Deactivating ....................................... 222 Rear-axle load.............................................195 Warning light..................................43, 48
Indicator light...................................... 112 Reduction.....................................................86 Safety catch, engine compartment lid...........185
Information light.................................. 222 Reflector ....................................................345 Safety compliance sticker............................355
Off road ............................................. 221 Refuelling ...................................................260 Safety net...................................................188
Switching on....................................... 222 Relays ........................................................310 Assembly............................................190
Warning light ............... 70, 72, 112, 222 Release button............................................203 Bracket ..............................................189
PTM........................................................... 217 Relocking, automatic.....................................21 Permitted uses....................................189
Remote control .............................................17 Screewdriver ..............................................291
Changing the battery ...........................334 Sealant.........................................91, 98, 296
R Removing spots and stains ..........................268 Warning light.......................................110
Radiator fans.............................................. 243 Reserve .....................................................260 Sealing set .................................................296
Radio REST button .............................129, 132, 136 Seals, care .................................................271
Tips ................................................... 172 REST mode .......................................135, 141 Seat heating ........................................40, 137
Radio remote control .................................... 17 Reverse gear.....................................166, 202 For air-conditioned areas at the rear .......41
Changing the battery........................... 334 Reversing light............................................346 Rear...................................................137
Rain sensor ................................................ 121 Rims ..........................................................228 Switching off.........................................40
Rain sensor operation ................................. 122 Diameter ............................................290 Switching on .........................................40
Reading light Rim width ...........................................290 Seat memory.......................................33, 166
Front.................................................. 149 Rocker switches .........................................205 Recall using car key ..............................33
Rear .................................................. 150 Roof console .....................................151, 176 Recall using person buttons ...................33

374 Index
 Storage, automatic ............................... 34 Lifting.................................................153 Steam-jet units ........................................... 163
Storing driver’s seat settings ................. 34 Opening completely.............................153 Steering lock ............................................... 59
Storing parking aid................................ 34 Opening to comfort setting ..................153 Steering wheel ............................................. 52
Storing passenger seat settings............. 34 Readiness for operation.......................152 Adjusting ............................................. 53
Seat memory (comfort) ................................. 33 Sliding/lifting roof .......................................152 Heating................................................ 52
Seat with memory....................................... 166 Closing...............................................153 Multi-functional steering wheel ............... 54
Seats Lifting.................................................153 Shifting.............................................. 206
Front.................................................... 32 Opening completely.............................153 Steering wheel buttons ................................. 54
Position................................................ 32 Opening to comfort setting ..................153 Lighting ............................................... 55
Rear..................................................... 37 Readiness for operation.......................152 Stopping ................................................... 209
Setting ................................................. 32 Snow chains ......................................288, 360 Storage.............................................. 16, 176
Security wheel bolts.................................... 293 Snow tires ..................................................286 Storage compartment ................................ 176
Selection mode Socket .......................................................310 in the luggage compartment ............... 179
Automatic........................................... 205 Spare parts ................................................354 Storage tray
Manual ............................................... 207 Spare wheel ......91, 92, 302, 307, 327, 358 Armrest, front .................................... 178
Selector lever.............................................203 Warning light.......................................110 Armrest, rear ..................................... 178
Selector lever lock ...................................... 210 Spare wheel bracket ..........................182, 308 Stowing luggage ............................... 197, 198
Selector lever position ................................ 204 Locking ................................................24 Subwoofer
Display............................................... 203 Opening ...............................................24 Installing ............................................ 328
Service indicator.........................................112 Unlocking .............................................20 Removing .......................................... 328
Shifting Special low level .........................................236 Summer tires............................................. 358
Down ................................................. 207 Special terrain level.....................................236 Sun blind ................................................... 148
On the steering wheel.......................... 205 Speed code letter .......................................289 Sun visors ................................................. 147
Up ..................................................... 207 Speed limit ..........................................91, 289
Shifting gears .............................................202 Speedometer
Shifting up.................................................. 208 Cayenne S .....................................70, 72 T
Shock absorber adjustment ......................... 217 SportDesign package......................................7 Tachometer ................................... 70, 72, 74
Shock absorbers ........................................ 217 Stability Management System .............220, 222 Tail light..................................................... 345
Side lights .................................................. 116 Indicator light......................................112 Tank opening ............................................. 259
Side marker light ........................................ 151 Off road..............................................221 Telephone.................................................. 173
Side vents ......................................... 134, 140 Warning light.........................70, 72, 112 Temperature
Ski bag ...................................................... 191 Stability management system.......................217 Sensor ..................................... 132, 136
Sliding roof................................................. 152 Starting......................................................203 Setting ..................................... 133, 138
Closing............................................... 153 Starting and stopping ....................................61 Temporary change-down ............................. 205
Terrain level ............................................... 236

Index 375
Test stands Damage .............................................283 Turn signal/high beam/headlight flasher stalk119
Measurement ..................................... 226 Flat ....................................................295 Tyre pressure
Theft protection ............................................ 16 Inflating .....................................303, 305 Warning message..................................95
Through-load bag........................................ 191 Inscription ..........................................289
Securing load ..................................... 192 Replacing ...........................................284
Through-load facility .................................... 191 Sidewall..............................................289 U
Tie-down Size ...................................................289 Ultrasonic measurement ..............................165
Belts .................................................. 186 Tracks ...............................................358 Ultrasound sensors, ParkAssist ....................163
Equipment .......................................... 197 Type ....................................................91 Ultrasound sources .....................................165
Rings ........................................ 186, 189 Valves ................................................284 Undercoating ..............................................270
Tiptronic ...................................... 15, 52, 203 Tool kit .......................................................276 Unlocking, keyless ........................................24
Rocker switches .......................... 52, 205 Screewdriver ......................................291 Immobilizer ...........................................25
Tire Tools..........................................................276 Uphill driving ...............................................230
Care .................................................. 283 Screwdriver ........................................291 Traction..............................................230
Checking pressure .............................. 303 Towing ..............................................210, 350
Life .................................................... 282
Traction ............................................. 280
Capacity.............................................195
Hook..................................................350
V
Vehicle
Wear.................................................. 282 Tow-starting................................................210
Battery .............................174, 320, 333
Tire and rim sizes ....................................... 359 Tracks........................................................358
Tire pressure....................................... 87, 198
Care...................................................265
Traction......................................................230
Data bank ...........................................354
Load .................................................. 197 Traction systems.........................................217
Identification number ...........................354
Plate .................................................. 355 Trailer
Keys ...........................................17, 334
Reducing................................... 304, 306 Coupling.............................................194
Laying up............................................274
Specifications ..................................... 100 Hitch ..................................................194
Tables................................................ 361 Lowering ............................................238
Hitching..............................................194
Warning light ........................ 70, 72, 110 Unhitching ..........................................194
Putting into operation ..........................321
Transmission .....................................202, 357
Raising ...............................................237
Warning message ................................. 95
Tire pressure monitoring system .................... 87 Transport ............................................28, 238 Recovery ............................................352
Monitoring ............................................ 94 Turn signal light ..........................................344 Securing against rolling .......................295
System learning process ....................... 89 Indicator light.................................70, 72 Storage ..............................................321
Tire sealant .................................. 91, 98, 296 Rear...................................................346 Transport ....................................28, 238
Warning light ...................................... 110 Switch................................................119 Washing .............................................266
Tires .......................................................... 277 Turn signal pilot light Vehicle door
Changing............................................ 174 Indicator light.................................70, 72 Locking .........................................20, 24
Unlocking .............................................20

376 Index
Vehicle key Windshield wipers .....................123, 184, 255
Battery............................................... 334 Blades................................................269
Ventilation ................................ 128, 132, 136 Front ..................................................122
Vents ......................................................... 127 Rear...................................................123
Central ...................................... 134, 140 Switch................................................121
Footwell ....................................134, 140 Winter
Side .......................................... 134, 140 Driving ...............................................321
Vertical coupling load .................................. 195 Tires ..................................................358
Voltmeter ..................................................... 78 Wiper blades .....................................255, 269
Battery/generator warning..................... 78 Changing ...................................255, 257
Working on your vehicle...............................242

W
Warning triangle.......................................... 179
Warnings...................................................... 85
Washer fluid
Level.................................................. 252
Topping up .........................................252
Washer system, windshield wipers................122
Washing ..................................................... 266
Water crossing ........................................... 232
Weights...................................................... 363
Wheel alignment .........................................285
Wheel bolts ................................................ 293
Removing .................................. 301, 307
Wheel change.............................................287
Wheels.............................................. 271, 277
Adjusting ............................................ 285
Change ..................................... 294, 301
Storing............................................... 286
Tracks ............................................... 358
Wheel balancing......................... 226, 285
Windows .................................................... 269
Windshield................................ 134, 140, 252
Windshield wiper/washer stalk ..................... 121

Index 377
Porsche and the Environment .......................... 4 Voltmeter .....................................................78 Rear Lid .....................................................182
Never invite car theft! .................................... 16 Emission Control...........................................79 Rear Window...............................................184
Keys ............................................................ 17 Multi-Purpose Display ....................................80 Engine Compartment Lid .............................184
Central Locking System ................................ 21 Warning Lights and Warning Messages .........108 Loadspace .................................................186
Porsche Entry & Drive ................................... 24 Light Switch ...............................................116 Luggage Compartment Cover ......................187
Doors .......................................................... 26 Instrument Illumination.................................118 Luggage Safety Net ....................................189
Alarm System, Ultrasound Passenger Compart- Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment..........118 Ski Bag ......................................................191
ment Monitoring System, Inclination Sensor .... 27 Turn signal/High Beam/Headlight Flasher Stalk ... Roof Transport System................................193
Power Windows ............................................ 29 119 Trailer Coupling...........................................194
Front seats................................................... 32 Emergency flasher ......................................120 Loading Information.....................................195
Front seat with memory................................. 33 Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ....................121 Manual transmission, clutch .........................202
Easy Entry Function ...................................... 35 Cruise Control ............................................124 Tiptronic S..................................................203
Headrests .................................................... 36 Vents .........................................................127 Selector Lever Positions ..............................204
Rear Seats ................................................... 37 Fresh-air intake ...........................................127 Driving Programs for On-Road and Off-Road Dri-
Heated Seats – Front and Rear ...................... 40 Heated Rear Window ...................................128 ving ...........................................................211
Safety Belts.................................................. 42 Manual Air Conditioning ...............................129 Power-Transmission and Running-Gear Control Sy-
Child Restraint Anchorages............................ 46 Automatically Controlled Two-Zone Air Condi- stems ........................................................217
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 47 tioning........................................................132 Off-Road Driving ..........................................227
Airbag Systems ............................................ 49 Automatically Controlled Four-Zone Air Condi- Air Suspension with Level Control and Height Adju-
Steering Wheel ............................................. 52 tioning........................................................136 stment .......................................................236
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ...................... 54 Parking Heater............................................142 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) .
Interior Mirror ............................................... 56 Sun Visors..................................................147 239
Door Mirrors ................................................ 56 Sun Blinds, Rear Side Windows ....................148 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Mirror .......................... 58 Interior Lighting ..........................................149 Vehicle .......................................................242
Ignition Lock/Steering Lock ........................... 59 Door-Surrounding Lighting ...........................151 Engine Oil Level ..........................................244
Starting and Stopping the Engine ................... 61 Coming Home Function (Off Delay) ...............151 Engine Oil Recommendation.........................247
Parking Brake............................................... 64 Sliding/Lifting Roof .....................................152 Coolant Level..............................................249
Brakes ......................................................... 65 Parking Aids ...............................................162 Brake-Fluid Level .........................................251
Instrument Panel USA Models ........................ 70 Garage Door Opener ...................................167 Washer Fluid ...............................................252
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................... 72 Ashtray ......................................................170 Power Steering ...........................................253
Oil Temperature Gauge ................................. 74 Cigarette Lighter.........................................171 Air Cleaner .................................................254
Cooling System ............................................ 75 Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................172 Particle Filter ..............................................254
Fuel ............................................................. 76 Porsche Communication Management (PCM).174 Automatic Transmission Fluid .......................254
Odometer .................................................... 76 Storage......................................................176 Manual Transmission Oil ..............................254
Clock ........................................................... 77 Cupholder ..................................................180 Wiper Blades ..............................................255

378
Fuel Economy.............................................258 Transmission ..............................................357
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries ... 258 Tires, Rims, Tracks .....................................358
Fuel ........................................................... 259 Tire Pressures, Cold ...................................361
Fuel Recommendations ............................... 261 Capacities ..................................................362
Portable Fuel Containers ............................. 262 Weights......................................................363
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................. 262 Driving Performance....................................364
Emission Control System............................. 263 Dimensions.................................................365
Car Care Instructions .................................. 265 Ground Clearance .......................................366
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your
Vehicle....................................................... 276
Notes on Minor Repairs ............................... 276
Tires/Wheels .............................................. 277
Jack .......................................................... 291
Tool Kit ...................................................... 291
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or Garage
lift..............................................................292
Compressor ............................................... 293
Wheel Bolts ................................................ 293
Changing Wheels ........................................ 294
Flat Tire ..................................................... 295
Electrical System........................................ 310
Battery....................................................... 320
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables....... 331
Replacing the remote control battery............ 334
Bulb Chart .................................................. 335
Replacing Bulbs .......................................... 336
Headlights.................................................. 337
Tail Light .................................................... 345
License Plate Lights .................................... 347
Headlight Adjustment .................................. 348
Changing Headlights from Left to Right-Hand Traf-
fic..............................................................349
Towing....................................................... 350
Vehicle Identification.................................... 354
Engine Data................................................ 356

379
380